Nokia 6230 Extended User Manual
Ext end ed UserâÂÂs Guide 9310205 Issue 4
DECLARAT ION OF CONFORMI TY We, NOKIA CORPORATION declare under our sole responsibility that th e product RH-12 is in conformity with the provisions of the follo wing Counc il Dir ecti ve: 1999/ 5/EC. A co py o f the D ecla ratio n of Co nf ormi ty ca n be fo und from http://www.nokia.com/pho nes/declaration_of_conformity/. Copy righ t é 20 04 Noki a. All ri ght s res erv ed. Repro du ction , tran sfer , di stri buti on or sto rage of par t or all of t he con tent s i n this docu ment i n any form wi tho ut the prio r w ritten permi ssi on of Noki a is pr ohi bit ed. Nokia, Nokia Connecti ng People, Xpress-on and Pop-Port are tr ademarks or registered tr ademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Nokia tune is a soun d mark of Nokia Corporation. US Pat ent No 58 18437 and o ther p endi ng pa tents. T 9 text inp ut soft ware C opy right (C) 19 97-200 4. T egic C omm unic ations, Inc. A ll rights reserv ed. Blue tooth i s a re gistere d trad emark of B luetoo th SIG , Inc. Inclu des RSA BS AFE cr ypt ograp hic or se curit y pr otoc ol so ftwar e fr om RSA S ecuri ty. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHIB ITED, EXCEPT FOR USE DIRECTL Y RELATED TO (A) DATA OR INFOR MATION (i) GENERATED BY AND OBTA INED WITHOUT CHARGE FROM A CONSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSIN ESS ENTERPRISE, A ND (ii) FOR PE RSONAL USE ONLY; AND (B) OTHER US ES SPECIFICALLY AND SEPARATELY LICENSED BY M PEG LA, L.L.C. Nok ia o perate s a pol icy of con ti nuou s deve lopme nt . Noki a res erv es th e righ t to ma ke chang es an d impr ovem ents to an y of th e products described in this document without prior notice. Und er no c irc um stan ce s s hal l N okia be re sp ons ibl e fo r a ny los s o f da ta or in com e or a ny s pe cial , in ci den tal, co ns eque nt ial or i ndi re ct dam ag es h o wsoe ve r ca us ed . The co nte nts o f thi s doc ument are prov ided "as is ". Ex cep t as requi red by appl ica ble law, no warr an ties of any kin d, ei ther exp res s or impl ie d, i ncludi ng, but no t li mit ed to, t he impli ed w arran ties of me rcha ntab ili ty an d fitn ess for a part icu lar pu rpos e, ar e mad e in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. No kia reserves the right to revi se this document o r withdra w i t at any time without prior notice. The avail abi lit y of p art icula r pr oducts may vary b y re gion . Pleas e ch eck w ith th e Nok ia d ealer near est t o you .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 4 Co nte nt s Con ten ts FOR YOUR SAFETY ........................................ ............................................................ ............ ........... 12 General information ..................................... ............................................................ ........... ............ 15 Access co des ...................... ................................ ................ ................................. ............ .... ................................ ................ ............... 15 Security code ( 5 to 10 digi ts) .................... ................ ................................. ............................ .................... ................ ............... 15 PIN and P IN2 code s (4 t o 8 digits), Modul e PIN a nd S igning PIN ... ................................ ................ .............. .. ............... 15 PUK and PUK2 code s (8 digits) . ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............... 1 6 Barring passw ord (4 digits) ........................ ................................ ................. ........................... ..................... ............................... 16 Wallet code (4 to 10 digi ts) ....................... ................ ................................. ........................... ..................... ................ ............... 16 Downloadi ng con tent and applicati ons ..................... ................................. ................ ..................... ........... ................ ............... 16 Overview of t he function s of t he pho ne ................... ................ ................................. ..................... ........................... ............... 17 Nokia P C Su ite and Nokia Audio Mana ger ............................ ................. ................................ ............ .... ............................... 19 Shared me mory ............. ................ ................................ ................................. ................ .... ............................ ............................... 19 1. Getting started .......................................... .............................. ...................................... ............... 20 Installin g the SI M card and t he ba ttery .................... ................................. ................ ................... ............................. ............... 20 Charging the ba ttery ....................... ................................ ................ ................................. ... ............. ................................ ............... 21 Switching t he phone on and off .. ................................ ................ ................................. .............. .. ............................................... 22 Normal opera ting position ............ ................ ................................ ................................. ......... ....... ................ ............................... 22 Changing t he covers........ ................................ ................ ................................. ................... ............................. ................ ............... 23 Installing a multim edia card ......... ................................ ................ ................................. ......... ....................... ................ ............... 24 2. Your phone ................................................ ............................................................ ....... ................ 25 Keys and connecto rs ....................... ................ ................................ ................................. .... ............ ................................ ............... 25 Standby m ode ................... ................................ ................................ ................. ............... . ................................ ................ ............... 28 Wallp aper ........................ ................ ................................ ................................. ............. ... ................................ ................ ............... 29 Screen sav er ................................... ................ ................................ ................................ . ................ ................................ ............... 29
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 5 Co nte nt s Power sav ing .. ................................ ................ ................................ ................................. ................................ ............................... 29 Essen tial indicators ...... ................................ ................ ................................. .................... ............................ ............................... 29 Keypad lock (Key guard) .................. ................ ................................ ................. ...................... .......... ................................ ............... 32 Configurati on settings service...... ................................ ................ ................................. .......... ...................... ................ ............... 33 3. Call functions .............. ............................................................ .............................. ....... ................ 34 Making a call ..................... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ............... 34 Speed d ialling a phone num ber ................................ ................................. ................ ................. ............... ............... ................ 35 Answering or rejecting an incoming call .. ................................ ................. ................................ ..... ........... ............................... 35 Call waiti ng .................... ................................ ................................ ................. .............. .. ................................ ............................... 36 Option s during a call ....... ................................ ................................ ................. .................. .............. ................ ............................... 36 4. Writing text .............................................. ............................................................ ....... ................ 38 Setting p redictive text inp ut on o r off....... ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ............... 3 8 Using p redictive text inp ut............ ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............... 38 Writin g compound wo rds ........... ................................ ................ ................................. ............. ... ................................ ............... 39 Using tra ditional text inpu t .......................... ................ ................................. ........................ ........................ ............................... 39 Tips for writing text ......... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ............... 40 5. Using the menu......................................... ............................................................ .......... ............. 42 Accessing a men u function ........... ................ ................................ ................................. .......... ...... ................................ ............... 42 List of m enu functions .................... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............... 44 6. Menu functions ........................................ ............................................................ ........... ............ 50 Messages ............ ................................ ................................ ................ ........................... ...... ................ ................................ ............... 50 Text m essages ( SMS) ... ................................ ................ ................................. ........................ ........................ ............................... 50 Writing a nd se nding me ssages ............................................. ................. ................................ ..... ........... ............................... 51 Option s for sen ding a message ............................. ................................. ................ .................... ............ ................ ............... 51 Writing a nd se nding a SMS e-mail ...... ................................ ................. ................................ ........ ........ ............................... 52 Reading and replying to an S MS m essage o r an SMS e-m ail ....................... ................................ ................ . .............. 53 Inbox and sent items folders . ................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................................ ............... 5 4
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 6 Co nte nt s Distribution lists ........ ................ ................................ ................................. ................ .... ............................ ................ ............... 54 Templates .... ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ................. ............... ................ ............................... 55 Saved i tems fo lder and My fo lders ...... ................................ ................................. ................ ....... ......... ............................... 56 Deleting me ssages .................... ................ ................................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............... 56 Settings for tex t and SMS e -mail me ssages ..... ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ............... 57 Multim edia messages (M MS) .................... ................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ............................... 58 Writing a nd se nding a multim edia mess age ..... ................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ............... 59 Reading and replying to a multimedia message ............................... ................ ................................ .... ........................... 61 Inbox, Outbo x, Saved and Sent item s folders ................... ................. ................................ ................ ............................... 62 Multimed ia messag es memory full ...................... ................................. ................................ ......... ....................... ............... 63 Deleting me ssages .................... ................ ................................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............... 63 Settings for multim edia message s ....... ................ ................................. ................................ ....... ......... ............................... 63 E-mail messages ........... ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................ ............................... 65 Writing a nd se nding a n e-ma il ............................. ................................. ................................ .... ............ ............................... 66 Downloadi ng e-m ail mess ages from your e -mail ac count ............................ ................ ................................ ............... 67 Reading a nd rep lying to an e-m ail mess age ..... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............... 67 Inbox and Other folde rs (Drafts, Archive, Outbo x and Sent items) ............................. ................................ .. ............. 68 Deleting e-m ail messages ....... ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................. ............................... 68 Settings for e-ma il.... ................................ ................................ ................. ....................... ......... ................ ............................... 68 Instant messag es (IM) . ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................... 71 Entering the insta nt mess ages me nu .. ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................... 73 Connecti ng to the instant messages serv ice and disconn ecting.. ................ ................................ ................. .............. 7 4 Starting an ins tant mes sages se ssion . ................................ ................................. ................ ......... ....................... ............... 7 4 Accepting or re jecting an instan t messages invitat ion.. ................. ................................ ....................... ........................ 75 Reading a n instant mes sage .................. ................................ ................................. ................ ............................................... 76 Participat ing in an insta nt mess ages co nversation .......................... ................................ ................ .... ........................... 76 Editing your own info rmation ............... ................ ................................. ................ ................... ............. ............................... 77 Contacts fo r insta nt messag ing ............................................ ................. ................................ .... ............................ ............... 77
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 7 Co nte nt s Blocking a nd unb locking m essa ges ..................... ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ................ ............... 78 Groups .......................... ................................ ................ ................................. .............. .. ................................ ............................... 79 Voice messa ges ............. ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ... ............................. ............................... 80 Info message s ................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................. .............. . ................................ ............... 8 0 Service commands ........ ................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............... 80 Call regi ster ........................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................... 81 Recen t calls lists ........... ................................ ................ ................................. ................. ............................... ............................... 81 Count ers and timers for calls, data and messag es ............. ................. ................................ ................. ............... ............... 82 Positi oning informa tion .............. ................................ ................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............... 82 Contacts .............................. ................................ ................ ................................. ........ ........ ................................ ............................... 83 Selecting settings for con tacts . ................ ................................ ................................. .............. .. ................................ ............... 8 3 Saving na mes and phone numbers (Add new c ontact) ..... ................................. ................ ......................... ...................... 84 Saving m ultiple numbers or text items per name ............... ................. ................................ ................. .............................. 84 Addin g an ima ge to a name or num ber in c ontacts ........... ................. ................................ .................... ........................... 85 Searchi ng for a contact .............. ................ ................................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............... 85 Deletin g contacts .......... ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................ ............................... 86 Editin g or d eleting d etails .......................... ................ ................................. ................ ......... ....................... ................ ............... 87 My pre sence ................... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............................... 87 Subs cribed nam es ......................... ................................ ................ ................................. ..... ........... ................................ ............... 89 Adding contact s to the subs cribed n ames ......................... ................................. ................ .............. .................. ............... 90 Viewing the subscri bed names .............. ................................ ................. ................................ .... ............................ ............... 90 Unsubs cribing a contact ......... ................ ................................ ................................. .............. .. ................ ............................... 91 Copyin g contacts .......................... ................ ................................ ................................. .... ............ ................ ............................... 91 Sendi ng and re ceiving a busine ss card... ................ ................................. ................ ...................... .......... ................ ............... 92 Speed d ials ...................... ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................... 93 Voice diall ing ................. ................ ................................ ................................. ............... . ................................ ................ ............... 9 3 Adding and m anaging voice tags ......................... ................................. ................ ....................... ......................... ............... 94 Making a call by using a voi ce ta g ...................... ................................. ................ ...................... .......... ................ ............... 94 Info numb ers and service numbers ......................................... ................. ................................ ..... ........................... ............... 95
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 8 Co nte nt s My num bers ... ................................ ................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................ ............................... 95 Caller g roups .................. ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................................ ............... 95 Settings .............. ................................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............... 96 Profiles ............................. ................................ ................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............................... 96 Tone s ettings .. ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ................................................ ............................... 97 Displa y settings ............................. ................................ ................ ................................. . ............... ................................ ............... 98 Time and da te settings ................................ ................................ ................. ........................ ........ ............... ................. ............... 9 9 Persona l shortc uts ........ ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................................ ............. 100 Right s election ke y ................... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 100 Voice com mands ....................................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............................. 100 Conne ctivity ................... ................................ ................ ................................. ............... . ................................ ................ ............. 10 1 Bluetoot h wireless technolog y .............................. ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............. 10 1 Bluetoot h connec tion .............. ................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................................ ............. 102 Bluetoot h settings .................................... ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 102 Infrared ........................................ ................................ ................ ............................... .. ................ ................................ ............. 10 3 (E)GPRS ........ ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ............... ................. ................ ............................. 104 (E)GPRS c onnect ion .. ................................ ................ ................................. .......................... ...................................... ............. 10 5 (E)GPRS m odem settings ......... ................ ................................ ................................. ............... . ................ ............................. 105 Call setting s.................... ................................ ................ ................................. ............. ................... ................ ............................. 10 6 Phone set tings ............................................... ................ ................................. ................. ............... ................ ............................. 108 IM and presen ce settings ........... ................ ................................ ................................. ........... ..... ................................ ............. 109 Enhanc ement settings . ................................ ................................ ................. ......................... ....... ................ ............................. 11 0 Security settings ........... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............................. 111 Restore fact ory settings .............. ................................ ................ ................................. ........ ........ ................................ ............. 11 2 Operat or menu .. ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ............... . ................................................ ............. 11 2 Gallery ................. ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ...... .......................... ................ ............................. 11 2 Media ... ................................ ................ ................................ ................................. ...... .......... ................ ................................ ............. 11 5 Camera ............. ................................ ................ ................................ ............................ ..................... ................................ ............. 115 Taking a photo ........... ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................. 11 6
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 9 Co nte nt s Recording a vide o clip ............. ................ ................................ ................................. ........... ..... ................ ............................. 116 Camera settin gs ......... ................................ ................................ ................. ...................... .......... ................................ ............. 117 Media p layer .. ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ................................................ ................ ............. 11 8 Setting up the phon e for a streaming service .. ................ ................................. ................ ................ ................ ............. 118 Music p layer ................... ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................. 11 9 Playing the mus ic tracks transfe rred to the p hone ......... ................................. ................ .................... ......................... 120 Settings for the music playe r ................................................ ................................. ................ . .............................. .............. 12 0 Radio ................ ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ......... ...... ................. ................................ ............. 12 1 Tuning a radio channel ............................................ ................ ................................. ............ .... ................................ ............. 12 2 Using the radio .......................................... ................................ ................. ..................... ........................... ............................. 12 2 Voice recorde r ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ................ ............... ................. ................ ............. 123 Recording .................... ................................ ................................ ................. ................. ............... ................ ............................. 123 List of re cordings ....... ................ ................................ ................ ................................. ..... ........................... ............................. 12 4 Defining store fol der ................ ................ ................................ ................................. ......... ....... ................ ................ ............. 124 Media e qualize r............. ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ............. 12 4 Organiser ............ ................ ................................ ................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ................ ............. 12 5 Alarm clo ck..... ................ ................................ ................................ ................. .............. .................. ................ ............................. 125 When the alarm time expire s ................ ................................ ................. ................................ ... ............................ . ............. 125 Calend ar .......... ................................ ................ ................................ ............................. .... ................ ................................ ............. 12 6 Making a calen dar note .......... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 127 When the phone sound s an alarm for a note .................................... ................................ ................ .. ........................... 128 To-do list ......................... ................................ ................................ ................. ........... ..... ................................ ............................. 12 8 Notes ................ ................................ ................................ ................ .......................... ...... . ................................ ............................. 12 9 Wallet ............... ................................ ................ ................................ .......................... ....................... ................................ ............. 130 Accessing th e wallet menu .... ................................ ................................. ................ ................. ............................... ............. 13 0 Saving ca rd de tails.... ................................ ................................ ................. ....................... ......................... ............................. 13 1 Personal note s ............ ................ ................................ ................................. ................ .... ............................ ................ ............. 13 2 Creating a walle t profile ......................... ................ ................................. ................ ............ .................... ................ ............. 13 2 Wallet setting s ........... ................................ ................ ................................. .................... ............................ ............................. 13 3
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 10 Co nte nt s Guidelines for paying for your purchases with the wallet ............. ................................ ................ .......... ................... 133 Synchroni sation ............................................ ................ ................................. ................ ... ............................. ............................. 13 4 Synchroni sing from your phone ............................ ................ ................................. ................ ..... ........................... ............. 134 Settings for the synchro nisation .......... ................ ................................. ................................ .... ............ ............................. 13 5 Synchroni sing from your PC... ................................ ................ ................................. ................ . ............... ............................. 136 Applicati ons ....... ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ........... ..................... ................................ ............. 137 Games .............. ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ........... ..................... ................ ............................. 137 Launching a gam e ..................... ................................ ................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............. 137 Other o ptions a vailable fo r a g ame or game s et.............. ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 13 7 Game downl oads ....... ................................ ................................ ................. ......................... ....... ................ ............................. 137 Memory status fo r game s ....... ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 13 8 Game setting s ............................ ................................ ................................. ................ ..... ........................... ................ ............. 13 8 Applica tions.................... ................ ................................ ................................. .............. .. ................................ ................ ............. 13 9 Launching an application ....... ................................ ................ ................................. ............... . ................................ ............. 13 9 Other o ptions a vailable fo r an applicat ion or a pplicati on set ...................... ................ ................................ ............. 139 Downloadi ng an a pplica tion .. ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ............................. 140 Memory status fo r appli cations ............................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 14 1 Calcula tor........................ ................ ................................ ................................. ............ .... ................................ ................ ............. 14 1 Count down timer .......... ................................ ................ ................................. ..................... ........................... ............................. 14 2 Stopw atch....... ................ ................................ ................................ ................. .............. .................. ................ ............................. 143 Web ...... ................ ................................ ................................ ................ ...................... ........... ................ ................................ ............. 14 4 Basic s teps for a ccessing and using s ervices ........................ ................................. ................ .......... ...................... ............. 14 4 Setting up the ph one for a service .......... ................................ ................. ................................ .. .............. ............................. 145 Keying in the service settings manu ally .............................................. ................................ .......... ...... ............................. 145 Making a conn ection to a service ............ ................ ................................. ................................ .. .............................. ............. 146 Browsing the p ages o f a s ervice ............................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............. 14 6 Using the phon e keys while browsing . ................ ................................. ................ .......................... ...................... ............. 147 Option s while browsing ........... ................ ................................ ................. ............................. ... ................ ............................. 147 Direct calling .............................. ................................ ................ ................................. .. .............................. ................ ............. 14 8
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 11 Co nte nt s Disconn ect from a s ervice .......................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............................. 148 Appeara nce settings of the brows er ....... ................................ ................................. ................ ..... ........................... ............. 148 Cookies ............................. ................ ................................ ................................. .......... ...... ................................ ................ ............. 14 9 Bookm arks ...................... ................................ ................................ ................. ............... ................. ................................ ............. 150 Receivin g a boo kmark .............................. ................ ................................. ............................ .................... ............................. 15 0 Downlo ading .................. ................................ ................................ ................. ................. ............................... ................ ............. 15 1 Service inbox .................. ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................................ ............. 151 Service inbox settings .............. ................ ................................ ................................. .......... ...... ................................ ............. 151 The cache memo ry ....... ................................ ................................ ................. ....................... ......... ................................ ............. 152 Browse r security ........... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ... ............................. ................ ............. 15 2 Security mod ule ......................... ................ ................................ ................................. ...... .......... ................................ ............. 152 Certificate s .. ................................ ................ ................................ ................................. ................................ ............................. 153 Digital signa ture ........................ ................ ................................ ................................. ..... ........... ................ ............................. 154 SIM se rvices ....... ................................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 15 5 7. PC Connectivity........... ............................................................ .............................. ......... ............ 156 PC Sui te............... ................................ ................ ................................ ........................ ......................... ................................ ............. 156 (E)GPRS, HS CSD and CSD ........................... ................................ ................. ............................. ... ................ ............................. 158 Using d ata comm unicatio n applica tions... ................ ................................. ................................ ...... .......... ................ ............. 15 8 8. Battery information .... .............................. ............................................................ ............ ......... 159 Charging and Discharging ............................. ................................ ................. ......................... ....... ................................ ............. 159 CARE AND M AINTENANCE ........................................................ .............................. ..................... 160 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION ........... ............................................................ ..................... 161
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. FOR YOU R SA FET Y 12 FOR YOU R SA FET Y FOR Y OU R SAFETY Read these simple guideline s. Brea king t h e r u les ma y be dang erous or i llega l. Furt her detailed infor mation is given in this manual. Do not s witch t h e phon e on w hen wirel ess phone u se i s prohib ited or when i t may cause in terfe rence or dange r. RO AD SAFETY COME S FIRST Don't use a han d-held phone while drivin g. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interference, which could affect performance. SWIT CH OFF IN HO SPIT AL S Foll ow a ny regul ation s or rules. Switch the phone off nea r me dical e quipme nt. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRA FT Wireless devices can cause interference in ai rcraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don't use th e phone at a refuell ing point. Don't u se near f uel or che micals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BL ASTING Don't use the pho ne where blasting is in pro gress. Observe restrictions, and follow a ny regulations or rules.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. FOR YOU R SA FET Y 13 FOR YOU R SA FET Y USE SEN SIB LY Use on ly in the norma l position. Don't t ouch the ant enna unn ecessaril y. QUALIFI ED S ERVICE Only quali fied pe rsonnel may i nstall o r repair pho ne equipme nt. ACCESSO RIES AND BATT ERIES Use only appro ved access ories and batte ries. Do not co nnect incomp atible p roducts. CONNECTING TO OTHER DE VICES When connecting to any other device, read its u ser's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect i ncompatibl e prod ucts. BACKUP COPI ES Reme mber to mak e back up co pies of all impor ta nt da ta. WATER-RESISTA NCE Your p hone is not water-re sistant. Keep it dry. CALLIN G Ensure the phone is swit ched on and in s ervice . Enter the phon e number, in cluding the area code, then press . To end a call, pres s . To answer a call, p ress . EMER GEN CY CAL LS Ensure the phone is switch ed on and in s ervic e. Pres s as many time s as ne eded (e .g. to e xit a ca ll, to exit a men u, etc.) to clear the di splay. En ter the e mergency number , then pre ss . Give your lo cation. Do not end the call u ntil to ld to do so.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. FOR YOU R SA FET Y 14 FOR YOU R SA FET Y â Netw ork Se rvice s The wireless phone des cribed in this g uide is appr oved for use on the EGSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 19 00 network. Triba nd is a network-d ependent featu re. Check with your local se rvice prov ider if you can subs cribe to and use this feature. This p hone s uppor ts W AP 2.0 protoco ls (H TTP a nd SSL) tha t run o n TCP/I P prot oco ls. Som e feat ures o f thi s phone, such as MMS (Mu ltimed ia Messagi ng Service), browsing, e-mail, in stant mes sages, pr esence-en hanced conta cts, re mote Sy ncM L, an d co nte nt do wnloa ding v ia bro wse r o r ove r M MS, req ui re n etw ork su ppo rt for t hes e techn ologie s. A number of feat u res i ncluded in th is gui de are ca lled Net work Services . Thes e are special s ervices that you arrange through your wirel e ss service pr ovider. Befo re you can take advantage of any of these Network Service s, you must subscribe to them through your s ervice provider and obtain instructions for their u se from your service provider. Note : So me netw orks m ay no t sup port a ll la nguag e-dep endent cha racte rs and /or s ervice s. â Abo ut a cce ssories Check the model number of any charger before u se with this device. Th is device is int ended for use when supplie d with po wer f rom ACP- 12, ACP-8 , A CP-7, LCH -9 an d LC H-1 2. Warn ing: U se on ly b atte ries, c harg ers a nd ac cess ories appro ved by the p hone manuf act urer f or use with this p arti cular p hon e mode l. The use of any oth er typ es may inva lidate any appro val or warr anty apply ing to the pho ne, an d may be dang erous . For ava ila bility of approve d acce ssori es, pleas e check wi th your deal er. A few practical rules for a ccessory operation ⢠Keep a ll accesso ries out of the reach of smal l children . ⢠Whe n you di sco nnect th e pow er c ord of a ny a ccessory , gras p and pull the pl ug, not the c ord. ⢠Chec k regularly th at any vehicle -installed acces sories are mo unted and are opera ting properl y. ⢠Insta llation of any complex car accessorie s must be made by qualif ied pers onnel only.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Ge neral inf ormat ion 15 Ge neral inf ormat ion Gener al inform ation â Ac cess cod es Secu rit y code (5 to 10 dig its ) The security code protect s your phone against unaut horised use. The pre-set code is 12345. Change the code, and keep the ne w code se cret and in a safe place separate from your phone. T o change the code, and to s et the phone to request the code, see Sec urity settings on page 111. If you k ey in an incorrect s ecurit y code f ive time s in succession, t he phone ignor es further ent ries of the code. Wa it for 5 minutes and key in the c ode again. PIN and PIN 2 co des (4 to 8 di git s) , Modu le PI N an d Si gni ng PIN ⢠The PIN (Personal Ident ification Number) c ode protects your SIM card a gainst unauthorised use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. Set the phone to request the PIN code each time the phone is s witched on, see Securit y settings on pa ge 111. ⢠The PIN2 code may be supplied with the SIM card and is r equired to access some functions, such as call counters. ⢠The module PIN is required to acc ess the infor m ation in the s ecurity module. See Se curity module on page 152. The module PIN is s upplied with the S IM card if the SIM c ard has a s ecurity module in it. ⢠The signing PIN is required for th e digital signature. See Digital signature on page 154. T he signing PIN is supplied w ith the SIM car d if the SIM c ard has a secur ity module in it .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Ge neral inf ormat ion 16 Ge neral inf ormat ion If you key in an inc orrect PIN code three times in succession, the phone may dis play PIN block ed or PIN code blocked , for example, and ask y ou to enter the PUK code. PUK an d PUK 2 codes (8 digi ts) The PUK (Personal U nblocking Key) c ode is requir ed to change a bl ocked PIN code. The PU K2 code is required to change a blocked PIN 2 code. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM car d, co ntact your local service provider for the codes. Barri ng pass word (4 dig its ) The barring password is required when using the Call barring servic e , see Security settings on page 111. You can obtai n the password from your service provider. Wall et cod e ( 4 to 10 d i git s) The wallet code is re quired to acc ess the wal let servic es. If you k ey in an inc orrect w allet code three times in succ ession, the w allet application is blocked for five minut es. Next three incorrec t entries of the code will duplic ate the t ime. For further information, see Wallet on page 130. â Dow nloa ding c onte nt and a pplicat ions You may be able to download new content (for example images and video clips) and applications into the phone (network service). 1. Select the download f unction for example in the Collection and Gallery menu. To acce ss the download function, see the r espective menu desc riptions. A list of bookmarks is shown. Select More bookmarks if you want to vi ew the bookmar ks available in the We b menu.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Ge neral inf ormat ion 17 Ge neral inf ormat ion 2. Select the bookmar k of the brows er page you want to access. If the connection fails, change the active set of connect ion settings in t he Web menu and try t he connect ion again. Follow the instructions provide d by the web service. For the av ailability of diff erent services, pricing a nd tariffs, cont act your ne twork operator and/or the service provider. Note tha t Nokia d oes not w arrant for a pplicatio ns from non -Nokia s ites. If you choos e to downl oad Ja va appli cati ons from them , yo u should take the same precaut ions , for securi ty or c ontent , as you w ould wi th any s ite. â Ov ervi ew of t he func tions of the phone The Nokia 6230 phone provides many f unctions that are pra ctical for daily use, such as a calendar, a clock, an alarm clock, a r adio, a music player, an d a built-in camera. The camera can be used f or recording video clips and taking pictures that you can, for example, attach as wallpapers in standby mode or as thumbnail pic tures in Contacts . See Camera on page 115. Also, a range of Nokia Xpress- on TM colour cove rs is availa ble for your phone. To ch ange the covers, see Changing the covers on page 23. Your phone also s upports ⢠EDGE ( Enhanced Data rates f or GSM Evolution), see (E)G PRS on page 104. ⢠Multimedia messaging ser vice (MMS) and is a ble to send a nd receive multimedia me ssages composed of t ext, a pict ure, a sound clip and a v ideo clip. You can s ave the pictures and ringing tones for personalising your phone. See Multimedia messages (MMS) on page 58. ⢠xHTML browser that enables you t o fetch more colourful and r icher graphical co ntent from web servers and t o view it. See Web on page 144.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Ge neral inf ormat ion 18 Ge neral inf ormat ion ⢠E-mail function to receive, r ead and send e-mails. See E- mail messages on page 65. ⢠Presence-enhance d contacts that enables you to convenient ly share yo ur availability information with your c olleagues, family and friends. See My presence on pa ge 87. ⢠Instant messages , which is a w ay of s ending short text me ssages that a re delivered immediately to online users. See Ins tant messages (IM) on page 71. ⢠Polyphonic sound (MIDI) that consists of several sound components play ed at the s ame time. The phone has sound components from over 128 ins truments, but it can play up to 24 instr uments at the same time. Poly phonic sounds are used in ringing t ones and me ssage alert tones. The phone supports Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI) format. ⢠Java 2 Micro Edition, J2ME TM , and includes some Java a pplications an d games that have been specially designed for mobile phones. You can download new applicat ions and games to your phone, see Applications on page 137. ⢠Bluetooth technology, t hat enables wir eless connect ions between electronic dev ices at a range of maximum 10 metres. T here is no charge to connec t devices v ia Bluetooth technology. A Bluetooth connection can be used to send business card s, calendar notes , graphics, pic tures, video clips or tones. Use th e phone as modem for data dialup connections or to connect wireless to Bluet ooth accessories . In some countries, there may be restrict ions on using Bluetooth dev ices. Check with your de aler and the local authorities. See also Bluetooth wireles s technology on page 101. ⢠Multimedia card t o extent the me mory capa city of your phone to stor e pictures, vide o clips, for example.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Ge neral inf ormat ion 19 Ge neral inf ormat ion Nok ia PC Sui te an d Noki a Audi o Man ager The CD-ROM supplie d with the phone contains the Nokia PC Suit e software which includes an extensive colle ction of diff erent applications. With these applic ations you can, for e xample, creat e new ri nging tones, manage t he photos and v ideo clips captur ed with the phone âÂÂs camera, and install new Java TM applications to your phone. With the Nokia Audio Manager application you can transfer AAC or MP3 music files from a compatible PC to your phone via the USB cable (DKU-2). You c an also create play lists of your music files and s ave your CD audio files in AAC format and transfer them to your phone. You ca n then play the music files in your phoneâÂÂs Music player menu. Nokia PC Suite is als o available on NokiaâÂÂs Web sit e at www.nok ia.com. For more infor mation, refer t o the documen tation and Help fi les that come wit h Nokia PC Suite and Nokia Audio Manager. Shar ed memory The following f eatures in this phone may shar e memory: contacts, text, instant messages and multimedia message s, e-mails, voi ce tags and SMS di stribution lists, calendar, to-do notes, and Java games and appl ications, and note applic ation. Using a ny such feature s may reduce the memory available for any features sharing memory . This is es pecially tr ue with heav y use of any of the f eatures (although some of the features may have a c ertain amount of memory specially allotted to t hem in addition to t he amount of memory shared with other fea tures). For ex ample, saving many java applications, et c., may take all of the shared memory and your phone may dis play a mes sage that t he memory is fu ll. In this ca se, delet e some of the inf ormation or ent ries store d in the shar ed memory features before continuing. Note that gallery fi les share a different me mory, for further informat ion see Ga llery on page 112.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Getting s tarted 20 Getting s tarted 1. Gett in g s tar ted â Ins tallin g the SI M card and th e batte ry Keep all min iature S IM cards out of th e reach of small ch ildre n. The SIM card and its contact s can e asily be damaged by sc ratches or bending, s o be car eful when handling, inserting or removing the card. Before installing the SIM card, always make sure that the phone is switched off and disconnected from any enhancement and then remove the battery. 1. To remove the bac k cover of t he phone: With the ba ck of the phone facing you, push t he back c over release button (1). 2. Slide the back c over to remove it from the phone (2). 3. Remove the battery by lifting it as shown(3). 4. To r elease the SIM card holder, gently pull the locking clip of t he car d holder and open it (4).
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Getting s tarted 21 Getting s tarted 5. Inse rt the SIM card into the SIM card holder (5). Make sure t hat the SIM card is properly inserted and that the golden contact area on the card is facing downwards. 6. Close the SIM card holder (6) and press it unt il it snaps into position. 7. Replace the battery (7) . 8. Slide the back c over into its place (8). â Chargi ng the ba ttery 1. Conn e ct the l ead fro m the char ger to the socket on th e bottom of your phone. 2. Conn e ct the c harge r to an AC wall soc ket. The text Charging is displayed briefly if t he phone is switched on. If the battery is completely flat, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator app ears on the display or befor e any call s can be made. You can use the phone whil e the cha rger is connect ed. The charging time depends on the charger and the battery used. For example, charging a BL5-C battery with the ACP-12 cha rger takes approx imately one hour and 30 minutes while the phone is in standby mode.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Getting s tarted 22 Getting s tarted â Swi tching t he pho ne on an d off Warn ing: D o n ot sw itch th e phon e on w hen w irel ess phon e use is prohib ited o r wh en it ma y cau se inter ference o r danger. Press and hold the power k ey as shown. Note that if t he phone display s In se r t SI M ca rd even though the SIM card is properly inserted, or SIM card not supported , contact your network operator or service provider. Your phone does not support 5-Volt SIM cards and the card may need to be changed. ⢠If the phone as ks for a PIN code , key in the PIN code (f or example, dis played as ****), a nd press OK . See also PIN code request in Security se ttings on page 111 and Access codes on page 15. ⢠If the phone as ks for a securit y code, ke y in the sec urity code (for example, dis played as *****), and press OK . See also Access cod es on page 15. â Norm al ope rati ng pos ition Use th e phone only in it s normal o perating position . Your pho ne ha s a bu ilt-i n ant enna. As wit h any ot her ra dio transm itting d evice , do not to uch the antenna unnecessaril y w hen the p hone is switched on. Contact w ith the anten na affects call qu ality and may caus e the phone to operate at a higher power le vel than otherwis e needed . Not tou ching the ante nna area during a phone call optimi s es the ante n na performance a nd the talkti me of your phone.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Getting s tarted 23 Getting s tarted â Ch ang ing the co vers Before changing the cove r, always switch off the power and di sco nnect t he pho ne fr om the cha rger o r an y othe r devi ce. Avoid touch ing elect ronic comp onents whil e changing the co vers. Alwa ys store an d use the phon e with the covers att ached. 1. Remove the back cover from t he phone. See step 1 in Ins talling the SIM card and t he battery on page 20. 2. Gently remove the front cover from the phone. For this gently prise the front cove r away from the phone beginning at the top of the phone (1) and detach the front cover (2). 3. Remove the key mat from the f ront cover by pressing it gently out (3). 4. Place the key mat in t he new f ront cover (4). 5. Press t he key mat gent ly in (5).
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Getting s tarted 24 Getting s tarted 6. Replace the front cov er by press ing it gently on the phone, be ginning from the bottom (6). 7. Replace the back cover of the phone. See step 8 in Installing the SIM ca rd and the battery on page 20. â Ins tallin g a mu ltime dia card Use only comp atible multime d ia cards (MMC) with this device . Other memory ca rds, such as Secure Dig ital (SD) cards , do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compatibl e with this devi ce. Usin g an incomp atible memory ca rd ma y d amage t he m emory c ard as well as p hone, and data stored on the in compatible ca rd may be corru pted. 1. Remove the back cover and battery from the phone. See step 1 and 2 in Installing t he SIM car d and the battery on page 20. 2. Place the multimedia card in the card holder . Make sure that the multimedia card is pr operly inserted and that the golden contact area on the car d is facing downwards. 3. Replace the battery and back cover of the phone. Se e step 7 and 8 in Installing the SIM car d and t he battery on pa ge 20. The multimedia car d can be used in menu Gallery as a separate folder. Refer also to the options in Gallery , see Gallery on page 112.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 25 Your phone 2. Y our pho ne â Key s and c on ne c to rs 1. Power k ey Switches the phone on and off . When the k eypad is locked, pre ssing the power ke y briefly turns the phoneâÂÂs display lights on f or approximately 15 seconds. 2. Earpiece 3. Volume keys Adjust the volume of the earpiece or the loudspeaker, or the headset when it is c onnected to th e phone. 4. Loudspeaker 5. Selection k eys and , middle selection key The function of these k eys depends on t he guiding te xt shown on the display above t he keys. Se e Standby mode on page 28. Pres sing the middle selection k ey briefly in the middle selec ts the menu item or confir ms a sele cti on.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 26 Your phone 6. 4-way navigation key , , , Enables naviga tion through names, phone numbers, menus or settings. The 4-way navigation and selection key is als o used to move the cursor up and down, left and right when writ ing text, us ing the cal endar, and in some game applicat ions. 7. dials a phone number, and answers a call. In standby mode it shows the list of the most recently called numbers. 8. ends an active c all. Exits from any function. 9. - enter numbers and characters. and are used for various purposes in different functions. 10. Charger connector 11. Pop-Port TM connector used, for example, f or headsets and the data cable. Connect an e nhancement t o the Pop-Port c onnector as shown in the picture. 12. Infrared (IR) port
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 27 Your phone 13. Camer a lens on the ba ck cover of the p hone.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 28 Your phone â Sta ndb y mode When the phone is ready for use, and yo u have not keye d in any char acters, t he phone is in standby mode. 1. Shows t he name of the network or t he opera tor logo to indicat e in which cellular network the phone is cur rently be ing used. 2. Shows the signal strength of the cellular network at your current location. The higher the bar, t he stronge r the signal. 3. Shows the battery charge level. The highe r the bar, t he more power in the battery 4. The left selection key in standby mode is Go to . Press Go t o t o view the f unctions in personal shortcut list. Select a function to act ivate it. Press Options and select ⢠Select options to view the list of a vailable functions that you can add. Scroll to the des ired function and press Ma rk to add it to the s hortcut list. To remove a function from the list, press Unmark . ⢠Organise to rearrange t he functions on your personal s hortcut list. Selec t the desired function and press Move , then select where you want to mov e the funct ion. If you for s ome reason have deleted the content of the Go t o menu, press Ad d to add a f unction. 5. The middle selection k ey in standby mode is Menu . 6. The right selection k ey in standby mode is Name s to acce ss the Co nt ac t s menu or another shortcut to a function you have s elected. See Personal shor tcuts on page 100. Or it has an operator specific name to acces s an oper ator specific web site. See also Essential indicators on page 29.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 29 Your phone Wallpaper You can set y our phone to dis play a back ground picture, wallpa per, when the phone is in s tandby mode. See Displa y settings on page 98. Screen saver You can set y our phone to dis play a scre en saver, w hen the phone is in standby mode. See Display settings on page 98. Pow er sav ing For power saving a digital clock view overwrit es the display when no f unction of the phone has bee n used for a certain pe riod of time. Pr ess any k ey to de activate t he screen sav er. If you have not set the t ime, 00:00 is displayed. To set t he time, see Time and date settings on page 99. In addition you can set a screen saver f rom Gallery . See Display sett ings on page 98. Essenti al indicators You have received one or several text or picture messages. See Reading and replying to an SMS message or an SMS e- mail on page 53. You have rec eived one or several multimedia messages. See Reading an d replying to a multimedia message on page 61. The phone has registered a mis sed call. See Call register on page 81.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 30 Your phone or Your phone is connected to the instant messages serv ice and the availability status is online or offline, res pectively. See Connecting t o the instant me ssages service and disconnecting on page 74. You have r eceived one or several i nstant messages and you ar e connected t o the ins tant messages ser vice. See Connecting to the ins tant messag es service and dis connecting on page 74. The phoneâÂÂs keypad is loc ked. See Keypad lock (Keyguard) on page 32. The phone does not ring for an incoming call or text message when Incoming call alert is set to Off and Message ale rt tone is se t to Of f . See Tone sett ings on page 97. The alarm c lock is set to On . See Alarm clock on page 125. The countdown timer is running. See Countdown t imer on page 142. The stopwatch is running in t he background. See Stopwatch on page 143. When the (E)GPRS connec tion mode Alway s online is s elected and the (E)GPRS service is available, the indicator is shown on the top left of the dis play. Refer to (E)GPRS connection on page 105. When a (E)GPRS connec tion is established, the indic ator is shown on t he top left of the display. Refer to (E)GPRS connection on page 105 and Browsing the pages of a service on page 146. The (E)GPRS connection is s uspended (on hold), for ex ample if ther e is an incoming or outgoing call dur ing a (E)GPRS dial-up conne ction. The indicator is shown on the top r ight of the display.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 31 Your phone Infrared connection indicator, se e Infrared on page 103. All your calls are diverted to another number, Dive rt all voic e calls . If y ou have two phone lines, the divert indicator for the f irst line is and for the second line . See C all settings on page 106. or If you have two phone lines, the indicator displays the selected phone line. See Call settings on page 106. The louds peaker has bee n activated, see Options dur ing a call on page 36. Calls are limi ted to a clos ed user group. Se e Security settings on page 111. The timed pr ofile is s elected. See Pr ofiles on page 96. , , or A headset, hands free, loopset or music s tand is connected t o the p hone. Bluetooth connection indicator. See Blue tooth wireless technology on page 101 . To set the phone to show the time and da te in standby mode, see Time and date s ettings on page 99.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 32 Your phone â Key pad lo ck (K eyguard) You can lock t he keypad t o prevent the keys being accidentally pres sed, for example, when your phone is in your handbag. ⢠Locking the keypad In s tandby mode, press Me nu and then wit hin 1.5 seconds. ⢠Unlocking the keypad Press Unlock and then within 1.5 seconds, or if the Security ke yguard is set On , press Unlock and key in t he security code. To answer a call when t he keyguard is on, pre ss . During a c all, the phone can be oper ated normally. When you e nd or reject t he call, t he keypad will automati cally be locked. For Automatic keyguard and Securi ty keygu ard , s ee Phone settings on page 108. For the s ecurity code se e Security code (5 to 10 digits) on page 15. For locking t he keypad dur ing a call, see Options dur ing a call on page 36. Note : When Keyguard is on, calls may b e possible to the emergency nu mber programmed i nto your phone (e.g. 112, 911 or o ther officia l emergenc y numbe r). Key in the emerge ncy numb er and pre ss . The number is displa yed only af ter you have keyed in its last digit.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 33 Your phone â Confi gurat ion sett ings se rvice In order to use MMS, (E)GPRS and other wireless service s, you need to have pr oper connection settings on your phone. You may rece ive the settings directly as an c onfiguration message and you need t o save the settings on your phone. For more informat ion on the availabilit y of the settings, cont act your network operator, service p rovider or near est authorised Nok ia dealer. You may be able to receiv e the c onnection settings for (E)GPRS, mult imedia messages , synchronisation, E-mail, ins tant messages and presence and for br owser. When you have r eceived the connection s ettings as a c onfiguration message , and the settings are not automatically saved and ac tivated, Connection se ttings received is displayed. ⢠To save the received s ettings, press O ptions and select Sav e . If the phone asks Enter settings' PIN: , key in t he PIN code for the settings and pr ess OK . For availabilit y of the PIN code, c ontact the service provider that supplies the settings. If no settings are saved yet, these settings are saved under t he first free connection set. ⢠To view the receiv ed setti ngs fi rst, press Options and select View . To save the se ttings, press Save . ⢠To discard the received settings, press O ptions and se lect Disca rd . To activate the settings , see, for ex ample Making a connecti on to a ser vice on page 146.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Call functions 34 Call functions 3. Call fu ncti on s â Making a call 1. Key in the phone number, including the area code . I f you key in an in correc t charact er, pres s Clear to delete it. For international calls, pres s twice for the international prefix (the character r eplaces the international acces s code) and then k ey in the count ry code, the area code without the le ading 0, if necessary, and the phone number . 2. Press t o call the number. 3. Press to end the c all or to ca ncel the c all attempt. See also Options during a call on page 36. Making a call using the cont acts To search for a name/phone number that you have saved in Contacts , see Searching for a contact on page 85. Press to call the number. Last number redialling In s tandby mode, press once to access the list of up to 20 numbers you las t called or atte mpted to call. Scroll to the number or name you want, and press to call the number. Calling your voice mailbox In standby mode, press and hold , or press and . If the phone as ks for the voice mailbox number, key it in and pr ess OK . See also Voice messages on page 80.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Call functions 35 Call functions Spee d dia llin g a phon e number Before you can use spe ed dialling, assign a phone number to o ne of the speed-dialling key s, from to , see Spee d dials on page 93. Call the number in either o f the following way s: ⢠Press the s peed-dialling key that you want and then press . â¢I f Speed dialling is set to on, press and hold a speed-dia lling key unt il the ca ll is started. See Call settings on page 106 . â An swe ring or re ject ing an incom ing ca ll Press to answer an incoming call and press t o end the call. Press to reject an incoming ca ll. If you pres s Silen ce , only the ringing tone is muted. Then either a nswer or reje ct the call. If a compatible headset s upplied with the headset key is connected t o the phone, you can ans wer and end a call by pressing t he key. Tip: If the Divert if busy function is activated to diver t the calls , for ex ample to your voice mailbox, rejec ting an incoming call w ill also dive rt the call. Se e Call settings on p age 106. Note that when somebo dy is calling you, the phone s hows the callerâÂÂs na me, phone number or the text Private number or Call . If mor e than one name is found in Contacts with the same seven last digits of the phone number as the caller âÂÂs number, only the phone number will be displa yed, if this is available. The phone may display an incorrect name, if the caller âÂÂs number is not saved in Contacts but th e re is another name saved with the same seven l ast digits in t he phone number as in the phone number of the caller.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Call functions 36 Call functions Call waiting During a call, press to ans wer the wai ting call. The first c all is put on hold. Press to end the active call. To a cti v ate th e Call waiting function, see Call se ttings on page 106. â Options d uring a cal l Many of the opt ions that you can use during a call are network se rvices. For av ailability, contact your network operator or service provide r. Press Options during a ca ll for some of the following opt ions: ⢠Mut e or Unmu t e , End call , End all calls , Cont act s , Menu , H old or Unhold , New call , Private c all , Record , Answer and Reject . ⢠Conference to make a confe rence call t hat allows up t o five per sons to take part in a conference call. During a call, make a call to a new par ticipant ( New call ). The fir st call is put on hold. When the new call has been answere d, select Conference to include the first participant in the conference call. To hav e a privat e conversation wit h one of the participants, select Private call a nd sele ct the desired participant. To rejoin the conference call, select Conference . ⢠Lock keypa d to act ivate t he keypad lock. ⢠Send DTMF to send DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequenc y) tone strings, for example, pa sswords or bank account numbers. The DTMF system is used by a ll touch-tone telephones . Key in the D TMF string or search for it in Contac ts and press DT MF . Note that you can key in the wait characte r w and the pause character p by repeatedly pressing . ⢠Swap to switch between the active call and the call on hold, Tra n s fe r to connect a call on hold to an active call, and disconnect yourself from the calls.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Call functions 37 Call functions ⢠Loudspeaker to use your phone as a loudspeak er during a call. D o not hold the phone to yo ur ear during loudspeaker oper ation. To act ivate/deactiv ate the loudspe aker, selec t Loudspeaker / Handset or press Loudsp . / Nor mal . The loudspeaker is automatically dea ctivated when you end the call or call attempt or connect the handsfree unit or headset t o the phone. If you have co nnected a c ompatible handsfree unit or the heads et to the phone, Handset in the options list is replaced with Handsfree or He adset and the s elect ion key Normal with Hands f. or Heads . , r espectively . Using the loudspeake r with the r adio or the music pla yer, see Usi ng the radio on page 122 or Mus ic player on page 119 .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Wr itin g te xt 38 Wr itin g te xt 4. Writing t ext You can key in text, f or example, w hen writ ing messages, using t raditional or pr edictive text input. When you are w riting text, th e predictive text input is indicated by and the t raditional text input by at the t op left of t he display. The char acter case is indicated by , , or nex t to the text input indicat or. You can change the charact er case by pressing . The number mode is indicated by , and you can change bet ween the letter and number mode by pressing and holding . â Set ting p red ictiv e text in put on or off When writing text, press Op tions and select Dictionary . ⢠To set th e predictive text input on, s elect a language in t he dictionary options list. Pre dictive text input is only av ailable for th e languages on the list. ⢠To revert to t raditional text input, select D ictionary of f . Tip : To quickly set the predic tive text input on or off when wr iting text, pr ess twice, or press and hold Options . â Us ing pre dicti ve te xt inp ut You can key in any letter with a single keypr ess. The predictive text input is based on a built-in dictionary to whic h you can also add new words. 1. Start wr iting a wor d using the key s to . Pres s each key only once for one le tter. T he word change s after eac h keystr oke.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Wr itin g te xt 39 Wr itin g te xt Example: To write Nokia when t he English dictionar y is selec ted, press , , , an d . For more instruct ions for wr iting text, see Tips for wr iting text on page 40. 2. When you ha ve finis hed writing the w ord and it is correct , confirm it by adding a space wit h or by pressing any of the s croll keys . Pressing a scroll key also moves the curs or. If the word is not corr ect, press repeatedly or press Options an d select Matches . Wh e n the word that you want appears, confirm it. If the ? c haracter is displayed after the w ord, the wor d you intended t o write is not i n the dictionar y. To add the wor d to the dic tionary, press Spell , key in the wo rd (traditional t ext input is used) and press Save . When the dict ionary b ecomes full, t he new word r eplaces the oldest one that was added. 3. Start writ ing the nex t word. Writing compound words Key in the first part of the word and confirm it by pressing . Write the last par t of the w ord and confirm the word. â Using tra dit ion al text in put Press a numbe r key, to , repeate dly until the des ired charac ter appears. Not all charact ers available under a number key are print ed on the key. The character s available depend on the language selected in t he Phone language menu, see Phone settings on page 108. ⢠If the next letter you w ant is located on the same key as the pr esent one, wait until the c ursor appears, or pr ess any of the scroll key s and t hen key in t he letter.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Wr itin g te xt 40 Wr itin g te xt ⢠The most c ommon punctuation marks and special characters are available under the numbe r key . For more instruct ions for wr iting text, see Tips for wr iting text on page 40. â Tips for w rit ing text The following functi ons may also be available for writing tex t: ⢠To insert a s pace, pr ess . ⢠To move the c ursor to the left, r ight, down or up, press the s croll keys , , or , re spec tiv el y. ⢠To insert a number while in letter mode, pr ess and hold t he desired number k ey. ⢠To delete a c haracter to the left of the cursor, press Clear . Press and hold Clear to dele te the characters more quickly. To delete all t he char acters at once when writ ing a message, pr ess Options and select Clear te xt . ⢠To insert a wor d when us ing the predictive text input, press Options and select Insert word . Write the word using the traditional text input and pr ess Save . The word is also adde d to t he dictionary. ⢠To insert a s pecial char acter when using the tra ditional t ext input, pres s , or when using the predictive text input, press and hold , or press Options and selec t Insert symbol . Press any of the scroll keys to s croll to a character and press Us e to selec t the cha rac ter . You can also scroll to a character by pressing , , or , and select t he character by pressing .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Wr itin g te xt 41 Wr itin g te xt ⢠To insert a s miley when us ing the traditional text input, pr ess twic e, or when using the predictive text input, press and hold and press again, or press Options and select Insert smiley . Press any of the scroll keys to s croll to a smiley and pres s Us e to s elect the s miley. You can also scroll to a smiley by pr essing , , or , and select t he smiley b y pressing . The following options are available when writing text messages: ⢠To insert a number while in letter mode, pr ess Options and select Insert number. Key i n the phone number or sear ch for it in Contacts and press OK . ⢠To insert a name from Co nt ac t s , pres s Options and select Ins ert contact . T o insert a phone number or a text item attached to the name, press Options an d se lec t View details .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 42 Using the menu 5. Usin g th e m enu The phone off ers you an ex tensive range of functions, which a re grouped int o menus. Most of the menu functions are provided with a brief help text. To view the help text, s croll to the me nu function you want and wait for 15 s econds. To exit the help text, pres s Back . See Phone settings on page 108. â Ac cess ing a menu fu nctio n By scrolling 1. To access the menu, press Menu . 2. Scroll wit h or t hrough the menu (or w ith any of the scroll k eys if t he grid menu view is selected) and s elect, for e xample, Settings by pressing Select . To change the menu view, see Menu view in Display s ettings on page 98. 3. If the menu contains submenus, select the one that you want, for example Call settings . 4. If the selected s ubmenu contains further submenus , repeat step 3. Selec t the next submenu, for example Anykey answer . 5. Select t he setting of your choic e. 6. Press Back to return to the pr evious menu level, and Exit t o exit the menu. By using a shor tcut Menus and opt ions are numbered s o that you ca n quickl y keyâÂÂpress your way t o an option. The numbers appear in t he top right cor ner of the display and s how your locat ion in the menu. Press Menu , and within 1.5 s econds start keying in the number of the menu function you want to access .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 43 Using the menu If the shortcut you w ant to us e has menu numbers that are lower t han 10, make sure to us e a zero in front of the numbers . For example, t o personalise the Silent prof ile: 1. To access the menu, press Menu . 2. Within 1.5 seconds start keying in the numbers 04 01 02 02.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 44 Using the menu â Lis t of me nu fu nc tions ⢠Messages 1. Text messages 1. Creat e message 2. Inbox 3. Cr eate SMS e-mail 4. Sent items 5. Saved text msgs. 6. Te mplates 7. My folders 8. Distribution lists 9. Delete me ssages 2. Multime dia msgs. 1. Creat e message 2. Inbox 3. Outbox 4. Sent items 5. Saved items 6. Delete me ssages 3. E-mail 1. Create e- mail 2. Retrieve 3. Inbox 4. Other folders 5. Other options 4. In stan t mess age s 1 1. L ogin 2. Saved conve rs. 3. Connect . settings 5. Voice messages 1. Lis ten to voice messages 2. Voice mailbox n umber 6. Info messages 1. Info se rvice 2. T opic s 3. La nguage 4. Inf o topics saved on SIM card 5. Read 2 7. Message s ettings 1. Text messages 2. Multimedi a msgs. 3. E-mail messages 4. Other s ettings 8. Service commands 1. For ava ilabi lity , contac t your ne twor k operato r or serv ice prov ider. 2. This menu is show n onl y if any info me ssag es are r ece ive d.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 45 Using the menu ⢠Call register 1. Miss ed calls 2. Received c alls 3. D ialled numbers 4. Delete recent c all lists 1. All 2. Mis sed 3. Received 4. Dialled 5. Call dur ation 1. Last ca ll duration 2. Received c alls' duration 3. Dialled calls ' duration 4. All c alls' duration 5. Clear timers 6. GPRS data counter 1. D ata sent in las t session 2. Data receiv ed in last s ession 3. All s ent data 4. All received data 5. Clear c ounters 7. GPRS connect ion timer 1. D uration of last session 2. D uration of all sessions 3. Clear timers 8. Message count er 1. Sent messages 2. Received message s 3. Clear counters 9. P ositioning ⢠Contacts 1. Search 2. Add new contact 3. Delete 4. My presence 5. Subscribed names 6. Copy 7. Settings 1. Memory in use 2. Contac ts view 3. Memory s tatus 8. Speed dia ls 9. Voice t ags
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 46 Using the menu 10.Info numbers 1 11.Service numbers 1 12.My numbers 2 13.Caller groups 2 ⢠Settings 1. Profiles 1. General 2. Silent 3. Meeting 4. Outdoor 5. P ager 2. Tone settings 1. Incoming call alert 2. Ringing t one 3. Ringing v olume 4. Vibrating alert 5. Mes sage alert tone 6. Insta nt mess a ge a lert to ne 7. Keypad tones 8. Warning tones 9. Alert for 3. D isplay settings 1. W allpaper 2. Colour schemes 3. Menu vie w 4. Operator logo 5. Screen save r 4. Time and date settings 1. Clock 2. Dat e 3. Auto- update of date & t ime 5. Pe rsonal short cuts 1. Right selection key 2. Voice commands 6. Connectivity 1. Bluet ooth 2. Infr ared 3. G PRS 7. Call settings 1. Call divert 2. Anykey answer 3. Automatic redial 4. Speed dialling 5. Call waiting 6. Summary after call 7. Send my calle r ID 8. Line for outgoing calls 3 1. Shown if sup porte d by yo u r SI M card . Fo r ava ilabi lit y, co ntact yo ur n etwork o perator or ser vice prov ide r. 2. If In fo numbe rs , Ser vice numb ers or both are n ot su pport ed, the nu mber of th is me nu i tem ch anges accor dingly. 3. For ava ilabi lity , contac t your ne twor k operato r or serv ice prov ider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 47 Using the menu 8. Phone s ettings 1. Phone language 2. Memory status 3. Auto ma t ic k eyg ua rd 4. Sec urity keyguard 5. Cell info display 6. Welcome note 7. Op erator selection 8. Conf irm SIM service ac tions 9. Help text ac tivation 10.Start-up tone 9. IM and my prese nce settings 1. Curren t IM and presence settings 2. Edit current IM and presence se ttings 10.Enhancement settings 1 1. Headset 2. Hands free 3. Loopset 4. Music stand 5. Text phone 6. Charger 11.Security se ttings 1. PIN code request 2. Call barring service 3. Fixed dialling 4. Closed user group 5. Security le vel 6. A ccess codes 12.Restore f actory settings ⢠Operat or menu 2 ⢠Gallery 1. Memory car d 3 2. Images 3. Video clips 4. Music f iles 5. Graphics 6. Tones 7. Recordings 1. This me nu is sh own o nly i f the phone is or has be en con nec ted to a compat ibl e enh ancement av ailable for th e ph one. 2. If this menu is n ot sh own the fol lowi ng me nu numb ers chang es acc ordi ngl y. Th e name de pen ds on the n etwor k ope r- ator. 3. This menu is no t show n if no mul timedi a card i s in serte d. Th e fo llow ing menu n umbers c hanges acco rdi ngly . The na me depend s on th e memor y card .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 48 Using the menu â¢M e d i a 1. Camera 2. Media player 3. M usic Player 4. Radio 5. Voic e recorder 6. Media equaliser ⢠Organiser 1. Alarm clock 1. Alar m time 2. Re pe at ala rm 3. Alarm t one 2. Calendar 3. To-do list 4. N otes 5. W allet 1. Wallet profiles 2. Cards 3. Ticket s 4. Receipts 5. Personal notes 6. Settings 6. Synchronisation 1. Sy nchronise 2. Settings ⢠Applications 1. Games 1. Selec t game 2. Game downloads 3. Memory 4. App. s ettings 2. Collection 1. Selec t application 2. App. downloa ds 3. Memory 3. Extras 1. Calculator 2. Countdown timer 3. Stopwatch â¢W e b 1. Home 2. Bookmarks 3. Downlo ad links 1. Tone downloads 2. Graphic downloads 3. Game downloads
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 49 Using the menu 4. Video downloads 5. App. downloads 4. Last web addr . 5. Service inbox 6. Settings 1. Connection settings 2. Appearance se ttings 3. Secur ity setti ngs 4. Service inbox settings 7. Go to add re ss 8. Clea r th e ca che ⢠SIM services 1 1. Only sho w n if sup porte d by yo u r SIM c ard. The n ame and content s vary depen ding on th e SIM car d.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 50 Menu functions 6. Menu f unctions â Mess ages You can read, w rite, send and save text , multimedia and SMS e -mail messages. All messages are or ganised into folder s. Before you can send a me ssage, y ou need to sav e some message settings. To select the font size for reading and w riting messages, press Menu , and select Messages , M essage se ttings , Oth er se tt ing s and Font size . Text me ssages (SMS) Using the SMS (Short Message Service) y our phone ca n send and rec eive multi-part mes sages, which consist of s everal ordinary text messages (network service). Invoicing is bas ed on the number of ordinary messages that ar e required for a multi-part message. This may affect t he invoicing f or the message. You can also send and recei ve text mes sages that cont ain pictures. A pi cture mess age is made up of several text messages. Note : The picture m ess age fun ction can b e used onl y if it i s suppo rted by your ne two rk opera tor or servi ce prov ider . Only p hones that o ffer pictu re mes sage featur es ca n rece ive a nd di splay pictur e mes sages. The text messages function uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 51 Menu functions Wr itin g an d s en din g me ss age s The number of available charac ters / the curr ent part number of a multi-part me ssage are sh own on the top right of the display, for example 120/2. 1. Press Menu , and select Messa g es , Text messages and Create mess age . Tip: To s tart writing mes sages quickly, press in standby mode . 2. Key in a message. See Writing text on page 38. To insert text templates or a picture into the message, see Templates on pa ge 55. Each pic ture message is made up of s everal tex t messages. Therefore, s ending one pictu re message may c ost more t han sending one text mes sage. 3. To send t he mess age, press Send . 4. Enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or search for the phone number in Con ta ct s . Pre ss OK to send the message. Note : Whe n s endin g mess age s via th e SMS networ k se rvice , you r pho ne may di splay the words Me ssage sen t . This is an i ndicat ion that the mes sage has been sent by y our phone t o the message c entre num ber programme d into your p hone. This is not a n indica tion that the message has b een r eceived a t th e inten ded destinati o n. For more deta ils about SMS services, check with your se rvice provi der. Opti ons for send ing a message After you have written a mess age, press O ptions and s elect Sending options . ⢠To send a mes sage to several recipients, select Send t o many . When you have s ent the message to everyone you want to send it to, press Done . ⢠To send a mes sage using a distribution list, select Send to list . To create a dis tribution list, see D istribution lists on page 54.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 52 Menu functions ⢠To send a mes sage using a mes sage profile, select Sending prof ile and then t he desired mes sage profile. To define a mes sage profile, s ee Writing and s ending a SMS e-mai l on page 52. Writ ing and se nding a SMS e-mai l Before you can se nd a SMS e-mail, you need t o save the settings for sending SMS e- mails, see W riting and sending a SMS e-mail on page 52. To check SM S e-mail s ervice availability a nd to subsc ribe to the service, contac t your serv ice provider. To save an e -mail addre ss in Contacts , see Saving mult iple numbers or text it ems per name on page 84. 1. Press Menu , and select Messa g es , Text messages and Create SMS e-mail . 2. Key in the recipientâÂÂs e-mail address or search for it in Con ta ct s and press OK . 3. If you wish, you can key in a subject f or the SMS e-mail and pr ess OK . 4. Key in the e-mail mes sage. See Writing text on page 38. The t otal number of cha racters t hat you can key i n is shown on the top right of the dis play. The e -mail address and subject ar e included in the total number of characters. See also Templates on page 55. Pictures cannot be ins erted. 5. To send the SMS e-mail, press Send . If you have not saved the settings for sending SMS e-mails, the phone asks f or the number of the e- mail server. Press OK to send the e-mail. Note : Whe n sen ding e -ma ils v ia the SMS n etwo rk se rvi ce, y our phon e ma y dis play t he w ords Messag e sen t . Thi s is an indi cation that the e - mail has been sent by your phone to th e e-mail se rver. Th is is not an indicat ion that th e e-mail has been received at the intende d destinati on. For more deta ils about e-mail services, ch eck with your service p rovider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 53 Menu functions Readi ng and re plying to a n SMS mess age or an SMS e-mail When you have r eceived a message or an SMS e-mail, the indicator and the numbe r of new messages followed by message s received ar e shown. The blinking indicates that t he message memor y is full. Before you can receiv e new messages , delete some of y our old message s in the Inbox folder . 1. Press Show t o view the ne w message , or pres s Exit t o v i e w i t l a t e r . Reading the message later: Press Menu , and select Me ssag es , T ext message s and Inbox . 2. If more t han one mess age has been received, s elect the one that you wa nt to read . An unread message is indic ated by in fr ont of it. 3. While r eading or viewing t he message, pr ess Options . You can sele ct an option, for example, to d elete, f orward or edit t he mess age as a tex t message or an SMS e-mail, rename the message you are reading or to mov e it to another folder. Select Copy to calendar to copy text at the beginning of the message to your phoneâÂÂs cale ndar as a reminde r note for the current day. Select Mes sage details to view, if available , the sender âÂÂs name and phone number, the message centre used, and the date and time of receipt. Select U se detail to extract numbers, e-mail address es and website a ddresses fr om the current message. When reading a picture mes sage, select Save picture to save the pict ure in the Templates folder . 4. Select Reply to reply to a message. Selec t Original text to include the original me ssage in the reply, or select a s tandard answ er to be inc luded in the reply, or s elect Empty screen .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 54 Menu functions When replying to an SMS e-mail, conf irm or edi t the e-mail address and s ubject first. T hen write your reply message. 5. To send t he mess age, press Send , and press OK to s end the mess age to the dis played number. Inbo x and sent it ems fold ers The phone s aves incoming text messages in t he Inbox folder and sent mes sages in the Sent items folder of the Text messages submenu. Text messages that you wis h to send lat er can be s aved in t he Saved text msgs. , My folders or Templates folder. Dist ribut ion li sts If you need to s end messages frequently to a fixed group of recipients, you can define a distribution list for that purpose . You can save these distribution lis ts in the phoneâÂÂs memory. N ote that the phone sends the messa ge separatel y to each recipient on the list. Theref ore, sending a mess age using a distribution list may cost more t han to send a mes sage to one recipient. Make sure t hat the cont acts you wa nt to a dd to the dis tribution lists, are s aved in t he phoneâÂÂs intern al contact memory. Distribution lists us e shared memory, see Shared memor y on page 19. Press Menu , and select Me ssag es , T ext message s and Distribution lists . T he names of t he available distribution lists ar e shown. ⢠If you hav e not saved any lists, pres s Add t o c r e a t e o n e . Key in the name for the lis t and pres s OK . Press View and t hen Add and select a contact from t he phoneâÂÂs contact memory. Pr ess Add agai n to add m ore c ontac ts to th e crea ted l ist.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 55 Menu functions ⢠Otherwise, s croll to a list. Press Vie w to view the contact s on the s elected l ist. Pres s Options and you can view t he details and delet e the select ed contact. Pres s Add to add more cont acts to the lis t. ⢠To display the other options of t he distribution lists folder, press Options and you can s elect ⢠Add list to create a new distribution list. ⢠Rename list to change the name of the select ed list. ⢠Clear list to delete all names and phone numbers from the sele cted list. ⢠Delete list to dele te the se lected distribution lis t. If a message cannot be s ent to certain recipients on the dis tribution list, a folder Unde livered is shown. Select U ndelivere d and press View t o view th e list of the recipients to whom the lat est message sending failed. Press Options and select ⢠Resend to list to resend the message to the r ecipient s on the Undelivered list. ⢠Delete list to dele te the Unde livered list. ⢠View message t o view the f ailed message. Tem pla tes Your phone includes text templates, indicated by , and picture templates, indicated by . To access the template list, press Menu , and select Messages , Text messages and Templates . ⢠To insert a t ext template int o the messa ge or the SMS e -mail that you are writing or replying to, press Options . Select Use template and select t he template that you want to insert. ⢠To insert a pic ture into the t ext mess age that you a re writing or replying to, press Options . Select Insert pi cture and select a pict ure to view it . Press Insert t o insert the picture int o your message. The indicator in the header of the mess age indicates that a picture has been atta ched. The number of character s that you can enter in a message, de pends on the si ze of the picture.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 56 Menu functions To view the text a nd the pictur e together bef ore sending t he message, pres s Options and selec t Preview . Saved items fold er and My fo lders To organise y our messages, you can move s ome of them t o the Saved text msgs. folder, or add new folde rs for y our messag es. While reading a message, pre ss Options . Select Mo ve , s croll to t he folder that you want to move the message to and press Select . To add or delet e a folder , press Menu , and select Messages , Text messages and My folders . ⢠To add a folder if you have not saved any folder, pr ess Add . O therwise, press Options and select Add fol d er . ⢠To delete a folder , scroll to the folder that you want t o delete, pr ess Options and select Dele te fol d er . Dele ting mes sages To delete mes sages, pres s Men u , and select Messages , Text messages and Delete me ssages . ⢠To delete all me ssages from a folder, s elect the folder from w hich you want t o delete the messages and press OK . ⢠To delete all me ssages from all text mes sage folders, s elect All messages and when Delete all messages from all folde rs? is displayed, press OK . If the folder contains unread mes sages, the phone will ask whether you want to delet e them also.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 57 Menu functions Sett ings f or text and SMS e -mail messages The message s ettings affect the sending, r eceiving and viewing of messages. 1. Press Menu , and select Messa g es , Message settings , Text messages and Sending pr ofile . 2. If more t han one message pr ofile set is supported by your SIM c ard, select the set you w ant to change. ⢠Select Mes sage centre number to save the phone number of the message centre t hat is required for sending text me ssages. You will receive t his number from your service provider. ⢠Select Messag es sent via to sele ct th e me ssage ty pe Text , E- mail or Paging . ⢠Select Mes sage validity to select the length of time fo r which the network should attempt to deliver your message. ⢠For message ty pe Text , select Default recipient number to save a default number f or sending messages for this profile. For message type E-mail , s elect E-mail s erver to save the e -mail server numbe r. ⢠Select D elivery repor ts to ask the network to send delivery reports about your messages (n etw ork se rv ice) . ⢠Select Use GPRS and s elect Yes to set GPR S a s the p refer r ed SMS bea rer . Also , se t the GP RS connection to Always online , see (E)G PRS connection on page 105. ⢠Select Reply via same ce ntre to al low the recipie nt of your mes sage to send you a r eply via your mess ag e c ent re (n etw ork se rv ice ). ⢠Select Rename sending profile to change the name of the selec ted message profile. The message profile sets ar e only displayed if your SIM car d supports more t han one set.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 58 Menu functions Overwrite settings When the te xt message me mory is full, t he phone cannot receive or send any new messages. However, you can s et the phone to aut omatically replace old t ext messages in the Inbox and Sent items folders with th e ne w ones . Press Menu , and select Me ssag es , Message settings , Text messages and Overwriting in sent items or Overwriting in inbox . Sele ct Allowed to s et the phone to replace t he old t ext messages wit h new ones in the Sent it ems or the Inbox f older, re spective ly. Multi media mess ages (MM S) Note : Thi s funct ion ca n be us ed on ly if it is sup porte d by y our netw ork o perat or or servi ce pro vider. O nly phones that offer compat ible multimedia mes sage feat ures can rec eive and disp lay multime dia messa ges. A multimedia message can contain t ext, sound and a picture or a video c lip. The phone supports multimedia messages that are up to 100 kB in siz e. If t he maximum si ze is exceeded, the phone ma y not be able to receiv e the message . Depending on the network, y ou may r eceive a text message t hat includes an Intern et address w here you can view th e multimedia mess age. If the message contains a picture, the phone scales it down to fit the display a rea. The multimedia message function uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19. Note : If Allow multi media reception is s et to Ye s or I n hom e netwo rk , yo ur op erator or serv ic e pr ovider may charge you for every me ssage you receive. Multimedia messaging s upports the following formats: ⢠Picture: JPEG, GIF, WBMP, BM P, and PNG. ⢠Sound: Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI), AMR audio and monophonic ringing tones.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 59 Menu functions ⢠Video clips in 3gp format with SubQCIF image size and AMR audio. The phone does not necess arily support all variations of the aforementioned file formats . If a r eceived message conta ins any unsupported e lements, they may be r eplaced with t he file name and the text Object format not supported . Note that you are not able to receive any multimedia messages if you have a call in progress, a game or another Java application running, or an a ctive browsing session over GSM data (see Keying in the service settings manually on page 145). Because deliv ery of multimedia messages can fail for a variety of reasons, do not rely solely upon them for essential communications. Wr itin g an d s end ing a m ult ime dia me ssag e To set the s ettings for multime dia messaging, see Set tings for multimedia me ssages on page 63. To check ava ilability and to subscribe to t he mult imedia me ssaging service, contact your network operator or service provider. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ri nging t ones and other c ontent from being copied, modified, transfer red or forwarded. 1. Press Menu , and select Messa g es , Multimedia msgs. and Create message . 2. Key in a message. See Writing text on page 38. ⢠To insert a f ile in the mes sage, press Options , sel ec t Insert and select the desired option. You cannot select an option if it is dimmed. The list of available f olders in the Gallery is shown. Open a specific folder, scroll to t he desired file, press Options and select Insert . An attached f ile is indicated with the file name in the mes sage. ⢠You can also ins ert a New sound clip directly out of your voice r ecorder. Pres s Opt ions , s elect Insert and New so und cl ip . The voice recor der start s automatically and y ou can start with the recording. The new sound clip is added automa tically, when you end the rec ording.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 60 Menu functions ⢠Your phone supports the sending and rec eiving of multimedia messages that contain several pages (slides). T o insert a slide in the me ssage, press , and selec t Insert and Slide . Each slid e can contain text, one image a nd one sound clip. ⢠If the message contains seve ral slides, y ou can open t he desired one by pressing Options and selecting Previous slide , Next slide or Slide list . To set the int erval between t he slides, pr ess Options and select Slide timing . To move the text component to the t op or bottom of t he message, press Options and select Place text f irst or Plac e text last . ⢠To insert a name from the contacts list, press Options and selec t More options , Inse rt contact and the desir ed name. To insert a number f rom the c ontacts list, pr ess Options and select More options and Ins ert number . ⢠To insert a ca lendar note, pr ess Options and select Insert and Calendar note . ⢠To insert a bus iness ca rd, press Options and select Insert an d Busine ss card . ⢠To delete an ima ge, slide or s ound cl ip from the message, press Options and select Dele te and the desired function. ⢠To save the message in the Save d items folder, press Options and select Save message . ⢠To add a s ubject to t he message, pr ess Options and select More options and E dit subject . ⢠To view for example the s ize or recipient of t he message, pr ess Options and selec t More options and Message de tails . During writ ing a multimedia mess age, the r emaining space left is shown on the display. 3. To view t he mess age or slide p resentation bef ore sending it, pr ess Options and selec t Preview .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 61 Menu functions 4. To send t he mess age, press Send and select Phone number , E- mail address or Many . Depending on your operator, more options may be ava ilable. 5. Enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number (or e-mail addr ess) or sear ch for it in Contacts . Pr ess OK and the message is mov ed to the Outbox folder for sending. It takes more time to send a multimedia mes sage than to send a text message. W hile the multimedia message is being sent, t he animated indicat or is displayed and you can use ot her functions on the phone. If there is an interruption while the message is being sent, the phone t ries to resend it a few t imes. If this fails, the mes sage will remain in the Outbox folder and you c an try to resend it lat er. The messages that you have sent will be saved in t he Sent i tems folder if the s etting Save s ent messages is set to Ye s . See Se ttings for multimedia messages on pag e 63. This is not an indication that the message has bee n received at the intended destination. Readi ng and re plying to a multimed ia messa ge When your phone is receiving a multimedia messa ge, the anima ted indicator is displayed. When the message has been received, the indicat or and t he text Multimedia message recei ved are shown . The blinking indicates that the memory for multimedia messages is full, se e Multimedia messages memory full on page 63. 1. Press Show t o view th e message, or press Exit t o v i e w i t l a t e r . Reading the message later: Press Menu , and s elect Mes sages , Multimedia msgs. and Inbox . 2. Scroll t o view th e message. Pr ess O ptions and, for example, some of the f ollowing options may be available. ⢠Play presentation t o view the presentation attached in th e message.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 62 Menu functions ⢠View text t o view only the text in the messa ge. ⢠Open image , Open s ound clip or Ope n video clip to open t he corre sponding file. ⢠Save image , Save sound clip or Save video clip t o save the corresponding file in the G allery . ⢠Details to view the de tails o f the atta che d file . ⢠Delete message to de lete a s aved message. ⢠Reply or Repl y to all to reply t o the message. To send the reply, press O ptions and select Send . ⢠Forward to no. , F orward to e-mail or Forward to many to fo rwa rd the mess ag e. ⢠Edit to edit a message. You can only edit messages you have creat ed. See Wr iting and sending a multimedia message on page 59. ⢠Message details to view the subject, size and t he type of message. ⢠Refer also to t he options in Gallery , se e Gallery on page 112. Inb ox, Out b ox, Sav ed an d Se nt it ems fol d ers The phone s aves the mult imedia messages that have been received in t he Inbox f older of the Multimedia msgs. submenu. Multimedia messages that have not yet been s ent are moved to the Outbox folder of the Multimedia msgs. submenu. The multimedia mes sages that you w ish to send la ter, can be saved in the Saved items folder of t he Multimedia msgs. submenu. The multimedia mes sages that have been s ent are saved in the Sent items fol d er of the Mult imedia msgs. submenu if th e setting Save s ent messages is set to Ye s . See Settings for multimedia messages on page 63.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 63 Menu functions Mult ime dia mess ages m em ory full When you have a new multimedia message waiting and the me mory for the messages is full, the indicator blinks and Multimedia memory full, v iew waiting msg. is shown. To view the wait ing message, press Show . To save the message, press Options , select Save message and d elete old messages by first selecting the folder and t hen the oId message to be deleted. To discard t he waiting mes sage, press Exit and Ye s . If you press No , you can view the message. Dele ting mes sages To delete mes sages, pres s Men u , and select Messages , Mult imedia msgs. and Delete messages . To delete all mess ages from a f older, selec t the fo lde r from which y ou want to dele te the mes sages and press OK . If the folder contains unread mes sages, the phone will ask whether you want to delet e them also. Set ting s fo r m ult imed ia m ess age s You may receive the mult imedia connection s ettings as a conf iguration message from the network operator or service provider. To receive t he settings as configurat ion message, se e Configuration settings service on page 33. Keying in the sett ings manually Press Menu , and select Me ssag es , Message settings and Multimedia msgs. . Select ⢠Save sent messages . Select Ye s t o set the phone to s ave sent mult imedia mes sages in t he Sent i tems folder. If you select No , th e sent messa ges a re not saved. ⢠Delivery repor ts to ask the netw ork to send delive ry reports about your mess ages (network se rvice). ⢠Scale image down to de fine the image size when you ins ert the image to the multimedia message. ⢠Default slide timing to def ine the default time for slides composed f or multimedia messages.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 64 Menu functions ⢠Allow multimedia reception . Choose No , Ye s or In home net work to use the mult imedia servic e. If you choose In home net work , you cannot rec eive multimedia messages when outside your home network. The def ault setting is In home network . ⢠Incoming multimedia mess ages . Select Retrieve to automatically allow the rece ption of multi media messages, Retrieve manually to allow the reception of mult imedia message only after being prompted or se lect Reje ct . This setting is not shown if the Allo w multimedia rece ption is set to No . ⢠Connection settings to define connec tion settings for r etrieving multimedia messages. First s elect Act ive multimedia s ettings and activate t he set in which you want to save the connection sett ings. Select Ed it active multimedia se ttings and edit th e active settings . Select e ach of the set tings one by one and key in all t he required settings . Contact your network operator or service provider fo r the set tings. ⢠Settings' name . Key in the new n a me for the connection set and press OK . ⢠Homepage . Key in t he homepage addr ess of the service provider that you want to use , press for a dot, and press OK . ⢠Proxies . Selec t Enable or Disable. ⢠If you have enabl ed the proxies , you can select Primary proxy and Secondary proxy , and e dit them . ⢠Data bearer . Select GPRS. ⢠Bearer sett ings to s et the se ttings for the selected bear er. ⢠GPRS access point . Key in the access point name to establish a connectio n to a GPRS net work and press OK . ⢠Au thenti catio n typ e . Select Secure or N ormal .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 65 Menu functions ⢠User name . Key in the user name and pres s OK . ⢠Pa s s w o r d . Key in the password and pres s OK . ⢠Allow adverts to choose if you allow the rec eption of mes sages defined as advertisement. T his setting is not shown if the Allow multimedia reception is set to No . E-mail messages The e-mail application allows y ou to acc ess your e-mail a ccount via the phone. The compatible e- mail system that you use in the office or at home may be supported by the e-mail funct ion on your phone. You can write, send, and read e-mails with your phone. Your phone supports POP 3 and IMAP4 e-mail serve rs . The e-mail function uses s hared memory, see Shared memory on page 1 9. Before you c an send and retrieve any e -mails, you may ne ed to do th e following: ⢠Obtain a new e-mail account or use the current one. For availabilit y of your e-mail account contact your e-mail s ervice provider . ⢠For the settings required for e-mail, contact your network operator or e-ma il service provide r. For receiving the e-mail settings as configuration me ssage, see Configuration settings service on page 33. ⢠To set the e-mail set tings on your phone, press Menu and select Mes sages , Message settings and E- mail messages . See Settings for e- mail on page 68.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 66 Menu functions Wr itin g an d s end in g a n e- ma il You can write your e-mail mes sage befor e connecting to the e-ma il service, or connect to t he service first, and then w rite and se nd your e-mail. 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , and Create e-mail . The wait ing note is displayed. 2. Key in the recipientâÂÂs e-mail address and press OK or press Edit and key in the e-mail address, a nd press OK . To search for the e-mail a ddress in Contacts , p ress Options , and select Search . 3. You can key in a subject for t he e-mail if you want, and press OK . If you pres s Options , you can select one of the f ollowing: the mes sage editor, add a new rec ipient, add a copy r ecipient or a hidden copy recipient. 4. Key in the e-mail mes sage, see W riting text on page 38. The number of char acters that y ou can key in is shown on t he top right of the display. 5. To send t he e-mail message, p ress Send . Sele ct ⢠Send now t o send the e-mail immediately. If you have not already connected to the e-mail account, your phone establishes t he connect ion first and then s ends the e-ma il. ⢠Send later to se nd your e-mail lat er and the e-mail is sav ed in the Outbox folder. If you want to edit or continue w riting your e-mail later, you c an save it in Dra fts by selecting Save draft msg. . Sending the e-mail later: Press Me nu and select Mes sages , E-mail , Other options , and Send now or Retrieve and send . Note: When sending e-mails, you r phone may disp lay the wor ds Mes sag e sen t . Thi s is an indicati on that the e-ma il has been sent b y your phone to the e-mail server. This is not an ind ication that the e-mai l has been recei ved at the inten ded d estinati o n. For more detai ls about e-mai l services, ch eck wit h your serv ice pro vid er.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 67 Menu functions Downlo ading e-mail message s from yo ur e-mail ac count 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , and Retr ie ve to download e- mail messages that have been sent to your e- mail account. O r: Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Other options , and Retrieve and s end to download new e- mail messages and to send e-ma ils that have been sav ed in the Outbox folder. If the mes sage memory is full, delete some of your older messages before you start t o download new messages. 2. Your phone mak es a connec tion to the e-mail service. A status bar is shown whil e your phone is downloading e-mail messages to your phone. 3. Press Select to view the new me ssag e in Inbox , or press Back t o v i e w i t l a t e r . If more than one message is received, select the message tha t you want to read. An unr ead message is indicated by . Readi ng and re plying to a n e-mail message 1. Press Menu , select Messages , E- mail and Inbox . 2. While r eading the message, pr ess Options . You can, for example, view the details of the selec ted message, mark the message as unread, delete , reply, reply t o all, fo rward or move the message t o another folder . 3. To reply to an e-mail, press Reply . Select Original text to include the original message in the reply or sele ct Empty screen . When replying to an e-mail, f irst confirm or edit the e -mail address and s ubject, th en write your reply. 4. To send t he mess age, press Send and select Send now .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 68 Menu functions Inbo x and Other fol ders (Draft s, Archiv e, Outb ox and Sent it ems) Your phone has th e following folders in the E-mail me nu: ⢠Inbox for saving e- mails that y ou have downloaded from your e-ma il account. ⢠Other folders contains the folders : Dr afts for sa ving un finished e -mails, Ar chive for organis ing and saving your e- mails, Outbox for saving e-mails that have not been sent, if y ou have selected Send later , see Writing and sending an e- mail on page 66, and Sent items for saving e-mails that have been sent. Dele ting e- mail m essage s ⢠To delete e-ma il messages, pr ess Me nu and select Messages , E-mail O ther options and Delete messages . To delete all me ssages from a folder, s elect the folder from w hich you want t o delete the messages and press Ye s . To de lete all messages from all folder s, select All messages and pres s Ye s . Note that delet ing an e-mail from your phone does not d elete it fro m the e-mail se rver. Sett ings for e- mail You may receive the e- mail settings as a configuration mes sage from the network oper ator or se rvice provider. For receiving the settings as a configuration message, see Configuration s ettings service on page 33. Keying in the sett ings manually Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings , and E-mail messages . ⢠First select Active e-mail settings and act ivate the s et in which you w ant to save the settings. Select Edit active e- mail settings and edit the active s ettings. Select e ach of the set tings one by one and key in all t he required settings . Contact your network operator or e-mail service pr ovider for th e settings.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 69 Menu functions ⢠Mailbox name . Key in t he name that you want to use for the mailbox. You can use any name. ⢠E-mail address . Key in your e- mail address. ⢠My name . Key in your name or nickname. Your name and e- mail address w ill be shown. ⢠Outgoing SMTP server . Key in the s erver address. ⢠Incoming server type . Se lect eith er POP3 or IMAP4 depending on the type of e-mail system that you are using. If both types ar e supported, select IMAP4 . C hanging the server type also changes the incoming p ort number. ⢠If you have s elected POP 3 a s a serve r type, t hen Inc oming POP3 server , POP3 user name , and POP3 password are shown. If you have selected IMAP4 as a server type, then Incoming IMAP4 serve r , IM AP4 user name , and IMA P4 password are shown. Key in the e-mail server a ddress fo r incoming e-mail, then key in the user name and pas sword to acces s the e-mail account. If you have not def ined a SMTP user name or SMT P password the e -mail server uses POP3/IMAP4 user name and passwor d instead. ⢠Oth er se tt ing s and select: ⢠Include signature . You can define a signature that is automatica lly added to t he end of your e-mail, when you write y our message. ⢠Use SMTP authorisation . If y our e-mail servic e provider requires authenticat ion for sending e-mails, selec t Ye s . In this case, you must also define your SMTP user name and SMT P password . ⢠SMTP user name . Key in t he user name for outgoing mails th at you have obtained from your e-mail service provider. ⢠SMTP password . Key in t he password that you want t o use for outgoing mails.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 70 Menu functions ⢠Outgoing SMTP port . Key in th e number of the e-mail se rver port for outgoing e- mail. The most common default value is 25. If you have selected POP 3 as a server type, the followi ng options are shown: ⢠Incoming POP3 port . Key in the port number that you have obta ined from your e-mail service provider. ⢠Reply-to address . Key in the e-mail address to which you want the replies to be sent. ⢠Secure login . Select Se cure login on if your connection requires an encr ypted login, otherwis e leave it to Secure login off . Contact y our service provider if in doubt . Using encr ypted login enables increas ed security fo r user names and passwords. It does not increas e securit y for the connection itself. ⢠Retrieve e-mails . Ke y in the maximum number of e-mails that you w ant to retrieve at a t ime. ⢠SMTP connection settings to define the connection settings required for out going e-mail. ⢠POP3 connection settings to define th e connection se ttings for incoming e- mail. See Keying in the service sett ings manually on page 145. Select e ach of the set tings one by one and ke y in all the r equired settings. Cont act your e- mail service provider for the settings. If you have selected IMAP4 as a server type, the f ollowing options are shown: ⢠Incoming IMAP4 port . Key in the port number that you have obtained from your e-mail service provider. ⢠Reply-to address . Key in the e-mail address to which you want the replies to be sent. ⢠Retrieve e-mails . Ke y in the number of e-mai ls that you want to retriev e at a time.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 71 Menu functions ⢠Retrieval method . Selec t Lat est if you want t o retrieve a ll new received e-mai ls or selec t Latest unread if you want t o retrieve only e-mails that you have not read. ⢠SMTP connection settings to define the connection settings required for out going e-mail. ⢠IMAP4 connection settings to define the connectio n settings required for incoming mail. See Keying in the se rvice settings manually on page 145. Select e ach of the set tings one by one and ke y in all the r equired settings. Cont act your e- mail service provider for the settings. Inst ant messages (IM) Note : Thi s funct ion ca n be us ed on ly if it is sup porte d by y our netw ork o perat or or servi ce pro vider. O nly phones that offer comp atible in stant messa ges featu res can recei ve and display instan t messages . Depending on your service provider, the displa y texts may vary. Instant messaging i s a way of sending short text messages that are deliver ed over TCP/IP pr otocols to online users (network service). Your contact lis t show s you when the contacts on the list are online and available to par ticipate in a n instant me ssages convers ation. When you ha ve written and s ent your message, it stays on the di splay. The reply mes sage appea rs below your or iginal message. Before you c an use instant mes sages, you need to subscr ibe to the s ervice. For a vailability, charging and subscription to the service, contact your network operator or service provider, from whom you also receive your unique ID and pas sword and t he settings for instant messaging. For setting the r equired settings for the ins tant messages s ervice, see IM and presence settings on page 109. The icons and texts on the display may vary depending on the instant messages s ervice.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 72 Menu functions You can use the other functions of the phone, while you have an active instant messages session in the background. Depending on the network, the ac tive instant messages session may cons ume the phoneâÂÂs battery fas ter and y ou may need t o connect t he phone to a charger. Instant messages use s shared memory, see Shared memory on pa ge 19. Bas ic st eps fo r in stant messa ging ⢠To enter the instant messages menu (offline), see Entering the instant messages menu on page 73. ⢠To connect to the instant messages service (onlin e), se e Connecting to the instant messages service and disconnecting on page 74. ⢠To start a n instant messages session with a contact , see IM cont acts in Starting an instant messages se ssion on page 74. To create your own instant mes sages contact lis ts, see Contacts for instant messaging on page 77. ⢠To join a public instant message s session, see Groups in Starting an instant messag es session on page 74. To join a gr oup instant messages session via invit ation message, see Accepting or rejecting an instant messages invit ation on page 75. To create your own ins tant messages groups, or to join or delet e a public group, see Gr oups on page 79. ⢠To edit your own i nformation, s ee Editing your own information on page 77. ⢠To search user s and groups, se e Search in Starting an instant messages session on p age 74. ⢠To read a mes sage for a new instant mes sages session, see Reading an instant message on page 76. ⢠To write and send messages dur ing an active in stant mess ages se ssion, see Par ticipating in an instant messages c onver sation on page 76.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 73 Menu functions ⢠To view, rename or dele te saved conv ersations, select Saved convers. when you have ent ered the Instant messages menu. ⢠To block/unblock contacts, see Blocking and unblocking messages on pa ge 78. ⢠To disconnect from the instant messages se rvice, see Connecting to the inst ant messages s ervice and disconnecting on page 74. Enter ing the in stant m essa ges menu To en ter the Instant messages m enu while still offline, pres s Menu , and select Messages and Instant messages . If more than one connect ion setting set for instant mes sages services i s available, select the set of the desired instant messages service. If there is only one set defined, this set will be s elected automatically. Then the following options are shown: ⢠Login to conn ect to the i nsta nt mess a ges serv ice. To set th e phone to automatically conne ct to th e instant mes sages service when you enter the Instant messages menu, see Connecting to the instant messages service and disc onnecting on page 74. ⢠Saved convers. to view, er ase or rename the instant messages conv ersations that you have saved during the instant mes sages session. You can select Saved convers. also when you have connec ted to the instant messages service. ⢠Connect. settings t o edit the settings needed f or instant messaging and presence connection. See IM and presence settings on page 109. You can also select Connect. settings when you have connected to the instant messages service.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 74 Menu functions Con ne ctin g to th e in sta nt m ess age s se rv ice and di sco nne ctin g To connect to the ins tant messag es service, ent er the Ins tant messages menu, ac tiva te a ins tant messages s ervice a nd select Login . Select one of the av ailable sets. Key in the Use r ID: and the Pa s s w o r d : . When the phone has successfully connected, Logged in is displaye d. Tip: To s et the phone to aut omatically connec t to the instant messages service when you enter the Instant messages menu, connect to t he instant messages service, select My settings , Automatic login and On IM s tar t-u p . To disconnect from the instant messages service, select Logout . Star ting an i nstan t messages s essi on Ente r th e Instant messages menu and connect to the ins tant messages service. You can select ⢠Conversations to view the list of new and read instant mes sages or inv itations to instant mes sages during the active instant mes sages session. Sc roll to the message or invit ation that you want and press Ope n to r ead the messag e. indicates t he new and the read instant messages. indicates the new and read group mes sages. indicates the invitations. ⢠IM contacts includes the contacts that you have added. Sc roll to the contact with whom you would like to chat and pr ess Cha t or press Open if a new contact is shown in t he list. To add contacts see Contacts for instant mes saging on page 77. If you have r eceived a new message f rom a conta ct, it is indicat ed with . indicat es the online and t he offline c ontacts in the phone âÂÂs contact s memory. indicat es a blocked c ontact, refe r to Blocking a nd unblocking messages on page 78.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 75 Menu functions To add contact s to the list, see Cont acts f or instant messaging session on page 77. ⢠Groups and Public groups . The list of bookmar ks to public groups provided by the net work operator or service provide r is displaye d. To start an instant me ssages session with a group, scroll t o a group and press Join . Enter your screen name that you want to use in the conv ersation. When y ou have successfully joined the group conv ersation, th e phone shows Joined group: a nd the group name. To create a private group, s ee Groups on page 79. ⢠Search and select Us er s or Groups to search for othe r instant messages use rs or public groups o n the n et wor k. ⢠If you select User s , you can search for a us er by phone number, screen name , e-mail addres s or name. ⢠If you select Groups , you can search for a group by a group member, group name, topic or ID. To start the inst ant messages session when y ou have f ound the user or the group, s croll to the us er or the group t hat you want, press Options and select Chat or Join group . ⢠To start a n instant messages s ession from Contacts , s ee Viewing the s ubscribed names on page 90. Acc ept ing or r eje ctin g a n in sta nt m ess age s in vi tat ion In standby mode, when you have connected to th e instant messages se rvice and you receive an invitation, Ne w invitation re ceived is displayed. Press Re ad t o r e a d i t . If you receive more than one invitation, the number of messages followed by new invitations receiv ed is displayed. Press Read , scroll t o the invitation you want, and press Ope n . ⢠To join the private group conversation, press Accep t . Enter the screen name that you want to use as a nickname. When you hav e successfully joined the group, t he phone s hows Joined g roup: and the group name. ⢠To reject or delete the invitation, pre ss Options and select Reject or Dele te .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 76 Menu functions Readi ng an ins tant messag e In standby mode, when you have connected to the in stant mess ages service and you receive a message from a person who is not taking part in the conversat ion, New instant message is displayed. Press Re ad to re ad it. ⢠If you receive more than one message, the number of mes sages followed by new instant messages is displayed. Press Read , scroll t o the message , and press Open . New messages r eceived during an a ctive instant mes sages ses sion are held in th e Conve rsations of the Instant messages menu. If the message is fr om a person whos e contact informat ion is missing from t he contact lis t in IM contacts , the senderâÂÂs ID is show n. If the cont act informat ion can be found in the phoneâÂÂs memory fo r contacts and the pho ne recognises it, the senderâÂÂs na me is show n. To save a new contact in th e phoneâÂÂs memory, pr ess Options and select ⢠Save contact and enter the name of the per son. ⢠Add t o contac t and select t he contact to which you want to add the detail and press Add . Part icipati ng in an i nstant messages co nversati on Join or s tart an instant messages session by pressing Wr ite . Tip: If yo u receive a new message dur ing an instant messages from a pe rson that is not within the insta nt messages conver sation, t he indicator is shown on the t op of the display. Write your message and pr ess Send or to send it . If you pr ess Options , some of the following options are available. ⢠View conversation t o view th e ongoing instant mess ages conversat ion. To save t he instant messages conv ersation, pres s Save and ente r the name f or the c onversation. ⢠Save contact , see Reading an instant message on page 76.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 77 Menu functions ⢠Add t o contac t , see Reading a n instant mes sage on page 76. ⢠Group members to vie w the membe rs of the select ed private group. The opt ion is only shown if you have creat ed the group. ⢠End conversation t o end the o ngoing conversation. ⢠Dictionary , see Setti ng predictive text input on or off on page 38. Edit ing your own i nformat ion Ente r th e Instant messages menu and connect to t he instant me ssages service. Se lect My s ettings to view and edit your own availability information or screen name. Select A vailability and Available f or all or Avail. for contacts (or A ppear offline ) to allow all the other instant messages us ers or only t he contacts on your instant messa ges contact list to see y ou as being online when you hav e connected t o the instant mes sages service. When you are connected to the inst ant messages s ervice, indicates that you are online and that you are not vis ible to other s. Conta cts for in stant messa ging To add contact s to the instant messages contact s list, connect to t he instant messages servic e and sele ct IM c ontacts . If the contact s list is empt y the p hone displays Contact lis t empty . Copy c ontacts from server? to retrieve avai lable c ontacts from the server. Otherwise press Options and select Add contact , or if you have no contacts added, press Add . Select ⢠Enter ID manually to enter th e ID manual ly. ⢠Search from serv . to seac h for a contac t from the server . ⢠From contacts t o s e a r c h fo r a na m e i n Contacts. ⢠Copy from server to copy a name from a server-based contacts list.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 78 Menu functions When the cont act is added, the phone di splays Added to IM contacts: and t he contact name. Scroll to a contact, and press Chat to star t to chat, o r pres s O ptions and select ⢠Contact info to view t he details of the selec ted contact . If you want to edit th e details, see Editing or deleting details in the Contacts menu (menu 3) on page 87. ⢠Edit name to edit t he contactâ s name. ⢠Block contact (or Unblock contact ) t o block (or unblock) the messages from the selected contact. ⢠Add contact to add a new contact f rom the phoneâÂÂs contact memory. ⢠Remove contact to remove a contact f rom the instant mes sages contact list. ⢠Copy to server to copy a name t o a server-based contacts list. ⢠A vailability alerts to mark fro m whom you wis h to receiv e presence a lerts. Bloc king and u nblocking mess ages Connect to t he instant message s service and s elect Conversat ions or IM c ontacts . Highlight the contact in th e contacts lis t from whom you want to block incoming me ssages. Press O ptions , s ele ct Block contact a nd press OK . To unblock the me ssages, connect to the instant mess ages se rvice a nd select Blocke d list . Scr oll to th e contact from whom you want t o unblock th e messages an d press Unblock . You can also unblock the messages from the contact lis t, see Contacts for instant messag ing on page 77.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 79 Menu functions Groups You can creat e your o wn private groups f or a instant me ssages session, or use the public groups provided by t he service provider. The pr ivate groups exist only during an active instant messages session. You ca n add to a pr ivate group only the contacts that are in your contact list and thus in th e phoneâÂÂs contact s memory, s ee Saving name s and phon e numbers (Add new contact ) on page 84. If the server you are logged into does not support group s ervices all gr oups related menus are dimmed. Public groups You can bookmark public groups that y our service pr ovider may maint ain. Connect to the instant messages s ervice, select Groups and Public groups . Scroll t o a group that y ou want t o chat with and press Joi n . If you are not in the gr oup, key i n your screen name as your nick name for t he group. If you press Options , you c an select Delete group t o delete a gr oup from your group list. Creating a private group Connect to t he instant message s service , select Groups and Create group . Key in the name f or the group and the screen name for yourself that you want t o use for the group. You can use another scre en name in another group. Mark from th e contacts list y our private gr oup members and k ey in an invitation to newly added members.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 80 Menu functions Voice messages The voice mailbox is a network serv ice and you may need t o subscribe to it . For more informati on and for the voice mailbox number, co ntact your ser vice provider. Press Menu , and select Me ssag es and V oice messages . Selec t ⢠Listen to voi ce messages to ca ll your voic e mailbox at the phone number that you have saved in t he V oice mailbox number menu. If you have t wo phone lines availa ble (network s ervice), each phone line may have its own voice mailbox number. Refer to Call settings on page 106. ⢠V oice mailbox number t o key in, search for or edit your voice mailbox number and pre ss OK to save it. If supported by the network, the indicator will show new voice messages. Press Listen to call your voice mailbox number. Tip: Pressing and holding calls your voic e mailbox if you have the number set. Info m essages With the info message networ k servic e you may be able torece ive mess ages on various topics from your service provider. The se messages may include, f or example, w eather or traffic conditions. For availability, topics and th e relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Servi ce comma nds Press Menu , and select Messages and Service commands . Key in and send service reques ts (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for net work services , to your service provide r.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 81 Menu functions â Call regis ter The phone registers the phone numbe rs of missed, r eceived and di alled calls, and the approximate lengt h of your calls . The phone register s missed and received calls only if t he network s upports these functions, and the phone is switched on and within t he networkâ s service ar ea. When you press Opt ions in the Missed calls , Rece ived calls and Dialled numbers menu, you c an, for example, view t he date and the time of the call, edit or delete the phone number from the list, save the number in Contacts , or send a mes sage to t he number. Recent calls lists Press Menu , and select Call register and then selec t ⢠Missed calls to view the list of the last 20 phone numbers from which s omebody has tried to call you (network service). The number in front of t he (name or) p hone number indicates t he amount of call attempts from that caller. Tip: When a note about mis sed calls is displayed, press List to ac cess the li st of phone numbers. Scroll to the number you wo uld like to call back and press . ⢠Received calls to view t he list of the last 20 phone number s from which y ou have most r ecently accepted calls (network s ervice). ⢠Dialled numbers to view the list of the 20 phone numbers that y ou have most r ecently calle d or attempted to c all. Tip: In standby mode, press once to access the list of dialled numbe rs. Scroll to t he number or name you want , and press to c all the number.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 82 Menu functions ⢠Delete recent call lis ts to del ete the recent calls l ists. Select whe ther you want to de lete all the phone numbers in th e recent calls lists, or only those numbe rs in the miss ed calls, received calls or dialled numbers lis ts. You cannot undo t he operation. Coun ters an d time rs fo r calls, data and me ss ages Note : The actual i nvoice for calls and services from your s ervice provider may vary, dependin g upon network fe atures, roundin g-off for billi ng, taxes and so for th. Press Menu , and select Call register and then selec t ⢠Call duration . Scroll to view the approximat e duration of your inc oming and outgoing c alls in hours, minutes and seco nds. The securit y code is requir ed to cl ear the timer s. If you have t wo phone lines availa ble (network s ervice), each phone line has its own call duration timers. The timers o f the curr ently selected line are displayed. R efer to Call s ettings on page 106. ⢠GPRS data counter . Scrol l to chec k the amounts of data th at were sent or receiv ed in the last session, data s ent and recei ved in total, and to cle ar the counter s. The counter unit is a byte. The security code is required to c lear th e counters. ⢠GPRS connection timer . Scr oll to ch eck the dura tion of the last G PRS connection or the total GPRS connection time. You can als o clear the timers. The security code is required to clear the timers. ⢠Message counter . Sc roll to check the amount s of text messages that were sent or received and t o clear the counters. Pos iti onin g inform ation Some networks allow to request t he position of the phone (network service). T his menu allows yo u to view the received pos ition requests from the ne twork oper ator. Contact your net work operator or service provider to subscrib e and to agree upon the deliver y of locat ion information.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 83 Menu functions â Contact s You can save names and phone number s (Contacts) in t he phoneâÂÂs memory and in the SIM cardâÂÂs memory. ⢠The phoneâÂÂs memory may save up to 1000 names with numbers and text notes about each name. You can als o save an image fo r a certain number of names. T he number of names that can be saved depends on the length of the names, and the number and le ngth of the phone numbers and text items. Contacts use sha red memory, see Shared memory on page 19. ⢠The phone supports SIM cards that can save up to 254 names and phone numbers. Names a nd numbers saved in the SIM cardâÂÂs me mory, are indicated by . In dynamic contact s (Presence) you c an publish yo ur c urrent ava ilability status to communicate to anyone who has access to t his service and who is r equesting this inf ormation. You can view the availability status of any of the c ontacts that you ha ve subsc ribed to in t he Subscribed names menu and in the detailed view of a name in Contacts . Selectin g set tings f o r cont a cts Press Menu and select Contacts and Settings . Select ⢠Memory in use to select the memory, either SIM car d or p hone, that you w ant to use for your contacts. To recall names and numbers fr om both memories f or contacts, select Phone and SIM . In that case, t he names and numbers will be s aved in th e phoneâÂÂs memory. ⢠Contacts vie w to sele ct how the na mes, numbers and images in c ontacts are displaye d. ⢠Memory status to view how much memory is availa ble in the selec ted memory for contacts .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 84 Menu functions Savi ng names and pho ne numbers (Add new c ontac t) Names and number s will be save d in the used me mory, see Sel ecting settings for contacts abov e. 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and A dd contact . 2. Key in the name a nd press OK . See U sing traditional text input on page 39. 3. Key in the phone number, and press OK . T o key in the numbers , see Mak ing a call on pa ge 34. 4. When the name and number are save d, press Done . Tip: Quick save In standby mode, key in the phone nu mb er. Press Opt ions , and select Save . Key in the name, press OK and Do ne . Saving multiple nu mbers or t ext i tems per name You can save dif ferent types of phone numbers and s hort text items per name in the phoneâÂÂs intern al memory for cont acts. The first numbe r saved is aut omatically set as the default number and it is indicated wi th a fra me around the number t ype indicator, for example . When you s elect a name from contact s, for example to make a ca ll, the default number is us ed unless you s elect another number . 1. Make s ure that the memory in use is eithe r Phone or Phone and SIM . See Selecting settings for contacts on page 83 . 2. To a ccess the list of names and phone numbers, pres s in standby mode. 3. Scroll t o the na me saved in t he phoneâÂÂs inter nal memory f or the contact to wh ich you want to add a new number or text item, and press Details . 4. Press Options and select Add number or Add detail . 5. To a dd a number or deta il, select one of th e number types or t ext types , respect ively.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 85 Menu functions ⢠If you s elect the text type User I D : Select Sear ch to search for an ID by a mobile phone number or an e-mail address in the server of the operat or or service pr ovider i f you have connec ted to t he presence s ervice. See My prese nce on page 87. If only one ID is found, it is automatically saved. Otherw ise, to save t he ID, press Options , and select Save . To key i n the ID, s elect Enter ID manually . Key in the ID and pr ess OK to save it. To change the numbe r or tex t type, s elect Change type in t he options list. Note that you c annot change the type of an ID when it is on t he IM c o nta c ts or in th e Subscribed name s list. To set th e selected numbe r as the default number, s elect Set as default . 6. Key in the number or t ext item and press OK to save it. 7. Press Back and then Exit to r eturn to standby mode . Addin g an image to a name or number in con tacts You can add an image in supported format to a name or number s aved in the phoneâÂÂs internal memory. Press in standby mod e, scroll to t he contact y ou want to add an image to and pres s Details . P re ss Options and select Add image . The phone opens t he list of folders in the Gallery . Scroll to t he desired image, press Options and select Save to contacts . A c opy of the ima ge is added to the cont act. Searching for a contact 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Search , or t o quickly find a contact name, pr ess in standby mode. 2. You can key in t he first cha racters of t he name you a re searc hing for in th e pop-up window.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 86 Menu functions Press and to scroll through the names in the lis t, and and to move th e cursor in t he pop-up window. 3. Scroll t o the contac t name you want , and press De tails . Scroll to view the details of the s elect ed contact. Depending on the Con t act s v iew selec tion in Selecting settings for contact s on page 83, t he subscribed names are shown differently. Either only the availability indicat or or t he availability indicator, persona l logo and the status message ar e shown. Press Detai ls and all of t he dynamic information is shown. Tip: Viewing a contact. To quickly view a specific name with the def ault phone number, press and hold at the name while scrolling through the c ontact names. To view the status message i n full, press Details and press and hold at the dynamic cont act while s crolling through the contact names . Delet ing conta cts Press Menu and select Contacts and Delete to dele te contacts a nd all the details attached to them. ⢠To delete cont acts one by one, selec t One by one a nd scroll to the name you want to delete . Press De lete and press OK to confirm. If the contact has an ID on the IM contact s or in the Subscribed names list, the n ote Presence information will be deleted is shown befor e the contac t is deleted. ⢠To delete cont acts all a t once, select Delete all a nd then sc roll to eit her of the me mories From phone mem. or From SIM card and press Del ete . Press OK and conf irm with t he securit y code.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 87 Menu functions Edi tin g or del eti ng deta ils Search for t he contact you want to e dit or delete and press Details . Scroll to the name, nu mbe r, text item or image you wa nt to edit or delete and press Options . ⢠To edit a name, number or t ext item or t o change image , select Edit name , Edit number , Edit detail or Change image , respec tively. Note that you cannot edit or delete an ID when it is on the IM contacts or in the Subscribed names list. ⢠To delete a numbe r or text item, select D elete number or Delet e detail , respectiv ely. ⢠To delete an ima ge attached t o the c ontact, select Delete image . Deleting an image from contacts does not delete it from Gallery . My presence With the pres ence servic e (network s ervice) you c an share your presence s tatus with ot her users, for example your family, friends and colleagues with compatible dev ices and ac cess to t he servic e. Presence status includes your av ailability, status message and pe rsonal logo. Other us ers who have access to the service a nd who a re requesting y our information are able to s ee your status. The requested information is shown in Subscr ibed names in the v iewers Contacts menu. You can personalize the inf ormation tha t you want to share with ot hers and cont rol who can s ee your status. Before you c an use presence, y ou need to subscribe t o the ser vice. To check the ava ilability, c harging and to subscribe to the service, cont act your network operator or service provider, from whom you also receive your unique ID and pas sword and t he settings f or the service. T o set the required settings for the presence service, see IM and presence setting s o n page 109. W hile you have connected to the
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 88 Menu functions presence service, you c an use the other functions of the phone, and the presence servic e is active in the background. Press Menu and select Contacts and My pres ence . Select ⢠Connect to 'My presence' ser vice (or D isconnect ) to connect to (or to dis connec t from) the serv ice. ⢠My current presence to change your presence status. Select ⢠View current presenc e and select Private pres. or Public presence to view your current pr ivate or public status. ⢠My availability to set your availability status to A vai lable indicated by , o r to Bus y indic ated by , or to Not available indicated by . ⢠My presence message and key in the text to be shown t o other per sons or press Options and sele ct Previous ms gs. and select an old message as the s tatus mes sage. ⢠My presence logo to s elect your personal logo fr om the Graphics folder in the gallery. If you sele ct the Def ault , the logo is not published. ⢠Show to to select the groups to whom y ou want to s how your presence status or if not to show them . Select Pr ivate and public and contact s in your privat e list are able to se e all your pr esence information: availabilit y, status mes sage and logo. O ther contacts ca n see only your availability . Select Pr ivate viewers and the contacts in your private list can see all y our presence information (availability, st atus message and logo). Other users will not see any infor mation. If you select No one , no one can see y our presenc e information. ⢠Viewers and select ⢠Current view ers to v iew all the persons who have subscribed t o your presence information
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 89 Menu functions ⢠Private list is a list of the per sons who ar e allowed to v iew all your presence information, including availability, status messag e and logo. You c an manage your own private list. Other persons who a re not in the pr ivate list, can see only your ava ilability. ⢠Blocked list to v iew all the persons you have blocked from viewing your pr esence infor mation. ⢠Settings and selec t ⢠Show current presence in idle to show t he current status indicator in standby mode. ⢠Synchronise with pro files to select w hether you want to upda te your My presence message and My availability manually or automatically by linking them to t he currently active profile. Refer also to Profiles on page 96. Note that you cannot link a personalized st atus logo to a Profile. ⢠Connection type to select if the phone connects automat ically to the service whe n the phone is switched on. ⢠Connect. settings , see IM and pr esence settings on page 109. Subs cribe d n ame s You can creat e a list of contacts whos e presence s tatus information you want to be aware of. You can view the information if the contacts allow you to view it and if it is not prevent ed by t he contact or network. You can view thes e subscribed names either by scrolling thr ough the contact s or via the Subscribed names menu. Make sur e that the memor y in use is either Phone or Phone and SIM . See Selecting settings for contacts on page 83 . To connect to the Pr esence ser vice, pres s Menu and select Contacts , M y presence and Connect to 'M y presence' s ervice . You can view the subs cribed names e ven when you are not connected to the presence service but you can not see t he presence s tatus information about the contact .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 90 Menu functions Addin g contacts t o the sub scri bed names 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Subscribed names . If you have not connected to t he Presence service, the p hone asks if you w ant to connect now. 2. If you have no contacts on your list, press Ad d . Otherwis e, press Opti ons and select Subscribe new . The list of your contacts is s hown. 3. Select a contact from the lis t and if the cont act ha s an user ID s aved, the cont act is adde d to the subscribed name s list. If th ere are more than one ID, s elect one of them. After subscription to the contact, Subscr iption activated is shown. Tip : To subscribe to a contact from Contacts list, pres s in standby mode and scrol l to the contact you want to subscribe to. Press Details and press Opt ions . To subscribe, s elect Re q ue st presence and select A s subscr iption . If you only want t o view th e presence infor mation but not t o subscribe t o a contact , select Request presenc e and O ne ti me on ly . Viewi ng the su bscribed nam es Refer also to Searching for a contact on page 85 to vie w the pres ence information. 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Subscribed names . The status infor mation of the f irst contact on the subs cribed names lis t is displayed. T he information that the person wants to give to the others may include text and some of the following icons: , or indicate that the person is either available, discreet or not available. indicates t hat the per sonâÂÂs presence info rmation is not available.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 91 Menu functions 2. Press D etails to view the det ails of t he selected contact, or press Opti ons and select ⢠Subscribe new to add a new contact to the lis t of subscr ibed names. ⢠Chat to start a n instant messs ages convers ation. ⢠Send message to send a t ext message or a multimedia message to the selected contact. ⢠Send SMS e-mail to send a n e-ma il to th e sele c te d contac t. ⢠Send bus. card to s end a busines s card fr om the select ed contact. ⢠Unsubscribe to remove the selected cont act fr om the list of subscribed names . Unsu bscr ibing a contact ⢠To unsubscribe a contact from the Contacts list, press in standby mode and scroll to the contact you want t o unsubscribe. Press Details and select the ID and press Options . To unsubscribe, select Unsubscribe and press OK t o confirm. ⢠To unsubscribe via the Subscribed names menu, s ee Viewing t he subscribed names on page 90. Copy ing c onta cts You can copy names and phone numbers from the phoneâÂÂs memory t o your SIM cardâÂÂs memor y and vice versa. No te that any t ext items saved in the phone âÂÂs internal memory, such as e-mail addres ses, will not be co pied to the SIM c ard. 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Copy . 2. Select t he copying direc tion, Fr om phone to SIM card or F rom SI M card t o phone . 3. Select One by one , All or De fault numbers . ⢠If you select One by one , scroll to the na me you want to copy and press Copy .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 92 Menu functions Default numbers is shown if you copy from the phone to the SIM card. Only the default numbers will be copied. 4. To choose whet her you want to keep or delete the original names and numbers, se lect Keep original or Move original . ⢠If you select All or Default numbers , p re ss OK when Copy contacts? or Mo ve contacts? is displayed. Send ing and rece ivi ng a bu sine ss ca rd You can send and receive a personâÂÂs contact information f rom a compatible device that supports the vCard standard a s a business card. When you have rec eived a business card, pr ess Show and Save to save the busines s card in the phoneâÂÂs memory. To dis card the bus iness ca rd, press Exit and then OK . To send a business car d, search for the name and phone number you want to s end from contacts, pres s Details and Options and select Send bus. card . ⢠To send the bu siness card v ia IR , sele ct Via infrared . Refer to Infrared on page 103. ⢠To send the business card as a text mes sage if it is supported by the networ k, select Via text message . ⢠To send the business card as a multimedia message if it is supported by the network, select Via multimedia . ⢠To send the business card via Bluetooth wirele ss technology, select Via Bluet ooth .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 93 Menu functions Spe ed dia ls To assign a number to a spe ed-dialling key, press Menu and select Co nta ct s and Speed dials and scroll to the speed-dialling key number t hat you want. Press As sign , or if a numbe r has already been assigned t o the key, press Options and select Change . Press Search , and select first the name and then t he number you want to a ssign. If the Speed dialling function is off, t he phone asks whether you want t o activate it. See also Speed dialling in Call s ettings on page 106. To make a call using the speed-dialling k eys, see Spee d dialling a phone numbe r on page 35. Voice dia lling You can make a phone call by saying a voice tag th at has been added to a phone number. Any spoken word(s), such a s a personâÂÂs name (s), can be a voic e tag. You can add up t o 25 voice tags. Before using voice dia lling, note that: ⢠Voic e tags are not lan guage dep enden t. The y are d epende nt o n the speak er's v oice . ⢠Voice ta gs are sensitive to backgro und noise. Reco rd them and make calls in a quiet enviro nment. ⢠When reco rding a voice tag or ma king a call by sa ying a vo ice tag, hold the phone in the normal position ne ar to your ear. ⢠Very sho rt names are not accepted. U se long names a nd avoid simila r names for d ifferent numb ers. Note : You must say the name ex actly as you said i t when you recorded it. This may be difficult in, for example, a noisy envi ronment or durin g an emergency, so you should not rely solel y u pon voice dialling in all circu mst ances .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 94 Menu functions Addin g and managing vo ice tag s Save or copy in the phoneâÂÂs memory the contacts, to which you want to a dd a voice tag. You ca n also add voice tags to the names in the SIM card, but if you replace your SIM ca rd with a new one, you f irst need to de lete the old v oice tags befor e you can add new ones. Voice tags us e shared memor y, see Shared memory on page 19. 1. In standby mode, press . 2. Scroll t o the contac t to which y ou want to add a voice t ag and press Details . Scroll to the phone number you want and pr ess Options . 3. Select Add voice tag . 4. Press Start , and say clearly t he word(s) you want to record as a v oice tag. After recording, the phone plays the r ecorded tag. When the voice tag has been succ essfully s aved, Voice tag saved is displayed, a beep sounds and a symbol appears after t he phone number wit h a voice tag. To check the voice tags, press Menu and select Contacts and V oice tags . Scroll to the contact wit h the voice tag t hat you wa nt, and selec t an option t o listen to, delet e or change t he recorded voice tag. Ma kin g a c all by us ing a voic e ta g If the phone has an application us ing the GPRS connec tion sending or re ceiving data, f irst end the application to mak e a call by using voic e dialling. 1. In standby mode, press and hold the volume down key. A short t one is heard and Spe ak now is displayed. 2. Say the voice tag clearly. The phone plays the recognised voice tag and t hen dials the phone number of the voic e tag aft er 1.5 seconds.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 95 Menu functions If you are using a c ompatible heads et with the headset k ey, press and hold the heads et key to start the voice dialling. Info numb ers and service numbers Your service provider may hav e included information numbers or service numbers in your SIM card. Press Menu and select Contacts and Info numbers or Service numbers . Scroll through a cat egory to an information number, or t o a service number, and pr ess to call the number. My numbers The phone numbers assigned to your SIM card are s aved in My numbe rs if this is allowed by the card. To view the numbers press Menu and select Contacts an d My numbers . Scroll to the de sired name or number, and press View . Call er grou ps You can arrange the names and phone numbers sav ed in Contacts into caller groups . For each c aller group, you can s et the phone to sound a specific ringing t one and show a selected graphic on the display when you receive a call from a phone number in the group, s ee below. To set the phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers belonging to a select ed caller gr oup, see Alert for in Tone settings on page 97. Press Menu and select Contacts and Caller groups and select th e desired ca ller group. Sele ct ⢠Group name , key in a new na me for the calle r group and pr ess OK. ⢠Group ringing t one and select the ringing tone for the group. Default is the r inging tone selected for the currently active profile.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 96 Menu functions ⢠Group logo and select On to set the phone t o display the group logo, Off not to display it, or View to view the logo. ⢠Group members to add a name to the caller group. If the re are no na mes in the group, pr ess Add , or otherwise, press Options and se lect Add contact . Scroll to the name you want t o add to the group and press Add . To remove a name from a c aller group, scr oll to the na me you want to remove, and press Options and select Remove contact . â Sett ings Prof il es Your phone has va rious setting groups , profiles, for which you can customise the phone tones for different events and environments. Initially , personalise the profiles to your own liking and then yo u only need to ac tivate a pr ofile to use it . Available prof iles are G eneral , Si lent , Meeting , Outdoor , and Pager . Press Menu , and select Settings and Profiles . Scr oll to a profile and press Select . ⢠To activate the select ed profile, select Ac tiv ate . ⢠To set the pr ofile to be active until a certain t ime up to 24 hours, select Timed and set the time the profile setting shall end. When th e time set for t he profile expires , the previous profile that was not timed, becomes active. ⢠To personalise t he profile, s elect Personalise . Select the se tting you want to change and make t he changes. The s ame settings can also be change d in the Tone settings menu, see Tone settings on page 97. To rename a prof ile, Profile name . The General profile ca nnot be renamed.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 97 Menu functions To change y our presence stat us information, s elect My presence . This menu is available if you have set Synchronise with profiles to On , se e My presence on page 87. Select My availa bility to cha nge your availabilit y status and My pr esence mess age to edit y our status messa ge. Tip : To change t he profile quick ly in standby mode, press t he power key , scroll to the pr ofile you want t o activate and pres s Select . Tone setting s Press Menu , and select Settings and then Tone settings . You can find th e same settings in th e Profiles menu, see Profiles on page 96. Note that the settings you mak e will change the sett ings in the act ive profile. Select Inc oming call alert t o choose how the phone no tifies you of an incoming voice call. The options are Ringing , A scending , Ring once , Bee p on ce and Off . Select Ringing t one for incoming voic e cal ls. To select r inging tones fro m Gal l ery , select O pen gallery from the r inging tone list. Tip: If yo u receive a ringing t one via inf rared co nnection or via Bluetooth wirele ss technology or by downloading, you can save the ringing tone in the Galler y . Select Ringing v olume and Vibrating alert for incoming voice calls and messages. The vibrating alert does not wor k when the phone is connect ed to a charger, a desktop stand, or a car k it. Select Message alert tone to set the aler t tone f or the incoming messages or Instant message alert tone to set the aler t tone for inst ant messages m essages. Select K eypad tones , or Warning tones to s et the phone to sound t ones, for example, when the battery is runni ng out of power. Select Alert for to set t he phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbe rs that belong to a select ed caller group. Scroll to the c aller group you want or All calls and press Ma rk .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 98 Menu functions Display setting s Press Menu , and select Settings and Display se ttings . ⢠Select Wallpaper t o set your phone to displa y a backgr ound image, know n as wallpape r, when the phone is in st andby mode. Some images are pr esaved in the Gallery menu. You can also receive images, for example , via multimedia message s, or tr ansfer them with PC Suite f rom your PC and then save them in Gallery . Your phone supports JPEG , GIF, WBMP, BMP and P NG formats but not necessarily all variations of these f ile formats. To select the wallpaper, select Select wallpaper and open an image folder. Scroll t o the image y ou want to set as wallpaper, pr ess Options and select Set as wallpaper . To activa te/deactivat e the w allpaper, select On / Off , res pectively . Note that t he wallpaper is not displayed whe n the phone a ctivates the screen sav er. ⢠Select Colour schemes to change the colour in some display components, f or example indicat ors and signal and battery bars. ⢠Select Menu v iew to s et the way the phone displays the main menu. Select Lis t for th e menu list view and Grid for the menu gr id view. ⢠Select O perator logo to set your phone t o display or hide the ope rator logo. If you have not s aved the operator logo, the Operator logo menu is dimmed. The operator logo is not displayed whe n the phone activates t he screen saver. For more infor mation on availabilit y of an oper ator logo, c ontact your net work operator or service provider. See als o PC Suite on page 156. ⢠Select Sc reen saver to set your phone t o display a screen s aver when t he phone is in standby mode and none of the phoneâÂÂs funct ions has been use d for a ce rtain time. Select On to switc h the sc reen save r on or Of f to switch it off.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 99 Menu functions Select in Time-out after whic h time the s creen saver will be activated. In Other you can set the length of the t imeout from 5 se conds to 10 minutes (minutes:seconds). Wit h Sel ect s. saver you can choose an animat ion or a still image as screen saver from G allery . Press any ke y to deactivate t he scr een sa ver. The sc reen saver is also deact ivated whe n the phone is out of the network co verage area. Independent of th e screen saver settings, fo r power saving a digital clock view will be act ivated when for a certain time no f unction of th e phone has been used. See Po wer saving on page 29. Note that t he screen s aver over rides all the gr aphics and text s on the dis play in standby mode. Tim e and da te set tings Press Menu , and select Settings and Time and date s ettings . ⢠Select Cloc k and Show clock (or H ide clock ) to show (or hide) the time on the top right of the display in standby mode. Select Set the tim e to a djust th e cl ock to the corr ect ti me, Time zone to set the time zone, and T ime format to select the 12-hour or 24-hour time format. The clock serves the functions Messages , Call register , Alarm clock , timed Prof iles , C ale ndar , No tes and Scree n save r , for example. If the battery is removed fr om the phone or if the battery is flat, you may need to set the time again. ⢠Select Da t e and Show date (or Hide date ) and the date is shown (or hidden) on the display when the phone is in standby mode. Select Set the date t o adjust the date. You ca n also select the date fo rmat and date separat or. ⢠Select Aut o-update of date & time (network se rvice) and On to set the phone to aut omatica lly update the time and date acc ording to the current time zone. To set t he phone to ask for a confirmation before the update, select Confirm first .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 100 Menu functions The automatic update of t he date and ti me does not change the t ime that you ha ve set f or the alarm clock, c alendar or t he alarm note s. They are in local t ime. Updating may cause some a larms that y ou h ave se t to e xpi re . For information on availability, c ontact your net work operator or service p rovider. Pe rson al shortc uts With personal s hortcuts you get quic k acces s to often used f unctions of the phone. Right sele ction k ey You can set one phone function fr om a predefined list to the right selection k ey. Refer also to Standby mode on page 28. This menu is not shown in some op erator v ariants. Press Me nu , and s elect Settings , P ersonal shor tcuts and Right selecti on key . Select a function f rom the list. The name of the r ight selection key changes in standby mode acc ording to the function. Voice commands You can have phone functions w hich can be activated by saying a v oice tag. Up to 16 functions can be selected t o add a voic e tag. Press Menu , and select Settings , Pe rsonal shortcuts and V oice commands . Select the function folder you want, scroll t o the function to which y ou want to add a voice tag and pr ess Ad d . If the function already has a voice t ag, the indicat or is shown. To add a v oice command, refer t o Adding and managing v oice tags on p age 94. To activate a v oice command, refer to Mak i ng a c all by using a voic e tag on page 94. During a call or when an application using the (E)G PRS connection is sending or receiving data, you cannot activate or add a voice command.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 101 Menu functions Connectivity You can connect the phone t o a compatible dev ice vi a infrared or Bluet ooth connection. You can also define the set tings for (E)GPRS dial-up c onnections. Blue tooth wi reless t echnology The phone s upports Bluetooth wireless technology which a llows you t o connect the phone to a compatible Bluetooth devic e within 10 meters. The Bluet ooth connection c an be subjec t to interference from obstructions s uch as wal ls or other el ectronic devic es. The phone supports also the Bluetooth SIM acc ess profile. This Bluetooth profile allows you to connec t to compatible de vices, lik e the Nokia 610 car k it phone via the Bluetooth connect ion. When the SIM access pr ofile is act ive, Remote SIM mode is shown on the phone display to indic ate that the phone is disconnected from t he GSM network, and thus, all phone functions ar e deactivated. For compatibility between yo ur phone and a nother device with Bluetooth tec hnology, consult t he deviceâÂÂs documentatio n and y our Nokia dealer. In s ome countries, there may be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with y our local au thorities. Note : Using Blueto oth wire less techno logy consumes the batte ry and the phone' s opera ting time w ill be reduced. Be careful not to let it run in the background when performing other operations with your p hone. Setting up a Bluetooth c onnection 1. Press Menu , and select Settings , Connect ivity and Bluetoot h . 2. To activate t he Bluetooth function, select Bluetooth and On . The active Bluetooth c onnection is indicated by at the top of th e display. If you do not use the Bluetooth f eature for some time, y ou can deactivat e it to s ave power.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 102 Menu functions 3. Select Search for audio enhancements to search for compatible Bluetoot h audio devices and select the devic e that you w ant to connect t o the phone or select P air ed devices t o search for any Bluetooth dev ice in range and press New to list any Bluetooth device in range. Scro ll to a device and press Pa i r . 4. Enter the Bluetooth passcode of the device to associat e (âÂÂpairâÂÂ) and connect t he device to y our phone and star t using the d evice. You only need to give t his passcode when you connec t to the device f or the f irst time. Blue tooth co nnecti on Press Menu , and select Settings , Connectivit y and Bluetooth . Select ⢠A ct ive de vice to check which Bluetooth connection is cur r ently active. If you want to close the connection to t he selec ted device, pr ess Disconnect . ⢠P air ed devices to view a lis t of Bluetoo th devices t hat are c urrently paired with the phone. Scroll to the desired device. If y ou want to dele te the pairing to the dev ice, press De lete . Press Connect to connec t to the selected devic e or pres s Options to access some of th e following functions depending on the status of the dev ice and the Bluetooth connection. Se lect ⢠Ass ign short name t o give a nic kname (visible to you only) t o the select ed device ⢠Auto-conn. without conf irmation and select Ye s if you want t he phone connect to the s elected device aut omatically, or select No if you want the phone to ask for your per mission first. Blue tooth se ttings Press Menu , and select Settings , Connectivit y , Bluetooth . and Bluetooth settings t o define how your phone is shown t o other Bluetooth de vices. Select
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 103 Menu functions ⢠My phone's visibility and Shown to all t o show the phone to all other Bluet ooth devices or Hidd en to show the phone only to t he paired devices . The ph one is not visible to other devices when already connected to one device. ⢠My phone's name to c hange your phoneâÂÂs Bluetooth dev ice name th at can be s een by othe r Bluetooth device users. Infr are d You can set up the phone to receive da ta through it s infrared (IR) port. To us e an IR connect ion, the device w ith which y ou want to establish a connec tion must be IrDA compliant. You can send or receive data such as business cards, graphics, images , sound clips, videos and c alendar notes to or from a compatible phone or data device (f or example, a computer) via the IR port of your phone. Do not point th e IR (infrared ) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfe re with other IR devices . This device i s a Class 1 Lase r pr oduc t. Sending and receivi ng data via IR ⢠Ensure that th e IR ports of the sending and rece iving devices are pointing a t each other and that there are no obstructions between t he devices. The preferable distance between the two devices in an infrared connec tion is one met re at most. ⢠To activate t he IR port of your phone to receive dat a via IR, pres s Menu , and s elect Setti ngs , Conn ectivi ty and Infrared . ⢠The user of t he sending phone se lects the desired IR function to start data transfer. If data transf er is not star ted within two minut es after the activation of the IR port , the connect ion is cancelled and has to be star ted again.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 104 Menu functions IR connection indic ator ⢠When is shown continuously, the IR connection is activate d and your phone is ready to send or receive dat a via its IR port . ⢠When blinks, y our phone is trying to connec t to the other device or a connection has been lost. (E)G PR S GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) is a network service that a llows mobile phones to be used for sending and rece iving data over an Internet Protoc ol (IP) -based network. GPRS is a dat a bearer that enables wireless access to data networks such as the Int ernet. EGPRS (Enhanced GPRS) is s imilar to GPRS but enables faster connections. For mor e information on availability of (E)GPRS and data t ransfer speed, contact your network ope rator or service provider. The applications that may use (E)GP RS are MMS, vide o streaming, browsing sessions, e-mail, r emote SyncML, Java appli cation downloading and the PC dia l-up (for example, Int ernet and e- mail). Before you can use (E)GPRS technology: ⢠Contact your net work operator or service provider for availabilit y and s ubscription to t he (E)GPRS servi ce . ⢠Save the (E)GPRS settings for eac h of the applic ations used over (E)GPRS. For information on pricing, conta ct your network operator or s ervice pr ovider. Note that when you have selected GPRS as a data bearer, t he phone uses EGPRS instead of GPRS if this is available in the network. You cannot sele ct be tween EGPRS and GPRS but for some applications you may be able t o select either GPRS or G SM data (CSD, Circuit Swit ched Data).
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 105 Menu functions (E)G PR S c onne ct ion Press Menu , and select Settings , Connectivit y , GPRS and GPRS connection . ⢠Select Alway s online to set the phone to aut omatically reg ister to a (E)GPRS net work when you switch the phone on. When the (E)GPRS service is available, the i ndicator is shown on the top left of the dis play. When you sta rt an application us ing (E)GPRS, the conne ction between phone and network is established, the i ndicator is shown and da ta transfe r is possible. W hen you end the a pplication, the (E)GPRS connection is ended but t he registration to the (E)G PRS network remains. If you receive a call or a text message, or make a call dur ing a (E)GPRS connection, the indicator will be show n on the top right of the display to indicat e that the (E)GPRS connection is s uspended (on hold). Note that GPRS and EGPRS are not indicat ed separately, t he indicators for GPRS and EGPRS are the same. ⢠Select W hen needed and the (E)GPRS registration and connect ion are establis hed when an application using (E)G PRS needs it and c losed when y ou end the applicat ion. Note that your phone supports three simultaneous (E)GPRS connections. For exa mple, yo u can at the same time browse xHTML pa ges, receive multime dia messages a nd have an ongoing PC dial-up connection. (E) GPRS modem setti ngs You can connect the phone v ia Bluetooth wireless technology, inf rared or a data cable conne ction to a compatible PC and use the phone as a modem to enable (E)GPRS connec tivity from the PC. To define the se ttings for (E)GPRS conne ctions from your P C, press Menu , and select Settings , Connectivity , GPRS and GPRS modem settings .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 106 Menu functions ⢠Select Active access point and activate the access point you w ant to use. ⢠Select Ed it activ e access point to change the access point settings. ⢠Select Alias for access point . Ke y in the name you would like for t he activ ated access point and press OK . ⢠Select G PRS access point . Key in the Access Point Name (APN) to e stablish a connection to a (E)GPRS network and pres s OK . Contact your network operator or s ervice pr ovider for t he APN. You can also set the (E)GPRS dial- up service settings (Acce ss Point Name ) on your PC using the Nokia Modem Options software, see PC Suite on page 156. If you have set the se ttings both on your PC and on your phone, not e that the PCâÂÂs settings will be used. Call setti ngs Press Menu , and select Settings and Call settings . Se lect ⢠Call divert (networ k service). With c all divert, y ou can dir ect your inco ming calls to anot her number, for example, to your voice mailbox number. For details, contact your service provider. Divert options not supported by your SIM card or your networ k operator may not be shown. Select the divert option you want, for example, select Divert if busy to diver t voice calls when your number is busy or when you rejec t an incoming call. To set th e divert set ting to on, s elect Activ ate and t hen select th e timeout aft er which the call is diverted, if t his is available for the divert opt ion. To set the divert setting to off , select Ca nc el , or sele ct Check s tatus , if this is available for the diver t option, to check whether call divert is activated or not. Several divert options may be act ive at the same time. To see the divert indicators in standby mode, see Standby mode on page 28 .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 107 Menu functions ⢠Anykey answer and On and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pr essing any k ey, except , selection keys and , and . ⢠Automatic redial and On and your phone will make a maxi mum of ten atte mpts to connect the call after an unsuc cessful call attempt. ⢠Speed dialling and On and the names and phone numbers assigned t o the speed-dialling keys, from to , can be dialled by pressing and holding the co rresponding number ke y. ⢠Call waiting and Ac ti va te and t he network will notify you of an incoming call while you have a c all in progress (networ k service). See Call waiting on page 36. ⢠Summary after call and On and the phone will brief ly display the duration and cos t (network service) of th e call after each call. ⢠Send my caller ID and Ye s and your phone number will be displayed to the person you are c alling (network se rvice). Se lect Set by network and the setting agreed upon with your service provider is used. ⢠Line for outgoing calls which is a net work service , to select the phone line 1 or 2, that is, t he subscriber number, f or making calls . For example, you can have a private and a business line. F or more information on availa bility, contact yo ur network oper ator or se rvice provider. If you select Line 2 and have not subs cribed to this network serv ice, you will not be abl e to make calls. Howeve r, calls on both lines c an be answered regardless of t he selected line. If supported by your SIM card, you can prevent the line selection by selecting t he option Loc k . Tip : In standby mode, you can s witch from one line t o the other by pressing and holding .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 108 Menu functions Phon e set tin gs Press Menu , and select Settings , Phone set tings . ⢠Select Phone language to s et the display language of your phone. If you s elect Automatic the phone selects the la nguage accor ding to the infor mation on the SIM ca rd. ⢠Select Memor y status and selec t one of th e following items: ⢠Phone to view t he free me mory or th e used memory of your phone. ⢠Memory card to view the free memory, the us ed memory and the total si ze of your memor y card. You may also find the memory i nformation in t he menu of s ome of those functions, for ex ample, in gallery folder v iew. ⢠Select Aut omatic keyguard to set the k eypad of your phone to l ock automatically after a pre-set time delay when the phone is in standby mode and no funct ion of the phone has been used. Select On and you can set t he time from 5 seconds to 60 minut es. Refer also to Keypad lock (Key guard) on page 32. ⢠Select Se curi ty keyguard , enter the security code and select On to s et the phone to a sk for the security code when you unlock the keyguard. Refer also to Keypad lock (Key guard) on page 32. Note : Whe n Keygua rd is on, ca lls ma y be po ssib le to the eme rgency num ber pro gramme d in to your phone (e .g. 112, 911 or ot her officia l emerge ncy nu mber). Key i n the em ergency number and press . The number is disp layed only a fter you have keyed in its last digit. ⢠Select Cell info display and On to receive information from t h e network operator depending on the network cell use d (network s ervice).
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 109 Menu functions ⢠Select We lco m e no te and key in the note you would like to be shown brie fly when the phone is switched on. T o save th e note, press Save . ⢠Select O perator selec tion and Automatic and the phone automatica lly selects one of the cellular networks available in your area. If you select Manual , you can se lect a netw ork that has a roaming agreeme nt with your home network operator. If No n etwo rk acce ss is displayed, y ou must select a nother network. The phone stays in ma nual mode until the automatic mode is selected or another SIM car d is inserted into t he phone. ⢠Select Conf irm SIM service actions . See SIM services on page 155. ⢠Select H elp text act ivation to s et the phone t o show or not to sh ow the help texts. See a lso Usi ng the menu on page 42. ⢠Select St art-up tone to se t the phone t o play or not to play a s tart-up tone when the phone is switched on. IM and pr esen ce se tti ngs For the s ettings required for IM and presence, contact your network oper ator or servic e provider. To receive t he IM and presence settings as c onfiguration message, s ee Configuration sett ings service on page 33. Keying in the sett ings manually 1. Press Menu , and select Settings , IM and my pr esence settings and Current IM and presence settings . 2. Scroll t o the set you would like to activat e and press Activat e . You n eed to activ ate the conne ctio n set where you wa nt to sav e the sett ings. A connec tion set is a collection of settings required to make a connection to the ins tant messages and presence services.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 110 Menu functions 3. Select Edit current IM and presence settings . Select e ach of the set tings one by one and k ey in all t he required set tings according to the information you have receive d from your net work operator or service provider. N ote that the connection set tings are in the Connection settings menu. Enha nceme nt s ett ings The enhancement s ettings menu is s hown only if t he phone is or has been conne cted to a c ompatible mobile enhancement , chargers and handsfree units, for example. Press Menu , and select Settings and Enhancement sett ings . You can select an enhancement menu if the corresponding enhancement is or has been connec ted to the phone. Dependi ng on the enhancement, you c an select s ome of the f ollowing options: ⢠Default profile to s elect the prof ile that you want to be a utomatically activa ted when you connec t to the sel ected enhancement. You c an select an other profile while the enhancement is connected. ⢠Automatic answer t o set the phone to answer an incoming call aut omatically after five s econds. If the Incoming call alert is set to Beep once or Off , automatic ans wer will not be in use. ⢠Lights to set the lights permanently On . Select Automatic to s et the lights on for 15 seconds after a keypress. ⢠When the phone is connect ed to the fu ll car kit , select Ignition det ector and On to automatically switch off the phone approximately 20 seconds after you have switched off the carâÂÂs ignit ion. â¢F o r T ext phone , select Use t ext ph one and select Ye s to use t he text phone settings ins tead of headset or loopset settings. If your text phone supports baudot and CTM sending, s elect baudot. Always use the original cabl es supplied with t he text phone.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 111 Menu functions Secu rit y sett ing s Note : Whe n secu rity featur es that re stri ct cal ls ar e in us e (c all ba rring, c los ed use r grou p an d fixe d dialling) , calls may b e possible to certain e merge ncy numb ers in s ome net works (e.g. 112, 911 o r othe r official emerg ency numbers). Press Menu , and select Settings and Security settings . Select ⢠PIN code request to s et the phone to ask for your PIN code ever y time the phone is s witched on. Some SIM cards do not allow the PIN code request to be turned of f. ⢠Call barring service (network service) to res trict incoming cal ls to and outgoing calls f rom your phone. A barring pa ssword is required. ⢠Fixed dialling to restrict your outgoing c alls and text mes sages to s elected phone number s if this function is supported by your SIM card. The PIN2 code is required. When the fixed dia lling is on, (E)G PRS connections are not possible exc ept while sending text messages over a (E)GPRS connect ion. In this ca se, the recipientâÂÂs phone number and t he message centre number hav e to be included on the f ixed dialling list. ⢠Closed user group . Closed use r group is a network service that spec ifies the group of people whom you can call and who can call you. For more informat ion contact your network operat or or service provider. ⢠Security lev el . Select Phone and the phone will as k for t he security code whenever a new SIM card is inserted into the phone . Select Memory and the phone will as k for the security code when the SIM cardâÂÂs memory is selected and you want to change the memory in use (see Select ing settings for contact s on page 83) or copy from one memory t o another (Copying contacts on page 91). ⢠Access codes to change the security code, PIN code, PIN 2 code or bar ring password. Codes can only include numbers fr om 0 to 9.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 112 Menu functions Restore factory settings To reset some of the menu settings to their original values , press Menu , and select Settings and Restore fact ory sett ings . Key in the security code and press OK . Note that the data you have keyed in or downloaded, for example, the names and phone number s saved in c ontacts are not de leted. â Operato r menu This menu lets you acces s a portal t o services pr ovided by y our network operat or. The name and the icon depends on the ope rator. For more information contact your network o perator. If this menu is not shown the following menu numbers changes accordingly. The operator can update this menu w ith a s ervice mes sage. For more informat ion refer to Se rvice inbox on page 151. â Galler y In this menu you c an manage gra phics, images, r ecordings and tones that you have saved, for exa mple, from mult imedia messages. These files are arranged in folders. Note : Yo ur phone m ust b e sw itched on to us e this function. D o not swit ch the p hone on whe n wi reless phone use is pro hibit ed or w hen it may ca use interfe rence o r dang er. Your phone supports a D igital Rights Management (DRM) system to protect ac quired content. A piec e of content, f or example r inging tone, can be protected and associated with cert ain usage rules , for example number of usage times and a cer tain usage period. The rules are defined in t he contentâÂÂs activation key which can be deliv ered either togeth er with the content or indepe ndently depending on the servi ce provider. You may be a ble to update th ese activa tion keys . Always check the delive ry terms of any conte nt and activat ion key be fore acquir ing them, as t hey may b e subject to a fee.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 113 Menu functions The files stored in G allery use a memory that has a capacit y of approx . 8 MByte in the phone . If your phone displays a message that the memory is full, delet e some of the files in Gallery before continuing. A compatible multimedia card can be used to exten t the memor y capacity to s tore images, ringing tones, video c lips and sound clips in gallery. Plea se no te that it is not pos sible to stor e Java games and applications on t he multimedia card. 1. Press Menu and select Gallery . A list of folders is show n. Images , Video clips , Music files , Graphics , Tones and Recordings are the original folder s on the phone. If a multimedia card is inse rted in the phone, a multi media card icon is shown. 2. Scroll t o the desired f older and pre ss Ope n to view a list of f iles in the f older or pres s Options and one of the opt ions may be av ailable: ⢠Add f ol der , Delet e folder , Move , Rename folder , Details , Sort , Type of view , Memory s tatus , Activation key list and Downloads . You cannot delete, rename or mov e the original f olders on the phone. With a multimedia car d additiona l options may be available: Set pas sword (to protect the multimedia card against unauthorised use wit h other devices), Change password , Delete password , Rename me m. card an d Format mem. card . When a multimedia card password (1 to 8 digit s) is set the card is als o locked. The phone has a list with up to five pas swords. If the pa ssword is known to the phone the multimedia can be accessed wit hout entering the password. If the password is not on the list a locked multimedia card appears loc ked. If a multimedia c ard password is deleted the card is als o unlocked. Warning: Formatting your multimedia car d will delet e all files and folders stored on it.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 114 Menu functions ⢠Do wnloads to download more images, tones a nd videos. Se lect Graphic downloads , Tone downloads or Video downloads . The list of available brows er bookmarks is shown. Sele ct More bookmarks t o access t he list of bookmar ks in the Web menu, see Bookmarks on page 150. Select the a ppropriate bookmar k to connect to the des ired site. If the connect ion fails, y ou may not be able to access t he page f rom the servic e whose connect ion settings ar e currently ac tive. In this c ase , enter th e Web menu and activate another set of s ervice settings, see Making a connection to a service on page 146. Try again to connec t to the site. For availabilit y of differ ent services, pr icing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the service provider. Download content only fr om the sources you trust. 3. If you hav e opened a folder , select the file you want to view and press Open . Or: Pre ss Options and use one of the following functions that may be ava ilable for t he selected file: ⢠De lete , Send , Edit image , Mov e , Rename , Set as wallpaper , Set as ring tone , D etails , Type of view , Sort , Del ete all , Open in sequence , Play , Zoom , Mute audio ( U nmute audio ), Se t contrast , A dd fol d er , Memory status . ⢠Send to send the s elected file via multime dia (MMS), infrared connect ion, or Bluetooth wireless technology. ⢠Delete all to dele te all the f iles and folders in the selected folder. ⢠Edit image to inser t text, a f rame or clip-art into the se lected picture or to cro p the image. ⢠Open in sequence to v iew the f iles in the folder one by one. ⢠Play to listen t o or to vie w a sound or i mage file that is contained in the mes sage. ⢠Zoom to increas e the size of the image that is c ontained in the mes sage. ⢠Mute audio ( Unmute audio ) to mute (unmute) the s ound file.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 115 Menu functions ⢠Set contrast to adjust the contrast level of the image. ⢠Activ ate c o nten t to update the ac tivation key of the selected file. The option is only shown if the activation ke y updating is supported by t he file. ⢠Act ivation key list t o view the lis t of all av ailable acti vation keys. You can delet e the activ ation keys, for example del ete the expir ed ones. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing t ones, and other c ontent from being copied, modified, t ransferred or forwarded. â Me dia Note : Your phone mus t b e switch ed on to use the f unctio ns in the Me dia menu. Do not switch the phon e on when wirel ess phon e use is prohib ited or when it may cau se interf erence or dang er. Camera Note : Obey all local la w s governin g the taki ng of picture s. Do not use this feature il legally. You can take phot os or record video clips wit h the phone âÂÂs built-in camera. The camera le ns is on the back of t he p hone, and the dis play of the phone work s as a viewfinder. The camera produces pict ures in JPEG format and t he video c lips in 3GP f ormat. If there is not enough memory t o take a n ew photo, you need to f ree some by deleting old phot os or other files in the gallery.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 116 Menu functions Taki ng a photo 1. Press Menu , and select Media , Camera and Standard photo , P ortrait photo o r if the light ing is dim for taking photos, s elect Night mode . If you want to add the photo to a name or phone number saved in contacts, s elect Portrait photo . Tip: To quick ly open t he camera viewf inder with standard photo view , pres s in standby mode. To quickly change the camera mode, for example vi deo, press or . 2. The live image appea rs on the display, and y ou can use the display as a viewfi nder. 3. To take a photo, press Capture . When taking a photo, a shutter sound is heard. The phone saves t he photo in the Images folder of t he Gallery menu if Default folder is selec ted. With O ther folder you can select another folder. See Camera settings on page 117 . To define the default title for the photo, see Default title in Camera se ttings on page 117. 4. Select Back to take another pho to, or press Options and select, for example, an option to delete or rename the saved photo, se nd it as a multimedia message, or attach the photo to a name or phone number in contac ts, or acces s the galler y. Tip: You can a ctivate t he self-timer of the came ra for one pict ure at a time. Pres s Menu , and sele ct Media , Camera , and Standard photo , Por trait photo or Night mode . Press Options and sele ct Self-timer . Press St art , and after the timeout, t he camera takes the photo and s aves it in the G allery menu. Wh ile the self-timer is running, a beeping sound is heard. Recor ding a vi deo cl ip 1. Press Menu , and select Media , Camera and Video . 2. To st art recording a vide o clip, pr ess Record . When you are rec ording a video clip, the indicator and the remaining recording time ar e shown on the top of t he display. To pause the r ecording, press Pa u s e and to r esume the r ecording, press Continue .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 117 Menu functions 3. To st op the recording, p ress Stop . The phone saves the recor ding in the Video clips folder of t he Gallery menu if Default folder is sele cted. With Other folder you can select another folder . See Camera settings on page 117. Press Options and select, for example, an option t o delete or rename the saved video clip, se nd it as a multimedia message, or access the gallery. Camera settings Press Menu , and select Me dia , Camera and Settings . Select ⢠Image quality to define how much the photo file will be compressed when saving t he image. Select High , Normal or Basic . High p rovides the best image qualit y but take s more memory. ⢠Video clip length to select the length of the vid eo clips t hat you record. The maximum le ngth of a video clip is approximately 4 minut es in duration, depending on conditions . Only video clip s that are of default lengt h or shor ter can be sent in a multimedia me ssage. ⢠Camera sounds to se t the shut ter so und and th e sel f-ti mer to ne to On or Off . ⢠Def ault ti tle to define the tit le that will be used when saving a photo or a vide o clip. If you select Automatic , the default title will be used, or if you select My tit le , you can k ey in or edit a new title . ⢠Image storage to de fine the folder that will be used to stor e the photos or videos. Se lect Default fol d er to use the default folder, or select Other folder to define t he folder by yourself.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 118 Menu functions Medi a playe r With the me dia player you c an view, play and download files , for exa mple images, a udio, video and animated images fr om different kinds of sources. Further the media player allows you to see compa tible streaming videos fr om a net work server. Streaming functionality is an operator dependent feature and requires network support. Check the availability of these servic es, pricing and tariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose service y ou wish t o use. Service pr oviders will also give y ou instructions on how to use t heir servi ce s. Press Menu , and select Me dia and Media player . Sel ect ⢠Open gallery to open the Ga llery . See G allery on page 112. ⢠Bookmarks to open the Bookmarks . Se e Bookmarks on page 150. ⢠Go to addr ess and key in the address of t he service and press OK . ⢠Media downloads to download mor e graphics, tones or videos t o your phone. D ownload content only from sources you trust. Sett ing up th e phone for a st reaming se rvice You may receive the s treaming settings as a configura tion message from t he network operator or service provider that off ers the service that you want to use. For more infor mation and for t he appropriate s ettings, contact t he netw ork operator or service provider that offers the s ervice that you want t o use. T o receive th e service settings as c onfiguration message, see Configuration settings service on page 33. You can also key in t he settings manually or add a nd edit the s ettings with PC Suite.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 119 Menu functions To key i n the settings manually: 1. Press Menu , and select Media , Media play er and Streaming sett. . 2. Select Active connection s ettings . 3. Scroll t o the connect ion set you would like to activate and press Ac tiv at e . You need to activate the connection s et where you want to save the service settings. A connec tion set is a collection of settings required to make a connection to a service. 4. Select Edit activ e connection settings . Select e ach of the set tings one by one and k ey in all t he required set tings according to the information you have receive d from your net work operator or service provider. Note that all t he bearer-relat ed settings ar e in the Bearer settings menu. Music player Your phone includes a music player for listening to music tracks, recordings or other MP3 or AAC sound files that you have transferred to the phone with t he Nokia Audio Manager applica tion. Music files stored in a folder in the phoneâÂÂs memory or in a folder of t he multimedia card, will automatically be detected and added to the default track list. You can listen to t he sound files via a c ompatible headset, such as HDS-3, or the phoneâ s loudspeaker. Press Menu , and select Me dia and Music player . To transfer mus ic tracks from a compatible PC and manage the music track s and track lis ts, see the instructions for t he Nokia Audio Manager application t hat is included with t he Nokia PC Suite softw are. You can make or answer a call while us ing the music player. During a call, the playback is paused.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 120 Menu functions Play ing the musi c track s transferr ed to the phone When you open the Music player menu, the details of the first track on the default track list are shown. To play a track, s croll to the t rack that y ou want and press Play or pr ess . ⢠To adjust th e volume leve l, use the vol ume keys on the side of the phone. ⢠To stop the playing, press St op or press . ⢠To skip to the beginning of th e next track , press down. To skip t o the beginning of the previous trac k, pr ess tw ice . ⢠To rewind the current track, press and hold . To fast forward the current track, pr ess and hold . Release the key at t he position you want. War ning ! Listen to music a t a moderate l evel. Contin uous exp osure to hi gh volume may dama ge your hearing. Sett ings for t he music p l ayer In the Music player menu, pressing Options allows acc ess to t he following sett ings. ⢠Play options : Select Random to play t he tracks on the track list in random order. Sele ct Repeat to play the current track or t he entire t rack list repeatedly. ⢠Music downloads : You can connect t o a browser s ervice r elated to the cur rent track. T his function i s only available when the a ddress of the se rvice is incl uded in the track . For more inform ation, see Downloading content and applications on page 16. ⢠Loudspeaker : You can lis ten to the music player via t he phoneâÂÂs loudspeaker. ⢠Headset : You can lis ten to the music player via a compat ible headset c onnected to t he phone. Tip: When using a headset, you can skip to t he next track by pressing the headset key quickly. T o stop the playing, press and hold the headset key.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 121 Menu functions ⢠Track list : You can view all the track s available on the track list and play the de sired track. To play a track, scr oll to the des ired track and press Play or press . If you pres s Options , you can refres h the track li st (for example after a dding new track s to the list) and change t he track list that is shown when you open the Music playe r menu, if several track lis ts are available in the phone. Radio To listen to t he radio on your phone connect the compatible headset to the headset connec tor on the bottom of the phone. The lead of the heads et functions as t he radio antenna, so let it hang freely. Note that t he quality of the radio br oadcast depends on the radio stationâÂÂs coverage in t hat particular area. 1. To turn on t he radio, pr ess Menu and select Media and Radio . On t he display are ⢠Channel location number and the name of the radio c hannel if y ou have saved t he channel. ⢠Frequency of t he radio channel. 2. If you ha ve alrea dy saved radio channels, you can sc roll to the channe l you would like to lis ten to, or select a radio channel locatio n 1 to 9 by pressing the c orresponding number k ey. When using the compatible hea dset supplied w ith the headse t key, press the key t o scroll t o the desired saved radio c hannel. 3. When the radio is on, press Options and sele ct Switch off t o turn off th e radio. Tip : To quickly turn off th e radio, press and hold .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 122 Menu functions Tuni ng a radi o channel When the radio is on, press and hold or to start the cha nnel search. Searc hing stops when a channel is found. To save t he channel, press Options , and select Save channel . Key in t he name of the channel and press OK . Select the location where you want to save the channel. Tip : To quickly save the channe l in a location 1 to 9, press and hold the correspo nding number key, then key in the name of the channe l and press OK . Usin g the rad io When the radio is on, press Options and select ⢠Switch off to turn off the radio. ⢠Save channel to save t he radio channel y ou have found, refer to Tuning a radio channel a bove. Up to 20 radio channels can be saved. ⢠Automatic tuning . Briefly pr ess or to s tart the c hannel search upwards or downw ards. The search stops when a channel has been found, pr ess OK . To save the channel, see Save channel above. ⢠Manual tuning . Briefly press or to move the channel search 0.05 MHz upwards or downwards or press and hold down the k eys to quickly s earch upwards or downwards f or a channel. To save the channel, press OK and see Save channel above. Tip : To quickly select Manual tuning , pr ess w hen in th e Radio menu. ⢠Set frequency . If you know t he frequency of the radio channe l you would like to lis ten to (between 87.5 MHz and 108.0 MHz), key it in and press OK . To s ave the channel, se e Save channel a bove. Tip : To quickly select Set frequency , press when in the Radio menu.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 123 Menu functions ⢠Delete channel . To delete a saved channel, scroll to it, press De let e , and OK . ⢠Rename . Key in a new name for the saved channel and press OK. ⢠Loudspeaker (or Headset ) to li sten to the r adio using the louds peaker (or headse t). Keep the he adset connected to the phone. T he lead of the headset f unctions as t he radio antenna . ⢠Mono out put (or Stereo out put ) to listen to t he radio in mono (or in stereo). You can normal ly make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the r adio. The v olume of the radio is muted. W hen you end t he call, the radio volume will automatically be tur ned up again. When an application using a (E)GPR S or HSCSD connection is sending or receiving data, it may interfere with the radio. Voice reco rder You can record pieces o f speech, sound or an a ctive call for three minut es. For example, this is useful when recording a name and phone number for writing them down lat er. Note : Obey all local la w s governin g recordi ng of calls. Do not use this fea ture ill egally. Recor ding 1. Press Menu , select Media and Voice recorder . 2. To st art the rec ording, select Record . To start the recording during a ca ll, pres s Options, and selec t Record . While rec ording a ca ll, all par ties to the c a ll will hear a faint be eping sound approximat ely every five seconds. When recording a call, hold the phone in the normal position near to your e ar.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 124 Menu functions 3. To en d the recording, pres s Stop . The recor ding will be saved in the Recordings folder of the Gallery menu. 4. To list en to the lates t recording, s elect Play last recorded . 5. To send t o the l atest recording, s elect Send last recor ded . The r ecording can be sent via IR, Bluetooth wireless technology or MMS. Lis t of rec ordings Press Menu , and select Me dia , V oice rec order and Re cor din gs li st . The list of folders in the Gallery is shown. Open Recordings to see t he list wit h recordings. Pr ess Options and you can select s ome of the options for files in the Gallery . See Gallery on page 112. Defi ning st ore fol der To select another f old er than the default folder Recordings in the G allery menu, pr ess Menu , and s elect Media , V oice rec order and Select memory . Select a folder from the list of folder s in Galler y . Media equalizer With the e qualiser you can control the sound quality when using the music player b y amplifying or attenuating frequency bands. Press Menu , and select Me dia and Media equaliser . To activate a s et, scroll t o one of the equaliser se ts and press Ac tiva te . To view or edit a selected set, pres s Options and select View , Edit or Rename . Not a ll sets can be edited or renamed.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 125 Menu functions â Or gani ser Note : Your phone mus t b e switch ed on to use the f unctio ns in the Organ iser menu. Do not switch the phone on when wirele ss phone use is prohibited or when it may ca use inte rference o r dang er. Alarm cl ock The alarm clock uses the t ime format set for the c lock. The alarm c lock works even when the phone is switched off if t here is enough power in the battery. Press Menu , and select Organise r and Alarm clock . ⢠Select Alar m time , key i n the alar m time an d press OK . To change th e alarm time , select On . ⢠Select Repe at alarm to s et the phone to alert you on selec ted days of t he week. ⢠Select Alar m tone and select t he default alarm tone, personalise the alarm tone by s electing one from the ringing tone list or from Gallery, or set a radio c hannel as the alar m tone. If you select the radio as an alarm tone, connect the headset to the phone. The phone uses the most recently liste ned-to channel as an alarm tone via the loudspeaker. If t he headset is removed or the phone is switched of f, the default ala rm tone will be used instead of the r adio. When the ala r m tim e expir es The phone will sound an alert tone, and flash Alarm! and the current time on the dis play. Press Stop to stop th e alarm. If you let the phone continue to sound the alar m for a minute or press Snooze , the alarm s tops for about t en minutes and t hen resumes.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 126 Menu functions If th e alarm time is reached while t h e phone i s switched o ff, the pho ne switches its elf on and starts sou nding the alarm tone . If you p ress Sto p , the phone as ks whether you want to acti vate the phone for calls , Swit ch the phone on? . Press No to swi tch off the phone or Yes to make and receive ca lls. Note : Do n ot pr ess Yes when wireles s phon e use is prohi b ited or when i t may cause interfere n ce o r danger . Calen dar The calendar helps you t o keep t rack of reminders , calls that you need t o make, me etings, an d birthdays. The calendar uses shared memory, see Sha red memory on page 19. Press Menu , and select Organise r and Calendar . Tip: To quick ly open t he Calendar menu, pre ss in standby mode. Scroll to th e day you want. The cur rent day is indicated by a frame ar ound the day. If there are any notes set for t he day, the day is in bold type. To view the day n ot es, press Vi ew . To view a week, press Options and select Week v iew . ⢠To view a single note, s croll to the not e you want t o view, pres s Vi e w . The not e view allow s you t o view the details of the selected note. You can scr oll through the not e. ⢠For example, t here are also options for making a note, or for sending a note via IR, Bluetooth wireless technology , or as a note direct ly to another c ompatible phoneâÂÂs calendar or as a text message or a multimedia message. There are options for dele ting, editing, moving and repeating a note and for c opying a note to another day.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 127 Menu functions To delete all not es in the calendar, s elect the month or week view, pr ess Options and select Delete all notes . Settings to se t the date , time, date or time fo rmat, or t he first day of the week . In the Au to- dele t e notes option you can set the phone to delete old notes automatically after a s pecified time. However, th e repeat notes, for ex ample, birthday notes, will not be deleted. Making a calend ar note For keying in letters and numbers, see W riting text on page 38. Press Menu , and select Organise r and Calendar . Scr oll to th e date you wan t, press Options and select Ma ke a no te . Select one of the following note t ypes: ⢠Me eti ng - Key in the note (or press Options and search f or the name in contact s). Press Options and select Sav e . Key in th e location f or the meeting and press Options and select Save . Key in t he start time for t he meeting and press OK , and t hen the end time and pres s OK . To set the a lar m f or the n ote , se lect With tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Call - Key in the phone number, pres s Options and sele ct Save . Key in the name, pr ess Options and select Sav e . (Instead of key ing in the phone number, press Options to searc h for the na me and number in contac ts.) Then key in t he time for the call and press OK . To s et the alar m for th e note, sele ct W ith tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Birthday - Key in t he personâÂÂs name (or pres s Options and s earch for it in contacts), press Options and select Save . Then key in th e year of birth, and pres s OK . To set the alarm for the note, sele ct W ith tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 128 Menu functions ⢠Memo - Key in t he note, pr ess O ptions and select Save . Key in the end day f or the not e and press OK . T o set the alarm for t he note, selec t With ton e or Silent (no alar m tone) and then s et the alarm time. ⢠Reminder - Key in the s ubject for the reminder, pr ess Options and select Save . To set the ala rm for the n ote, sel ect Alarm on and then set t he alarm time . When you have s et the alar m, the indicator is displaye d when you vie w the not es. When the phone sounds an a larm for a not e The phone beeps , and displa ys the note . With a cal l note on the display, y ou can call t he displaye d number by pressing . ⢠To stop the alar m without vie wing the note, press Exit . ⢠To stop the alar m and to view the note, press View . Press Snooze and the phone sounds an alarm after ten minutes again. To-do lis t You can save a note for a task that you have t o do, select a priority leve l for the note and mark it as done when you have complet ed it. You can sort the notes by pr iority or by dat e. The to-do list uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . Press Menu , and select Organise r and To-do list . Press Add note to mak e a note. Key in the not e and press Save . Select t he priorit y for t he note, High , Medium , or Low . T he phone automatically s ets the d eadline without an alarm for the note. To change the deadline, view the not e and select the deadline option. Or scroll to a note and pres s Vie w or press O ptions .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 129 Menu functions ⢠To add a ne w note, select Ad d . ⢠For example, y ou can also view and delete the selected not e and delete all the note s that you have marked as done. You can sort the notes by priority or by deadline, send a note to another phone as a text message or a multimedia me ssage, s ave a note as a calendar note, or access t he calendar . While viewing a not e, you c an also, f or example, s elect an option to edit the select ed note, edit the deadline or priority for the note, or mark the note as done. Note s You can us e the Notes application for writing and sending notes to compatible devices via IR, Bluetooth wireless technology, SMS or MMS. The Notes application uses shared memory, s ee Shared memor y on page 19. 1. To acces s Not es , press Menu and select Organiser an d Notes . The phone will ask y ou to set the dat e and time, if they have not already been set whe n you st art to write a not e. 2. To a dd a note, pre ss Add note or press Options and select Ma k e a n ot e . 3. Key in the note and selec t Save . You c an ins ert the c urrent ti me a nd date to th e note. If the re is no t enou gh spac e to ins ert the m to the note, th e phone will a sk you to dele te the appropriate number of characters from your note. You can also send t he note to a c ompatible device via IR, Bluetooth wirel ess technology, MMS, or as a text mes sage (SMS). If the not e is too long t o be sent as a text message, the phone w ill ask y ou to delete the ap propriate number of character s from your note. The other options for notes include options for view ing, deleting, and editing a note. While editing a note, you can also exit the text editor without saving the changes.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 130 Menu functions Wallet In Wallet you can save personal information, for example, credit card number s and addresses. The data that are sav ed in the wallet can eas ily be r etrieved while br owsing to automa tically fill in data fields, for example, when making purchas es and the s ervice support s wallet functi onality. You can als o save access codes to mobile services that r equest a us er name and password. The data in the wallet is protected with a wallet code that you can define when you access wallet for the firs t time . At Create wallet code ke y in the code and press OK to confirm it a nd at Verify wallet code key in t he code again and press OK . See also W allet code (4 to 10 digits) on page 16 . If you want to delete all the content of the wallet and the wallet code, key in *#7370925538# (*#res wallet# in letters) in standby mode. You also need t he phoneâÂÂs secur ity code, s ee Access c odes on page 15. To add the cont ent into t he wallet menu, and to edit it, ac cess the w allet menu. To us e the c ontent of the wallet in a mobile servic e, access the wallet vi a the br owser, see W eb on page 144. Acc ess ing the wa llet me nu To access the wallet menu, press Me nu , select Or ganiser and Wallet . Key in your wa llet code and press OK , see Wallet settings on page 133. Select ⢠W allet profiles to create c ard combinations, for example, for different s ervices. A wallet profile is helpful if the s ervice ask s for many dat a items to be filled in. You c an select t he appropriate w allet profile instead of s electing different cards separately. ⢠Cards to save personal card inf ormation. You can save payme nt card, loy alty card, and acc ess card information, for ex ample username and password combina tions for dif ferent services, a nd also addresses and user dat a. See Saving card det ails on page 131.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 131 Menu functions ⢠Tickets to save the notifica tions of e- tickets that you have bought via a mobile service. To view the tic ket s, pre ss O ptions and select View . ⢠Receipts to save receipts of mobile purchases. ⢠P ersonal notes to save a ll kinds of per sonal infor mation that you want to ke ep protected by the wallet PIN code. See Personal notes on page 132. ⢠Settings , see Wallet settings on pag e 133. Savi ng card de tails 1. Acces s the wallet and select Ca rds . 2. Select t he car d type to s ave details: ⢠P ayment cards for credit and debit cards. ⢠Loyalty ca rds for members hip cards. ⢠Access cards for persona l usernames and passwords to online services. ⢠User i nfo card s for customised personal preferences for online services. ⢠Address cards for contact i nformation, for exa mple, for deliv ery and billing addresses. 3. If no card is added, pr ess Add new , otherwise, press Options and select Add new . 4. Fill in the fields f or the details and press Done . If supported by your service provider, you can also rec eive car d information to your phone as configuration message. You will be notified as to which category the c ard belongs to . Save or discard the received card. You can view and rename the saved card but not edit it. For availability of receiving card information as configuration settings, contact t he card issuer or service provider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 132 Menu functions Pers onal not es You can save per sonal notes, f or example, account numbers, pas swords, codes or notations. Access the wallet and select P ersonal notes . Pres s O ptions and you can view, add, edit a s elected note and sort notes eit her by name or date or delete notes . When viewing a note, you can edit or d elete the selected not e. The option Send v ia text msg. is for copying the note as a text message or a mult imedia message and Copy to calendar is for copying the not e to the calendar as a memo. Use det ail is for extracting numbers, e-mail addresses and web addresses from a not e. Crea ting a wal let prof ile When you have s aved your personal card de tails, y ou can combine th em together int o a wallet profile. You can use the profile t o retrieve wall et data from different cards while browsing. 1. Acces s the wallet and select W allet profiles . 2. To cre ate a new walle t profile if no profile is added, press Add n ew . Otherwise, pre ss Options and sele ct A dd new . 3. Fill in the following fields and press Done . Some of the fields contain data that are s elected from the wallet. You need t o save those data before you can create a wallet profile. ⢠Select payment c ard next - select a car d from the pa yment car d list. ⢠Select loya lty card next - s elect a card from the loyalty card list. ⢠Select access card next - select a card from the acc ess ca rd list. ⢠Select user info card next - select a card from the us er data card list. ⢠Select billing add ress next - select an address from t he address card list. ⢠Select shipping addr ess next - select an add ress from the addr ess card l ist. ⢠Select rece ipt delivery addres s next - select an address fr om the address c ard list.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 133 Menu functions ⢠Select rec eipt delivery met hod next - select the way to deliver the receipt, To phone number or To e-mail address . ⢠W allet profile name: enter a na me for the pr ofile. Wallet settings Access the wallet and select Settings . Select ⢠Change code to change the wallet code. ⢠RFID to set RFID ID with the RFID code and RFID ty pe . (RFID = Radio Frequency Identification, technology to s ecurely conduct c ommerce transac tions with your phone) Gui del ine s f or p ayi ng f o r yo ur p urc has es w i th t he w al let ⢠To do your s hopping, access t he desired w eb site that s upports the wa llet. The service nee ds to support the Elec tronic Commerce Modeling L anguage specification. See on page 146. Choose the pr oduct you want to buy and read carefully all provided information before your purchase. Note : The t ext may not fit within a single s creen. Ther efore, make sure to scroll through and read all of the text before your purchase. ⢠To pay for the items you wish to buy , the phone asks whether you want to us e wallet or not. The phone also asks for your walle t PIN c ode. ⢠Select the c ard you want to pay with from the Payment cards lis t. Provided that the data f orm you receive f rom the servi ce provider supports t he Elect ronic Commerce Modeling Language specification, t he phone automatica lly fills in t he credi t card informa tion or the wallet profile fr om the wallet. ⢠Approve the purchas e, and the information is forwar ded.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 134 Menu functions ⢠You may re ceive an ac knowledgement or a digital rec eipt of the pur chase. ⢠To close the wallet, select C lose w allet . If you do not use the wallet for 5 minutes, it w ill be automatically closed. Note : If yo u hav e tried to a cces s or ha ve acc essed confi dent ial i nforma tion re quiri ng pa sswor ds ( for example yo ur bank account) , empty the cache of your phone after each u se. To em pt y th e c ac he , s ee T h e ca c he me m ory on p ag e 1 5 2. Sync hron isat ion Synchronisation allows you to s ave your cal endar and c ontacts data in a remote Intern et server (network service) or in a comp atible PC. If yo u have saved data in the remote Inte rnet server, y ou can synchronise your phone by starting the synchronisation from your phone. You can als o synchronise the data in your phoneâÂÂs contact s, calendar a nd notes to correspond with the data of your compatible PC by starting the s ynchronisation from your PC. T he contact data i n your SIM ca rd will not be synchronised. Note that answer ing an incoming call during s ynchronisation will end the synchronisat ion and you will need to re-sta rt it. Syn chr o nisi n g from you r pho ne Before synchronising from your phone, you may need to do t he following: ⢠Subscribe to a synchronisation service. For more information on availability and the synchronisation service s ettings, contac t your network ope rator or s ervice provider. ⢠Retrieve t he synchronisation set tings from your net work oper ator or service provider, see Settings for the synchronisation on page 135.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 135 Menu functions ⢠Set the connect ion settings you need for the s ync hronisation. See Setti ng up the phone for a service on page 145. To start the s ynchronisation from your phone: 1. Activate t he connection settings you need for the synchronisat ion. See Set ting up the phone for a service on page 145. 2. Press Menu , select Organiser , Synchronisation , Se ttings and A ctive I nternet s ync setting s . Scroll to th e set you wish to ac tivat e and pr es s Activ ate . Mark the data to be synchr onised. See Da ta t o be synchronised in Settings for t he synchronisation on page 135. 3. Press Menu , and select Organiser , Synchronis ation and Synchronise . 4. The marked data of the active s et will be synchronised af ter confirmation. Note that synchronising for the first time or after an interrupted synchronisation may take up to 30 minutes to c omplete, if the c ontacts or ca lendar are fu ll. Sett ings for t he synchr onisatio n You may receive the synchronisatio n settings as a c onfiguration message from the network oper ator or service provider. To receive the settings a s configuration message , see Configuration settings service on page 33. Keying in the sett ings manually 1. Press Menu , select Organiser , Synchronisation and Settings . 2. Select Ac tive In te rnet sy nc se tti ngs . 3. Scroll t o the set you wish to activat e and press Ac tiv at e . You need to activate the s et where you want to s ave the synchronisation s ettings. A set is a collection of settings required to make a connection to a se rvice.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 136 Menu functions 4. Select Edit activ e Internet sync settings . Sele ct each setting one by one and key in a ll the required sett ing s. ⢠Settings' name . Key in the name f or the s et and pres s OK . ⢠Data to be synchronised . Mark the data y ou want to s ynchronise, Contacts , Calendar and/or Note s and press Done . ⢠Database addresses . Selec t Contacts dat abase , Calendar database and/or Notes database to be edited. Key in t he name of the database and press OK . ⢠User name . Key in the user name and pres s OK . ⢠Pa s s w o r d . Key in the password and pres s OK . ⢠Synchronisation server . Key in the na me of the s erver and press OK. ⢠Connection settings to define connec tion settings required for s ynchronisation. See Ke ying in the service settings manually on page 145. Select each of the s ettings one by one and k ey in all the required s ettings. Contact your network operator or service provider f or the s ettings. Select PC s ync settings to ke y in the settings for server alert ed synchronis ation. Select ⢠User name . Key in the user name and pres s OK . ⢠Pa s s w o r d . Key in the password and pres s OK . Syn chr o nisi n g from you r PC To synchronise contacts, t he calendar and the not e s fr om your PC, use either an IR connec tion or Bluetooth connection or a data cable. You also need the PC Suite s oftware of your phone installed on your PC. Start the synchronisation from your PC using PC suite.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 137 Menu functions â Ap plica tions Note : The phone must be sw itched on to us e this functi on. Do not s witch on the phone whe n the use of a wire less ph one i s prohi bite d or wh en it m ay c ause inte rference or danger. Games Your phone software includes some games specially designed f or this Nokia phone. Launc hing a game 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Games and Se lect game . 2. Scroll t o a game or a game set (the name depends on the game ). 3. Press . If the selec tion is a si ngle game it will be launched. Otherwise, a list of games in the select ed game set is displayed. To launch a single game, scroll to the desired game and press . Note that running some games may consume the phoneâÂÂs batt ery faster (and you may need to connect the phone to t he charger). Other option s avail able for a game or game set Options for games, see Other options available f o r an applicat ion or applicat ion set on page 139. Game downl oads Press Menu , and select Applications , Games and Game downloads . The list of available boo kmarks is shown. Selec t More bookmarks to acces s the list of bookmarks in the Web menu, see Bookmarks on page 150.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 138 Menu functions Select the appr opriate bookmark to connect to the desired page. If the connec tion fails, you may not be able to a ccess the page from t he service whose connec tion settings are currently active. In this case , enter the Web menu and act ivate another set of s ervice sett ings, see Ma king a connect ion to a servic e on page 146. Try again to c onnect to the page. For the av ailability of diff erent services, pricing a nd tariffs, cont act your ne twork operator and/or service provider. Download content only from sources you trust. To download more ga mes, refer also to Downloading an a pplication on page 140. Note that when downloading a game, it may b e saved in the Applicat ions menu instead of the Games menu. Memory status for g ames To view the amount of memor y available for game and a pplication installations , press Menu , and sele ct Applications , Games and Memory . See also Memory status for applications on page 141. The games use shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19. Game set t ings Press Menu , and select Applications , Games and App. settings to set sounds, lights and shakes for the game.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 139 Menu functions Applica tions Your phone software includes some Java applic at ions specially des igned for t his Nokia phone. Launc hing an ap plica tion 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Collection and Select application . 2. Scroll t o an application or an applicat ion set (the name depends on the applic ation). 3. Press Op en . If the selection is a single application it will be la unched. Otherwise, a list of appl ications in the sel ected application set is displayed. To launch a single application, scroll to the desired application and press Open . Note that running s ome applications may consume the phoneâÂÂs battery fas ter (and you may need to conn ect the phon e to the cha rger). Other option s avail able for an app lication or applic ation set ⢠De lete to delet e the application or applicati on set from t he phone. Note that if you delete a pre-installed applicat ion or a n application set f rom your phone, you may download it a gain to your phone from the support area o n the NokiaâÂÂs web site ww w.nokia.com. ⢠Details to give additional informati on about the applic ation. ⢠Update version to c heck if a new vers ion of the applic ation is available for download from the services (netwo rk service). ⢠W eb page to pr ovide further inf ormation or addit ional data for th e application f rom an Internet page. This feature needs t o be supported by the network. It is only shown if an Int ernet address has been provided wit h the appli cation.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 140 Menu functions ⢠App. acce ss to restr ict the applica tion from acces sing the network to prevent you from unexpected costs. Dif ferent categories are shown. Select in each cat egory, if available, one of the follow ing permissions: ⢠Ask every time and the ph one asks alwa ys for net access ⢠Ask first time only and the phone asks on first attempt t o net acces s ⢠Always allowed to allow th e net acces s ⢠Not allowed to not allow the net accesss ⢠Connect via for some applications t hat need specific service s ettings. Your phone is set to us e as default the servi ce settings for the browser. Downlo ading an appl icati on Your phone supports J2ME TM Java applications. Make sure t hat the application is compatible wit h your phone before downloading it . Download content only fr om sources you tr ust. You can download ne w Java applications in dif ferent ways: â¢P r e s s Menu , and selec t Applications , Collection and App. downloads and the lis t of available bookmarks is show n. Select More boo kmarks to access the list of bookmar ks in the Web me nu, see Bookmarks on page 150. Select the a ppropriate bookmar k to connect to the des ired page. If the connection fails, you may not be able t o access t he page f rom the service whos e connect ion settings ar e currently ac tive. In this case, e nter the We b menu a nd activate another set of service settings, see Making a connection to a service on page 146. Try again to connect to the page. For the av ailability of diff erent services, pricing a nd tariffs, cont act your ne twork operator and/or the service provider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 141 Menu functions â¢P r e s s Menu , and selec t We b an d Do wnload links . Select to dow nload an appropriate a pplication or game. See Downloading on page 151. ⢠Use the game download functionality, see G ame downloads on page 137. ⢠Use the Nokia Application installer from PC Suite to download t he applications in your phone. Note tha t Nokia d oes not w arrant for a pplicatio ns from non -Nokia s ites. If you choos e to downl oad Ja va appli cati ons from them , yo u should take the same precaut ions , for securi ty or c ontent , as you w ould wi th any s ite. Note that when downloading an application, it may be sa ved in the Games menu instead of the Applications menu. It is not possible to s tore Java games and applicat ions on the mult imedia card. Memor y stat us for a pplicati ons To view the amount of memor y available for game and a pplication installations , press Menu , and sele ct Applications , Collect ion and Memory . The applications use shared memory, see Sha red memory on page 19. Calcula tor The calculator in your phone adds , subtrac ts, multiplies, divi des, calcula tes the s quare and the square root an d converts currency values . This calc u lator has a limited accur acy and roundin g errors may occur, es pecially in long divis ions. 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Ext ras and Calculat or . 2. When âÂÂ0â is displayed on the s creen, key in th e f irst number in the calculation, press f or a decimal point. 3. Press Options and select Add , Su btr ac t , Multiply , D iv ide , Square , Squar e root or Change sign .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 142 Menu functions Tip: Alternati vely, press once to add, twice t o subtract, t hree times t o multiply or f our times t o divide. 4. Key in the second number. 5. For a total, press Equals . Repeat steps 3 to 5 as many times as is neces sary. 6. To st art a new c alculation, first pr ess and hold Clear . Performing a currency conversion 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Ext ras and Calculat or . 2. To s ave the exc hange rat e, press Options and select Exchange rate . Select eith er of the di splayed options. Key in th e exchange rate, press f or a decimal point, and pr ess OK . The exc hange rate remains in th e memory until you replace it with another one. 3. To pe rform the currency conversion, k ey in the amount to be c onverted, pr ess Options and select In domestic or In for eign . Tip: You can a lso perform t he currency conv ersion in standby mode. Key in the amount to be converted , press Options and s elect In domestic or In foreign . Coun tdown timer Press Menu , and select Applications , Ex tr as and Countdown timer . Key in the a larm time in hours, minutes and s econds and press OK . If you wish, write your own not e text which is displaye d when t he time expires, and press Sta rt to st art the cou ntdow n time r. ⢠To change the c ountdown time, s elect Change time , or to stop the timer, select Stop timer . If the alarm t ime is reac hed when the phone is in standby mode , the phone sounds a tone a nd flashes the note text if it is se t or else Countdo wn time up . Stop the alarm by pressing a ny key. If no key is
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 143 Menu functions pressed, the a larm automatically s tops within 30 seconds. To sto p the alarm and to delete th e note text, press Exit . Stop watc h You can measure time, take intermediate times or lap ti mes using the s topwatch. Dur ing timing, the other functions of t he phone can be used. To set the st opwatch timing in the background, press . Using the s topwatch consu mes the battery a nd the phone's operating ti me will be red uced. Be careful not to let it run in the b ackg round wh en perform ing other op erations with your pho ne. Time observation and time splitting 1. Press Me nu , and s elect Applications , Extras , Stopwatch and Split timing . You can select Continue if you have set the timing in the ba ckground. 2. Press Sta rt to start t he time obser vation. Press Split every time you want to take an interme dia te time. The int ermediate times are listed below the running time on the display. Scroll to view t he times. 3. Press Stop to stop the time observation. 4. To save the times, press Save and enter a name. Or pr es s Options and select Start t o start t he time obser vation again. The new time is added to t he previous time. Select Res et to rese t the tim e wi thout s aving it. Lap times Press Menu , and select Applications , Ex tr as , Stopwatch and Lap timing . Pres s Start to star t the ti me observation and Lap to take a lap time. Press Stop to s top the lap timing. To save the times, press Save and enter a name. Or pres s Options and you can save or res et the lap times . Refer to Time observation and time splitting on page 143.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 144 Menu functions Viewing and deleting times Press Menu , and select Applications , Ex tr as and Stopwatch . If the stopwatch is not reset , you can select Show last to vi ew the most recent measur ed time. Select View times and a list of name s or final time s of the time sets is shown, select t he time set you want to view. To delete t he saved t imes, select Delete times . Select Delete all and pre ss OK , or select One by one , scroll to the times you want t o delete, pr ess Dele te and press OK . â Web You can access various mobile Internet services with your phoneâÂÂs browser. For example, these s ervices may include we ather reports, news or flight times and fi nancial information. Note : Y o u r p h o n e m u s t b e s w i t c h e d o n t o u s e t h i s f u n c t i o n . D o n o t s w i t c h t h e p h o n e o n w h e n w i r e l e s s phone use is prohi bited or whe n it m ay caus e in terferen ce or dang er. Check the availability of these services, pricing and t ariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose ser vice you wish to use. Serv ice providers will also give you instructions on how to use t heir services. With your phoneâÂÂs brows er you can view the services that use Wireless Mark-Up Language (W ML) or extensible HyperText Mark-up Language (xHTML) on the ir pages. Appearanc e may vary due screen s ize. Note that you may not be able to view all det ails of th e Internet pages. Basi c ste ps f or acc ess ing an d u sin g ser vic es 1. Save the service settings tha t are required t o access the s ervice that you want to use. See page 145. 2. Make a connec tion to the given service. See page 146.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 145 Menu functions 3. Start browsing t he pages of the service . See page 146. 4. Once you are finished browsing, end t he connection to t he service. See p age 148. Se ttin g up the phone for a servi ce You may receive the s ervice settings as a conf iguration message fr om the networ k operator or s ervice provider that offers the s ervice that you want to use. You can als o key in the sett ings manually or a dd and edit the s ettings with PC Suite. For more infor mation and for t he appropriate s ettings, contact t he netw ork operator or service provider that offers the s ervice that you want t o use. To receive the service settings as configuration message, see Configuration settings s ervice on page 33. Key ing in t he serv ice sett in gs manu all y 1. Press Menu , and select We b , Settings and Connection setti ngs . 2. Select Active web s ettings . 3. Scroll t o the connect ion set you would like to activate and press Ac tiv at e . You need to activate the connection s et where you want to save the service settings. A connec tion set is a collection of settings required to make a connection to a service. 4. Select Edit activ e web settings . Select e ach of the set tings one by one and k ey in all t he required set tings according to the information you have receive d from your net work operator or service provider. Note that all t he bearer-relat ed settings ar e in the Bearer settings menu.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 146 Menu functions Making a connect ion t o a s ervice Firs tly, make su re that th e ser v ice setti ngs of th e serv ice yo u want to use are a ctiv ated . To activ ate th e sett ing s: â¢P r e s s Menu , and select We b , Settings and Connection settings . Sele ct Active web s ettings and scroll to the con nection s et you want to act ivate and press Activat e . Secondly, make a connect ion to the s ervice. There are three ways to c onnect: ⢠Open the start page, f or example, the homepage of the s ervice provide r: Press Menu , and select We b an d Home , or in standby mode pres s and hold . ⢠Select a bookmark of the s ervice: Press Menu , and select We b , Bookmarks , and select a bookmark. If the bookmark does not work with the c urrent ac tive service settings, act ivate another se t of service settings and try aga in. ⢠Select t he last URL: Press Menu , and select We b , Last web addr . . ⢠Key in the address of t he service : Press Menu , and select We b an d t he n Go to address . Key in t he addre ss of the se rvice and pr ess OK . Brow si ng the page s of a se rv ice After you have made a connect ion to the s ervice, you can start br owsing its pages. The function of the phone keys may vary in different s ervices. Fo llow the text guides on the phone display. For more information, contact your service provider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 147 Menu functions Note that if GPRS is selected as the data bearer, the indicator is s hown on the top left of the display during browsing. If you receive a call or a text me ssage, or ma ke a call during a (E)GPRS connection, the indicator will be shown on t he top right of the display to indicat e that the (E)GPRS connection is suspended (on hold). After a call, for example, the phone tries to reconnect the (E)GPRS connection. Usi ng t h e ph on e ke ys w hil e bro wsi ng ⢠Use any of t he scroll ke ys to brow se through the pa ge. ⢠To select a highlighted item, press , or pr ess Options to se lect the opt ion for opening the link. ⢠To enter le tters and numbers, press th e keys - and to ent er special c haracters, pres s the k ey . Opti ons whil e browsi ng Press Options and t he following options may be av ailable. The service provider may also of fer other options. Select ⢠Home to re tur n to you r sta rt pa ge. ⢠Shortcuts to open a new lis t of options that are, for example, specific to t he page. This option is only available, if t he page act ually contains shortcuts. ⢠Add bookmark to save the page as a bookmark. ⢠Bookmarks . See Bookmarks on page 150. ⢠His tory to get a list show ing the last visited URLs. ⢠Do wnload links to show t he list of bookmar ks for downloading. ⢠Other options to show a list of other options, for example options for the wallet and some securit y options.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 148 Menu functions ⢠Reload to reload and update the c urrent page. ⢠Quit . See D isconnect from a service on page 148. ⢠Contacts to add or edit cont acts in your phonebook . Note : If yo u hav e tried to a cces s or ha ve acc essed confi dent ial i nforma tion re quiri ng pa sswor ds ( for example, your bank accoun t), empty the cache o f your phone afte r each use. To em pt y th e c ac he , s ee T h e ca c he me m ory on p ag e 1 5 2. Dir ect ca llin g The browser s upports functions th at you can ac cess wh ile browsing. You c an make a phone call, send DTMF tones while a voice call is in progress, and save a name and a phone numbe r from a page. To make a phone call during an active br owsing session pr ess Options , select Other options and Contacts . Select the number you would lik e to call and press . To get back to your Internet connection pres s Ba ck . Dis connect fr om a servic e To quit browsing and to end th e connection, press O ptions and select Quit . W hen Quit browsing? is shown, press Ye s . Alternatively, press twice, or press and hold Appear anc e se tting s of th e br ows er While brows ing, press Options and select Ot her options and Appear . se ttings , or in s tandby mode, press Me nu , and s elect Web , Settings and Appearance settings . ⢠Select Text wrapping . Se lect On and the text continues on the next line. If you s elect Off , the text will be abbreviat ed.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 149 Menu functions ⢠Select Font si ze and select Small , Normal or Large . ⢠Select Show images . Selec t No and any pictures appe aring on the page are not s hown. This can speed up the brows ing of page s that contain a lot of pictu res. ⢠Select Alerts and select Alert for unsecure connection and Ye s to set the phon e to ale rt whe n a secure connec tion changes to a n unsecure one during br owsing. Select Alert for unsecure items and Ye s to se t the phone to al ert wh en a sec ure pa ge co ntains an unsecure it em. Note th at these alerts do not guarantee a secure connection. For more information, see Brows er security on page 152. ⢠Select Char acter encoding to select the character set that the phone uses for showing browser pages that do not include that information or to select whet her to alw ays use UTF-8 encoding when sending a Web address to a compatible phone . Cookie s A cookie is data that a s ite saves in your phoneâÂÂs brows er cach e memory. The data can be, for exa mple, your user informat ion or your browsing preferenc es. Cookies will be saved until y ou clear the cache memory, see The c ache memory on pa ge 152. 1. While browsing, press Options and select Other opt ions , Sec urity and Cookie sett ings , or in standby mode, press Menu , and select Web , Set tings , Securi ty se ttings and Cookies . 2. Select Allow or Reject to allow or pr event the phone receiv ing cookies.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 150 Menu functions Book mark s While browsing you can save pa ge addres ses as bookmarks in the phoneâÂÂs memory, see Options while browsing on page 14 7 . To us e the bookmarks: 1. While browsing, press Options and select Bookmarks , or in standby mode, press Menu , and select Web an d Bookmarks . 2. Scroll t o the bookmark you want t o use and press Select to make a connect ion to the page associated with the bookmark. 3. Select Options to view the ti tle and the address of t he selected book mark, ed it or delete t he selected bookmark, or send it directly to another p hone as a book mark, or a s a text mess age, or create a new bookmark, or save it to a folder . Note that your phone may have some pre-installed bookmarks for sites not affiliated to Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for secur ity or conte nt, as you would with any Internet site. Recei ving a bookma rk When you have r eceived a bookmark (sent as a bookmar k) 1 bookmark receive d is displayed. Press Show to view t he bookmark To save the book mark, pres s Sav e , or press Options and sele ct View to see the details or Del ete to disc ard it. To discard the bookmark direct ly after you have rec eived the bookmark, press Exit and OK .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 151 Menu functions Downlo ading 1. To download mor e tones, image s, games or applications to your phone (netwo rk service), pres s Menu , and s elect Web and Do wnload links . 2. Select Tone downloads , Graphic downloads , Game downloads , Video downloads or App. downloads to download tones , images, games, v ideos or appl ications, respectively. Download content only from sources you trust. Service inbox The phone is able to receive service messages (p ushe d messages) sent by your service provider (net work service). Servic e messages are notifications of , for ex ample, news headlines, and they may contain a text message or an address of a se rvice. To acces s the Service inbo x in standby mode, when you hav e receiv ed a service mes sage, pres s Show . ⢠I f y o u p r e s s Exit the message is moved to the Service inbox . To acce ss the Service inbox lat er, press Menu , and s elect Web and Service inbox . To acces s the Service inbo x while browsing, press Options and select Other options and Se rvice inbox . Scroll to t he message you want, press Options . Select Retrieve to activa te the browser a nd download t he ma rke d co nt ent , or De tails to display de tailed information on the service not ification, or select De lete to delet e it. Serv ice inbox s etti ngs Press Menu , and select We b , Settings and Service inbox settings . ⢠Select Se rvice mes sages and On (or Off ) t o set the phone to r eceive (or not to r eceive) s ervice message. Select Message filter and On (or Off ) to set the phone to receiv e (or not to rece ive) service
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 152 Menu functions messages only from content a uthors approved by the serv ice provider. To view the list of the approved content a uthors, se lect Trusted channels . ⢠Select Aut omatic connection . If you have s et the phone to r eceive service messages and select On , the phone w ill automatically activate th e browser f rom standby mode when the phone has recei ved a service message. If you s elect Off , the phone will acti vate the brows er only after you have select ed Retriev e when the phone has receiv ed a servic e message. The cache memory The information or services you have accessed ar e stored in the cache of your phone. A c ache is a buffer memory, whic h is used to store data t emporarily. To empty the cache: ⢠while browsing, pres s Options and sele ct Other options and Clear the cache , or ⢠in standby mode, press Me nu , and s elect We b , and Clear the cache . Brows er secu rit y Security features may be r equired for some services, such as bank ing services or shopping on a site. For such connections you need secu rity certificates and possibly a s ecurity module which may be available on your SIM car d. For more information, contact your service provider. Secur ity modu le The security module can contain certif icates as well as private and public keys. T he purpose of t he security module is to improve security services for applications requiring br owser connec tion, and allows you to use a digit al signature. The certific ates are saved in the s ecurity module by the service provider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 153 Menu functions Press Menu and select Web , Settings , Secu rity settings and Secur ity module settings . Sele ct ⢠Security module details t o show the s ecurity module title, its s tatus, manufacture r and serial number. ⢠M odu le P IN req uest t o set the phone to ask f or the module PIN when us ing services pr ovided by security module. Key in the code and sele ct On . To disable t he module PIN reques t, select Of f . ⢠Change module PIN to change the module PIN, if allowed by the security module. Enter the current module PIN code , then enter t he new code twice. ⢠Change signing PIN . Select t he signing PIN you want to ch ange. Enter the current PIN code, then enter the new code twice . See also Access cod es on page 15. Cert ificat es There are three kinds of certif icates: server c ertificates , authority cer tificates and user cer tificates. ⢠The phone uses a server certificate t o create a connection w ith improved secur ity to th e content server. The phone receives the server certificate from the se rvice provide r bef ore the connection is established and its validity is checked us ing the authority certificate s saved in t he phone. Server certificate s are not saved. The security indic ator is displaye d during a connect ion, if the da ta transmission bet ween the phone and t he content server is encrypted. ⢠Authority certificates are used by some services, such as banking service s, for checking the validity of other certificates. Author ity certificates can either be saved in the security module by t he service provider, or they can be downloaded from the network, if the service supports the use of authority certificate s.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 154 Menu functions ⢠User certif icates ar e issued to user s by a Certifying Authority. User cer tificates are r equired, for example, t o make a digital signature and t hey asso ciate the user with a specific privat e key in a security module. Important: Note, however, that even if the use of certificat es mak es the risks involved in remote conne ctions and softwar e installation considerably smaller, t hey must be us ed correctly in order t o benefit f rom increased s ecurity. The existence of a cert ificate does not offer any p rotection by itself; the c ertificate manager must contain correct, aut hentic, or trusted certificat es for increased security to be available. Important: Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid yet i s shown even if t he cer tificate should be valid, chec k that t he current dat e and time in your phone ar e correct. Important: Befo re changing these s ettings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the cert ificate and that the ce rtificate really belongs to t he listed owner . Digi tal si gnatur e You can make digital s ignatures with your phone if your SIM card has a s ecurity module. Th e signature can be t raced back to y ou via the private key on the security module and t he user c ertificate t hat was used to perform t he signature. Using the digit al signature can be t he same as s igning your name to a paper bill, contract or ot her document. To make a digital signature, select a link on a page, for e xample, the title of the book you want to buy and its price. T he text t o sign (possibly including amount, da te, etc.) will be shown. Check that the he ader text is Re ad and that t he digital signature icon is shown. Note : If the digit al signatur e icon does not appear, ther e is a security breach, a nd you should not enter any personal data such as your signing PIN.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 155 Menu functions To sign the t ext, rea d all of the text firs t and then you can select Sign . Note : The t ext may not fit within a single s creen. Theref ore, make sur e to scroll t hrough and read all of the text bef ore signing. Select the user certificat e you wa nt to use. Key in t he signing PIN (see General infor mation on pag e 15) and press OK . The digit al signature icon wi ll disappear , and the service may displa y a confirma tion of your purchase. â SIM se rv ices In addition to th e functions available on the phone, your SIM car d may provide additional services that you c an access in Menu 15. Menu 15 is s hown only if it is supported by your SIM card. The na me and conte nts of the menu de pend entirely on the service av ailable. Note : For availa bility, ra tes and informat ion on using S IM services, contact your SIM card vendor, e. g. netwo rk ope rator, servic e pro vider o r other vend or. You can set the phone to s how you the conf irmation messages sent between y our phone and the network when you are using the SIM s ervices by selecting the option Ye s within the menu Confir m SIM service actions , in Phone s ettings . Note that ac cessing thes e services may involv e sen ding messages or making a phone call for which you may be charged.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. PC C o nnec tivity 156 PC C o nnec tivity 7. PC Co n ne cti vity You can send and receive e- mails, and a ccess the Internet when your phone is connected to a compatible PC via an IR or Bluet ooth wireless conne ction or via a data cable (D KU-2) connection (USB). You can use y our phone with a variety of PC connect ivity and data communicat ions applications. Wi th PC Suite you can, for ex ample, synchronis e contacts, cale ndar and to -do notes and notes between your phone and the c ompatible PC or a remote Inte rnet server (network s ervice). You may fi nd more information and downloadable files , for exampl e PC suite, in t he support area on the Nok iaâÂÂs web s ite, w ww.nokia.com. â PC Su ite The PC Suit e contains the following applications: ⢠Nokia Application Installer to install J2ME Java applica tions from the compatible PC to the phone, for example games and dictionaries . ⢠Nokia Audio Manager to creat e music for your phone. ⢠Nokia Image Converter to mak e images in supported formats us able for multimedia me ssages or wallpaper and t o transfer the m to your phone. ⢠Nokia Sound Converter to optimise polyphonic ringing tones in supported formats t o be compatible with your phone and to transfer them t o your phone. ⢠Nokia Content Copier to back up and restore personal data between your phone and a compa tible PC. Supports also c ontent transfer t o another compa tible Nokia phone. ⢠Nokia Phone Editor to send text messages and edit the cont acts in your phone .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. PC C o nnec tivity 157 PC C o nnec tivity ⢠Nokia Phone Browser to view t he contents of the Galler y folder of y our phone on a compat ible PC. You can browse picture and audio files and als o modify files in the phoneâÂÂs memory and transfer files between phone and the PC. ⢠Nokia Multimedia Player to f or playi ng sounds, images, videos and multimedia messages on t he PC. Multimedia Player allows you to view multime dia received on your phone or v ia e-mail. ⢠Nokia PC Sync to synchronise contacts, calenda r and to-do not es between your phone and a compatible PC. ⢠Nokia Modem Options contains settings for H SCSD and GPRS connections. ⢠Nokia Connection Manager to select t he connect ion type between t he PC and the phone. ⢠Nokia 6230 data modem dr ivers enable you t o use your phone as a mode m. ⢠Language Selection to select the language used duri ng an installation of PC Suite and the PC Suite application itself. ⢠HTML He l p to support the application usage. Copyright protection ma y prevent s ome images, ri nging tones and ot her content f rom being copied, modified, transfer red or forwarded.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. PC C o nnec tivity 158 PC C o nnec tivity (E)GP RS, HSC SD and CSD With your phone you can use t he (E)GPRS (Enhanced G PRS), GPRS (General Packe t Radio Ser vice), HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data) and CSD (Circuit Switched D ata, GSM data ) data ser vices. For availability and subscription to data s ervices, contact your network operator or service provider. Note that t he use of H SCSD services consumes the phoneâ s battery fas ter than normal voice or data calls. You ma y need to connect the phone to a charger for the duration of dat a transfer. See (E)GPRS modem settings on page 105 . â Us ing data comm un icatio n appl icat ions For information on using a data communication application, refer to the documentation provided wit h it. Note that making or answer ing phone calls during a computer c onnection is not recommended as it might disrupt the oper ation. For better performance during dat a calls, place the phone on a s tationary surfa ce with the keypad facing downward. D o not move the phone by holding it in your hand during a data c all.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Batter y informat ion 159 Batter y informat ion 8. Bat tery i nform ati on â Cha rging a nd Disch argi ng Your phone is p owered b y a recha rgea ble batter y. Note tha t a new battery's full pe rformance is achieved only after two or three co mplete charge and discharge cycles ! The batt ery can be charged a nd discharged hund reds of times but i t w ill eventu ally wear ou t. When the operati ng time ( talk-time and st andby time) i s noticeably short er than normal, it is time to buy a ne w battery. Use only bat teri es ap pro ved by the pho ne ma nuf actu rer an d rech arge yo ur bat te ry on ly with the c har ge rs a ppr ove d by the m anufac turer. Unplug the c harger whe n not in us e. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger fo r long er than a week, since overc hargin g may short en its lifet ime. If left unuse d a fully charged battery wi ll discharge itse lf over time. Tempera ture ex tremes can affe ct the abili ty of your ba ttery to ch arge. Use the ba ttery only for its inte nded purpose. Never use a ny charger or battery which is dama ged. Do not short-circu it the battery. Acci dental short-ci rcuiting can occur when a metallic o bject (coin , clip or pen) causes di rect connectio n of the and - terminals of th e battery (metal s trips on the b attery) for examp le when you carry a spare ba ttery in your pocket o r purse. Short- circuitin g the terminals may dama ge the battery or th e connectin g objec t. Leaving the battery in h ot or cold pla ces, such as in a cl osed car in summe r or winter cond itions , will reduce the capacity a nd lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 1 5ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A phone with a hot or cold battery ma y temporarily n ot work, even when the batt ery is full y charged. Ba tteries ' perfo rmance is part icularly l imited in temperatu res well be low freez ing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire! Disp ose of batt eries a ccordin g to l ocal regul ations (e.g. r ecycli ng). Do no t dispo se as h ous ehold w aste.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. CARE AND MAIN TENANCE 160 CARE AND MAIN TENANCE CA RE A ND M A INT EN AN CE Yo ur p hon e is a pr odu ct of su perior des ign a nd cr aft smansh ip and s hould be t reat ed wit h car e. The su gge sti on s below will help you to ful fil any warranty obligati o ns and to enjo y this pro duct for many yea rs. ⢠Kee p the p hon e and al l its parts a nd ac ce ssor ie s ou t of th e reac h of s mall chi ldren . ⢠Keep the p hone dry. Pre cipitat ion, humid ity and all type s of liquid s or moisture can co ntain mine rals that w ill corrode e lectronic circ uits. ⢠Do not u se or store the ph one i n d usty, d irty a reas. Its movi ng part s c an be da mag ed. ⢠Do not sto re the ph one in hot area s . Hig h temperatur es can sho rten the li fe o f el ectronic de vices, damag e batter ies, a nd warp or melt certai n pla stics. ⢠Do not sto re the ph one in cold ar eas. When it warms up (to its n ormal temp eratu re), mois ture can fo rm inside, which may d amage electron ic circuit board s. ⢠Do not atte mpt to open the phone. Non- expert handlin g may damage it . ⢠Do not drop, knock o r shake the pho ne. Roug h hand ling can break int ernal circui t bo ards. ⢠Do not u se ha rsh chemica ls, cleani ng solve nts, or stro ng dete rgents to clean the phone. ⢠D o no t pa int th e pho ne. Pa in t can clo g the movi ng par ts and p reven t p rop er o pe rati on. ⢠Use a s oft, clean, d ry cl oth to clean any lenses ( such as cam era, proxi mity se nsor, an d light s ensor). ⢠Us e only the sup pli ed or a n app rove d repl aceme nt a ntenn a. Una uthori sed antenn as , modifi cations or attach ments could da mage the phone and may v iola te regu latio ns gov erning rad io dev ices. All of the above suggestio ns apply equall y to your phone, bat tery, charger or any accessory. If any of th em is not work ing properl y, take it to your neares t qualifie d service facility. Th e personne l there will assist yo u and, if necessary, arrange for service.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION 161 IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION IMPORTANT SA FETY INF ORMATION â Traffic Safety Do not use a h and-h eld tele phone whil e drivin g a vehicle. Al ways secur e the phone in its holder ; do not pla ce the phone on th e pas seng er se at o r where it c an bre ak loose i n a co llisi on or sudde n stop . Remember road safety always comes first! â Operating e nviron ment Rememb er to follow an y special regu lation s in force in any area and always s witch off yo ur phone when ever it is forb idden to use it , or when it ma y cause interf erenc e or danger. Use th e phone only in it s normal o perating position s. Parts of th e pho ne are magne tic. Metallic mat erials may be att racted to t he pho ne, a nd pers ons w ith a he arin g aid should not hold the phone to the ea r with the hear ing aid. Always secure the p hone in it s holder, beca use metall ic materi a ls may be att racted by th e earpie ce. Do not place credit cards o r other mag netic storage media nea r the phone, because in formati o n store d on them may be erased . â Electroni c devi ces Most modern electronic e quipment is shielded from radio freque ncy (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipmen t may not be shiel ded against the RF signals from your wire less phone. Pacemakers Pacemake r manufacturer s recommen d that a minimum s eparatio n of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintaine d between a handhel d wire less pho ne an d a pa cemak er to a void p ote ntial in terfe rence with t he pa cemak er. The se recomme ndations are consisten t with the indep endent res earch by and recommen dations of Wireles s Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers:
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION 162 IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION ⢠Should always kee p the phone mo re than 2 0 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when the phon e is switched on; ⢠Shoul d not carry t he phone in a b reast p ocket; ⢠Should u se the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the pote n tial for interference. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your phone immediately. Hearing aids Some digit a l wirele ss phones may interf ere with some h earing aids . In the event of such inte rference, yo u may want to consult your serv ice provi der. Other medical devices Opera tion of any ra dio transm itting e quipm ent, in cludin g cel lular ph ones, may int erfere w ith the f unctiona lity of inad equate ly pro tected medi cal d evice s. Con sult a physici an or the manufac ture r of the medi cal d evice t o dete rmine if they a re adeq uately shiel d ed fro m externa l RF energy or i f you have any q uestio ns. Switch o ff your phone in h ealth care fa cilities when any regu lations pos ted in these areas inst ru ct you to do so. Hospit als or health care faci lities may be using equipmen t that could be sensitiv e to externa l RF energy . Vehicles RF sign als may affect imp roperl y installe d or inadequa tely shiel ded electro nic system s in motor ve hicles (e .g. electro nic fuel injection systems, e lectronic anti- skid (a nti-lock) bra king systems, elect ronic speed co ntrol systems , air-bag systems). Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding yo ur vehicle. You should also consult the manu facturer of any eq uipmen t that has been ad ded to your vehicle. Posted facilities Switc h your phone of f in an y faci lity w her e pos ted noti ces s o re quire.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION 163 IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION â Potential ly exp losi ve atmosp heres Swi tch of f yo ur phon e wh en in an y ar ea wit h a po ten tia lly ex pl osiv e atmo sph ere and obey a ll s igns and instru ctions. Spa rks in such ar eas could cause an explos ion or fire res ulting in bodily injury o r even death. User s are advis ed to swit ch off the pho ne when at a refuell ing point (service statio n). Users are re minded of th e need t o obs erve r estr ictio ns on the us e of r adio e qu ipmen t in f uel de pots (fuel sto rage a nd di stri bution area s), chemi cal plan ts or where b lasti ng operatio ns are in progress . Areas with a potenti ally explosi ve atmosphere are often but not always clearly ma rked. They i n clude bel o w deck on boats; chem ical trans fer or s torag e f aciliti es; v ehicle s usi ng liqui fied pe trol eum g as (su ch a s propa ne or buta ne); area s wh ere the air c ont ains ch emi cals or par ticle s, su ch as g rai n, dust or me tal po wd ers; an d any oth er are a whe re you would normally b e advis ed to turn off your v ehicle engi ne. â Vehicles Only qua lified personnel should service th e phone, or install the phone in a veh icle. Faulty in stall ation or servi ce may be dangero us and may invalidate any warranty which may appl y to the unit. Chec k regularly th at all wir eles s phone equ ipment in y our vehicl e is mounted and operati n g pr operly. Do not sto re or carry f lammable l iquids, gases or expl osive materials in the same compa rtment as th e phone, its parts or access ori es. For ve hicles equi pped with a n a ir ba g, reme mbe r that a n a ir ba g infl ates with grea t forc e. Do not place objec ts, includ ing b oth i nstal led or port able w irel ess equipm ent in the area over t he a ir ba g or in the air b ag de ploym ent area. I f in-veh icle wirel ess equip ment is improp erly ins talled and the air bag in flates, s erious inju ry could re s ult. Using your phone whil e in the air is proh ibited. Switch off your p hone before boarding an aircraft. The us e of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dange rous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone networ k and may be illega l. Failure to obs erve t hese inst ructio ns may le ad to suspe nsion o r denial of tele phone s ervices t o the o ffender, or legal acti on or both.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All right s reserved. IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION 164 IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION â Emergenc y calls Impor tan t: This p hon e, lik e an y wir eless phone , o perat es u sing radio signa ls, w irel ess and l andl ine netwo rks as we ll as use r-programme d funct ions. Beca use of t his, conne ctions in a ll cond itions can not be guarantee d. Therefo re, you shoul d never rely solely upo n any wireless phone fo r essentia l communicatio ns (e.g. med ical emerg encies). Emerg ency c alls may not be possi ble on al l wir eless phone ne twor ks or wh en cert ain net work service s and/ or phone fe atures are in use . Check wit h local ser vice provi ders. To make an emergency call: 1. If the p hone is not on, s witch it on. Check fo r adequa te signa l strength. Some n etwo rks ma y re quire that a va lid SI M ca rd is properl y ins erte d in the phon e. 2. P ress as many ti mes as needed (e. g. to exit a call, to ex it a menu, etc . ) to clea r the disp lay and rea d y the phone for calls. 3. Key in the emergency numbe r for your p resent lo cation (e.g. 112, 91 1 or ot her offici al emerge ncy numb er). Emer gency nu mbe rs va ry by l oca tion. 4. Pr ess the key. If certain features are in use, you m ay first need to turn those feature s off before you can make an em ergency call. Consult this guid e and your l ocal ce llular serv ice provi der. When mak ing an emergency call, rem ember to give all th e necessary in format ion as accurately a s possibl e. Rememb er that your wire less phone ma y b e the only mea ns of communica tion at the sce ne of an accide nt - do not cut off the call until given perm ission to do so.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION 165 IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION â C ert ific ati on i nfo rma tio n (S AR ) THIS MODEL PH ONE ME ETS THE EU R EQUIREMENTS FO R EXPOSUR E TO RADIO W AVES. Your mob ile phone is a radio tra nsmitter and receive r. It is desig ned and ma nufactured not to excee d the limits for expos ure to radi ofrequency ( RF) energy reco mmended by The Counci l of the Europ ean Union. Th ese limi ts are part of compreh ensive g uideline s and est ablish permi tted levels of RF energ y for the gen eral pop ulation. The guidel ines were deve loped b y inde penden t sc ientifi c orga nisat ions throug h peri odic a nd th orou gh eva luati on of sci entifi c studi es. The limi ts include a su bstantial s afety ma rgin desig ned to assure t he safety of a ll persons, reg ardless of age and hea lth. Th e e xpos ure sta nda rd for mobi le ph ones empl oys a un it of mea surem ent kno wn a s t he S pecif i c Ab sor pt io n Ra te, or SAR. Th e SAR limit r ecommended by The Council of the Europe an Union is 2. 0 W/kg.* Tes ts for SA R have been conduc ted usi ng st anda rd ope rati ng posi tions with t he pho ne t ransm itting a t its highes t certi fied p ower l evel i n all tested freq uency band s. Alt hough t he S AR is determ ined a t the highe st cer tified pow er leve l, t he act ual SA R leve l of the pho ne whil e operating can be well below the max imum value. Th is is becaus e the phone is designed to o p e r a t e a t m u l t i p l e p o w e r l e v e l s s o a s t o u s e o n l y t h e p o w e r r e q u i r e d t o r e a c h t h e n e t w o r k . I n g e n e r a l , t h e c l o s e r you are to a b ase station anten na, the low er the power outpu t. Before a phone model i s availab le for sale to the public, co mpliance with th e Europe an R&TTE direct ive must be shown . This dir ective inclu des as one essential r equireme nt the protecti o n of the health a nd the safety fo r the user and any other person. The hi ghest SAR value for thi s model phone w hen tested for us e at the ear is 0.59 W/kg. While there m ay be diffe rence s betw een the SAR leve ls of various phon es and at va rious posi tions, t hey a ll me et th e EU requirements for RF exposure. This product meets RF exposu re gui delines when used eit h er in the normal use positio n again st the ea r or whe n posit ioned at leas t 1.5 cm away fr om the body. When a carry case, belt clip or hol der is used for body-worn opera tion, i t sho uld n ot cont ain metal an d should pos ition the pr oduc t at le ast 1.5 c m aw ay fro m your bod y. * T he SAR limit fo r mob ile phon es use d by th e pub lic is 2.0 w atts/kil o gram (W/kg) av eraged over ten grams of tissue. The li mit incorpora tes a sub stantial marg in of safet y to give additi o nal protect ion for the public and to account for any varia tions in measureme nts. SAR value s may vary depe nding on nation al reportin g requir ements and the network ban d. For SAR inform ation in othe r re gion s plea se look unde r produ ct in form ation a t ww w.nok ia.co m.
DECLARAT ION OF CONFORMI TY We, NOKIA CORPORATION declare under our sole responsibility that th e product RH-12 is in conformity with the provisions of the follo wing Counc il Dir ecti ve: 1999/ 5/EC. A co py o f the D ecla ratio n of Co nf ormi ty ca n be fo und from http://www.nokia.com/pho nes/declaration_of_conformity/. Copy righ t é 20 04 Noki a. All ri ght s res erv ed. Repro du ction , tran sfer , di stri buti on or sto rage of par t or all of t he con tent s i n this docu ment i n any form wi tho ut the prio r w ritten permi ssi on of Noki a is pr ohi bit ed. Nokia, Nokia Connecti ng People, Xpress-on and Pop-Port are tr ademarks or registered tr ademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Nokia tune is a soun d mark of Nokia Corporation. US Pat ent No 58 18437 and o ther p endi ng pa tents. T 9 text inp ut soft ware C opy right (C) 19 97-200 4. T egic C omm unic ations, Inc. A ll rights reserv ed. Blue tooth i s a re gistere d trad emark of B luetoo th SIG , Inc. Inclu des RSA BS AFE cr ypt ograp hic or se curit y pr otoc ol so ftwar e fr om RSA S ecuri ty. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHIB ITED, EXCEPT FOR USE DIRECTL Y RELATED TO (A) DATA OR INFOR MATION (i) GENERATED BY AND OBTA INED WITHOUT CHARGE FROM A CONSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSIN ESS ENTERPRISE, A ND (ii) FOR PE RSONAL USE ONLY; AND (B) OTHER US ES SPECIFICALLY AND SEPARATELY LICENSED BY M PEG LA, L.L.C. Nok ia o perate s a pol icy of con ti nuou s deve lopme nt . Noki a res erv es th e righ t to ma ke chang es an d impr ovem ents to an y of th e products described in this document without prior notice. Und er no c irc um stan ce s s hal l N okia be re sp ons ibl e fo r a ny los s o f da ta or in com e or a ny s pe cial , in ci den tal, co ns eque nt ial or i ndi re ct dam ag es h o wsoe ve r ca us ed . The co nte nts o f thi s doc ument are prov ided "as is ". Ex cep t as requi red by appl ica ble law, no warr an ties of any kin d, ei ther exp res s or impl ie d, i ncludi ng, but no t li mit ed to, t he impli ed w arran ties of me rcha ntab ili ty an d fitn ess for a part icu lar pu rpos e, ar e mad e in relation to the accuracy, reliability or contents of this document. No kia reserves the right to revi se this document o r withdra w i t at any time without prior notice. The avail abi lit y of p art icula r pr oducts may vary b y re gion . Pleas e ch eck w ith th e Nok ia d ealer near est t o you .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 4 Co nte nt s Con ten ts FOR YOUR SAFETY ........................................ ............................................................ ............ ........... 12 General information ..................................... ............................................................ ........... ............ 15 Access co des ...................... ................................ ................ ................................. ............ .... ................................ ................ ............... 15 Security code ( 5 to 10 digi ts) .................... ................ ................................. ............................ .................... ................ ............... 15 PIN and P IN2 code s (4 t o 8 digits), Modul e PIN a nd S igning PIN ... ................................ ................ .............. .. ............... 15 PUK and PUK2 code s (8 digits) . ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............... 1 6 Barring passw ord (4 digits) ........................ ................................ ................. ........................... ..................... ............................... 16 Wallet code (4 to 10 digi ts) ....................... ................ ................................. ........................... ..................... ................ ............... 16 Downloadi ng con tent and applicati ons ..................... ................................. ................ ..................... ........... ................ ............... 16 Overview of t he function s of t he pho ne ................... ................ ................................. ..................... ........................... ............... 17 Nokia P C Su ite and Nokia Audio Mana ger ............................ ................. ................................ ............ .... ............................... 19 Shared me mory ............. ................ ................................ ................................. ................ .... ............................ ............................... 19 1. Getting started .......................................... .............................. ...................................... ............... 20 Installin g the SI M card and t he ba ttery .................... ................................. ................ ................... ............................. ............... 20 Charging the ba ttery ....................... ................................ ................ ................................. ... ............. ................................ ............... 21 Switching t he phone on and off .. ................................ ................ ................................. .............. .. ............................................... 22 Normal opera ting position ............ ................ ................................ ................................. ......... ....... ................ ............................... 22 Changing t he covers........ ................................ ................ ................................. ................... ............................. ................ ............... 23 Installing a multim edia card ......... ................................ ................ ................................. ......... ....................... ................ ............... 24 2. Your phone ................................................ ............................................................ ....... ................ 25 Keys and connecto rs ....................... ................ ................................ ................................. .... ............ ................................ ............... 25 Standby m ode ................... ................................ ................................ ................. ............... . ................................ ................ ............... 28 Wallp aper ........................ ................ ................................ ................................. ............. ... ................................ ................ ............... 29 Screen sav er ................................... ................ ................................ ................................ . ................ ................................ ............... 29
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 5 Co nte nt s Power sav ing .. ................................ ................ ................................ ................................. ................................ ............................... 29 Essen tial indicators ...... ................................ ................ ................................. .................... ............................ ............................... 29 Keypad lock (Key guard) .................. ................ ................................ ................. ...................... .......... ................................ ............... 32 Configurati on settings service...... ................................ ................ ................................. .......... ...................... ................ ............... 33 3. Call functions .............. ............................................................ .............................. ....... ................ 34 Making a call ..................... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ............... 34 Speed d ialling a phone num ber ................................ ................................. ................ ................. ............... ............... ................ 35 Answering or rejecting an incoming call .. ................................ ................. ................................ ..... ........... ............................... 35 Call waiti ng .................... ................................ ................................ ................. .............. .. ................................ ............................... 36 Option s during a call ....... ................................ ................................ ................. .................. .............. ................ ............................... 36 4. Writing text .............................................. ............................................................ ....... ................ 38 Setting p redictive text inp ut on o r off....... ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ............... 3 8 Using p redictive text inp ut............ ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............... 38 Writin g compound wo rds ........... ................................ ................ ................................. ............. ... ................................ ............... 39 Using tra ditional text inpu t .......................... ................ ................................. ........................ ........................ ............................... 39 Tips for writing text ......... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ............... 40 5. Using the menu......................................... ............................................................ .......... ............. 42 Accessing a men u function ........... ................ ................................ ................................. .......... ...... ................................ ............... 42 List of m enu functions .................... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............... 44 6. Menu functions ........................................ ............................................................ ........... ............ 50 Messages ............ ................................ ................................ ................ ........................... ...... ................ ................................ ............... 50 Text m essages ( SMS) ... ................................ ................ ................................. ........................ ........................ ............................... 50 Writing a nd se nding me ssages ............................................. ................. ................................ ..... ........... ............................... 51 Option s for sen ding a message ............................. ................................. ................ .................... ............ ................ ............... 51 Writing a nd se nding a SMS e-mail ...... ................................ ................. ................................ ........ ........ ............................... 52 Reading and replying to an S MS m essage o r an SMS e-m ail ....................... ................................ ................ . .............. 53 Inbox and sent items folders . ................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................................ ............... 5 4
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 6 Co nte nt s Distribution lists ........ ................ ................................ ................................. ................ .... ............................ ................ ............... 54 Templates .... ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ................. ............... ................ ............................... 55 Saved i tems fo lder and My fo lders ...... ................................ ................................. ................ ....... ......... ............................... 56 Deleting me ssages .................... ................ ................................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............... 56 Settings for tex t and SMS e -mail me ssages ..... ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ............... 57 Multim edia messages (M MS) .................... ................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ............................... 58 Writing a nd se nding a multim edia mess age ..... ................ ................................. ................................ . ............... ............... 59 Reading and replying to a multimedia message ............................... ................ ................................ .... ........................... 61 Inbox, Outbo x, Saved and Sent item s folders ................... ................. ................................ ................ ............................... 62 Multimed ia messag es memory full ...................... ................................. ................................ ......... ....................... ............... 63 Deleting me ssages .................... ................ ................................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............... 63 Settings for multim edia message s ....... ................ ................................. ................................ ....... ......... ............................... 63 E-mail messages ........... ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................ ............................... 65 Writing a nd se nding a n e-ma il ............................. ................................. ................................ .... ............ ............................... 66 Downloadi ng e-m ail mess ages from your e -mail ac count ............................ ................ ................................ ............... 67 Reading a nd rep lying to an e-m ail mess age ..... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............... 67 Inbox and Other folde rs (Drafts, Archive, Outbo x and Sent items) ............................. ................................ .. ............. 68 Deleting e-m ail messages ....... ................................ ................................. ................ ............... ................. ............................... 68 Settings for e-ma il.... ................................ ................................ ................. ....................... ......... ................ ............................... 68 Instant messag es (IM) . ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................... 71 Entering the insta nt mess ages me nu .. ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................... 73 Connecti ng to the instant messages serv ice and disconn ecting.. ................ ................................ ................. .............. 7 4 Starting an ins tant mes sages se ssion . ................................ ................................. ................ ......... ....................... ............... 7 4 Accepting or re jecting an instan t messages invitat ion.. ................. ................................ ....................... ........................ 75 Reading a n instant mes sage .................. ................................ ................................. ................ ............................................... 76 Participat ing in an insta nt mess ages co nversation .......................... ................................ ................ .... ........................... 76 Editing your own info rmation ............... ................ ................................. ................ ................... ............. ............................... 77 Contacts fo r insta nt messag ing ............................................ ................. ................................ .... ............................ ............... 77
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 7 Co nte nt s Blocking a nd unb locking m essa ges ..................... ................................. ................ ......................... ....... ................ ............... 78 Groups .......................... ................................ ................ ................................. .............. .. ................................ ............................... 79 Voice messa ges ............. ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ... ............................. ............................... 80 Info message s ................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................. .............. . ................................ ............... 8 0 Service commands ........ ................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............... 80 Call regi ster ........................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................... 81 Recen t calls lists ........... ................................ ................ ................................. ................. ............................... ............................... 81 Count ers and timers for calls, data and messag es ............. ................. ................................ ................. ............... ............... 82 Positi oning informa tion .............. ................................ ................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............... 82 Contacts .............................. ................................ ................ ................................. ........ ........ ................................ ............................... 83 Selecting settings for con tacts . ................ ................................ ................................. .............. .. ................................ ............... 8 3 Saving na mes and phone numbers (Add new c ontact) ..... ................................. ................ ......................... ...................... 84 Saving m ultiple numbers or text items per name ............... ................. ................................ ................. .............................. 84 Addin g an ima ge to a name or num ber in c ontacts ........... ................. ................................ .................... ........................... 85 Searchi ng for a contact .............. ................ ................................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............... 85 Deletin g contacts .......... ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................ ............................... 86 Editin g or d eleting d etails .......................... ................ ................................. ................ ......... ....................... ................ ............... 87 My pre sence ................... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............................... 87 Subs cribed nam es ......................... ................................ ................ ................................. ..... ........... ................................ ............... 89 Adding contact s to the subs cribed n ames ......................... ................................. ................ .............. .................. ............... 90 Viewing the subscri bed names .............. ................................ ................. ................................ .... ............................ ............... 90 Unsubs cribing a contact ......... ................ ................................ ................................. .............. .. ................ ............................... 91 Copyin g contacts .......................... ................ ................................ ................................. .... ............ ................ ............................... 91 Sendi ng and re ceiving a busine ss card... ................ ................................. ................ ...................... .......... ................ ............... 92 Speed d ials ...................... ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................... 93 Voice diall ing ................. ................ ................................ ................................. ............... . ................................ ................ ............... 9 3 Adding and m anaging voice tags ......................... ................................. ................ ....................... ......................... ............... 94 Making a call by using a voi ce ta g ...................... ................................. ................ ...................... .......... ................ ............... 94 Info numb ers and service numbers ......................................... ................. ................................ ..... ........................... ............... 95
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 8 Co nte nt s My num bers ... ................................ ................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................ ............................... 95 Caller g roups .................. ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................................ ............... 95 Settings .............. ................................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............... 96 Profiles ............................. ................................ ................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............................... 96 Tone s ettings .. ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ................................................ ............................... 97 Displa y settings ............................. ................................ ................ ................................. . ............... ................................ ............... 98 Time and da te settings ................................ ................................ ................. ........................ ........ ............... ................. ............... 9 9 Persona l shortc uts ........ ................................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................................ ............. 100 Right s election ke y ................... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 100 Voice com mands ....................................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............................. 100 Conne ctivity ................... ................................ ................ ................................. ............... . ................................ ................ ............. 10 1 Bluetoot h wireless technolog y .............................. ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............. 10 1 Bluetoot h connec tion .............. ................ ................................ ................. ................................ ................................ ............. 102 Bluetoot h settings .................................... ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 102 Infrared ........................................ ................................ ................ ............................... .. ................ ................................ ............. 10 3 (E)GPRS ........ ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ............... ................. ................ ............................. 104 (E)GPRS c onnect ion .. ................................ ................ ................................. .......................... ...................................... ............. 10 5 (E)GPRS m odem settings ......... ................ ................................ ................................. ............... . ................ ............................. 105 Call setting s.................... ................................ ................ ................................. ............. ................... ................ ............................. 10 6 Phone set tings ............................................... ................ ................................. ................. ............... ................ ............................. 108 IM and presen ce settings ........... ................ ................................ ................................. ........... ..... ................................ ............. 109 Enhanc ement settings . ................................ ................................ ................. ......................... ....... ................ ............................. 11 0 Security settings ........... ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............................. 111 Restore fact ory settings .............. ................................ ................ ................................. ........ ........ ................................ ............. 11 2 Operat or menu .. ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ............... . ................................................ ............. 11 2 Gallery ................. ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ...... .......................... ................ ............................. 11 2 Media ... ................................ ................ ................................ ................................. ...... .......... ................ ................................ ............. 11 5 Camera ............. ................................ ................ ................................ ............................ ..................... ................................ ............. 115 Taking a photo ........... ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................. 11 6
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 9 Co nte nt s Recording a vide o clip ............. ................ ................................ ................................. ........... ..... ................ ............................. 116 Camera settin gs ......... ................................ ................................ ................. ...................... .......... ................................ ............. 117 Media p layer .. ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ................................................ ................ ............. 11 8 Setting up the phon e for a streaming service .. ................ ................................. ................ ................ ................ ............. 118 Music p layer ................... ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............................. 11 9 Playing the mus ic tracks transfe rred to the p hone ......... ................................. ................ .................... ......................... 120 Settings for the music playe r ................................................ ................................. ................ . .............................. .............. 12 0 Radio ................ ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ......... ...... ................. ................................ ............. 12 1 Tuning a radio channel ............................................ ................ ................................. ............ .... ................................ ............. 12 2 Using the radio .......................................... ................................ ................. ..................... ........................... ............................. 12 2 Voice recorde r ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ................ ............... ................. ................ ............. 123 Recording .................... ................................ ................................ ................. ................. ............... ................ ............................. 123 List of re cordings ....... ................ ................................ ................ ................................. ..... ........................... ............................. 12 4 Defining store fol der ................ ................ ................................ ................................. ......... ....... ................ ................ ............. 124 Media e qualize r............. ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ................ ............. 12 4 Organiser ............ ................ ................................ ................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ................ ............. 12 5 Alarm clo ck..... ................ ................................ ................................ ................. .............. .................. ................ ............................. 125 When the alarm time expire s ................ ................................ ................. ................................ ... ............................ . ............. 125 Calend ar .......... ................................ ................ ................................ ............................. .... ................ ................................ ............. 12 6 Making a calen dar note .......... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 127 When the phone sound s an alarm for a note .................................... ................................ ................ .. ........................... 128 To-do list ......................... ................................ ................................ ................. ........... ..... ................................ ............................. 12 8 Notes ................ ................................ ................................ ................ .......................... ...... . ................................ ............................. 12 9 Wallet ............... ................................ ................ ................................ .......................... ....................... ................................ ............. 130 Accessing th e wallet menu .... ................................ ................................. ................ ................. ............................... ............. 13 0 Saving ca rd de tails.... ................................ ................................ ................. ....................... ......................... ............................. 13 1 Personal note s ............ ................ ................................ ................................. ................ .... ............................ ................ ............. 13 2 Creating a walle t profile ......................... ................ ................................. ................ ............ .................... ................ ............. 13 2 Wallet setting s ........... ................................ ................ ................................. .................... ............................ ............................. 13 3
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 10 Co nte nt s Guidelines for paying for your purchases with the wallet ............. ................................ ................ .......... ................... 133 Synchroni sation ............................................ ................ ................................. ................ ... ............................. ............................. 13 4 Synchroni sing from your phone ............................ ................ ................................. ................ ..... ........................... ............. 134 Settings for the synchro nisation .......... ................ ................................. ................................ .... ............ ............................. 13 5 Synchroni sing from your PC... ................................ ................ ................................. ................ . ............... ............................. 136 Applicati ons ....... ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ........... ..................... ................................ ............. 137 Games .............. ................ ................................ ................................ ................. ........... ..................... ................ ............................. 137 Launching a gam e ..................... ................................ ................ ................................. ......... ....... ................................ ............. 137 Other o ptions a vailable fo r a g ame or game s et.............. ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 13 7 Game downl oads ....... ................................ ................................ ................. ......................... ....... ................ ............................. 137 Memory status fo r game s ....... ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 13 8 Game setting s ............................ ................................ ................................. ................ ..... ........................... ................ ............. 13 8 Applica tions.................... ................ ................................ ................................. .............. .. ................................ ................ ............. 13 9 Launching an application ....... ................................ ................ ................................. ............... . ................................ ............. 13 9 Other o ptions a vailable fo r an applicat ion or a pplicati on set ...................... ................ ................................ ............. 139 Downloadi ng an a pplica tion .. ................................ ................ ................................. ................................ ............................. 140 Memory status fo r appli cations ............................................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 14 1 Calcula tor........................ ................ ................................ ................................. ............ .... ................................ ................ ............. 14 1 Count down timer .......... ................................ ................ ................................. ..................... ........................... ............................. 14 2 Stopw atch....... ................ ................................ ................................ ................. .............. .................. ................ ............................. 143 Web ...... ................ ................................ ................................ ................ ...................... ........... ................ ................................ ............. 14 4 Basic s teps for a ccessing and using s ervices ........................ ................................. ................ .......... ...................... ............. 14 4 Setting up the ph one for a service .......... ................................ ................. ................................ .. .............. ............................. 145 Keying in the service settings manu ally .............................................. ................................ .......... ...... ............................. 145 Making a conn ection to a service ............ ................ ................................. ................................ .. .............................. ............. 146 Browsing the p ages o f a s ervice ............................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............. 14 6 Using the phon e keys while browsing . ................ ................................. ................ .......................... ...................... ............. 147 Option s while browsing ........... ................ ................................ ................. ............................. ... ................ ............................. 147 Direct calling .............................. ................................ ................ ................................. .. .............................. ................ ............. 14 8
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Co nte nt s 11 Co nte nt s Disconn ect from a s ervice .......................... ................ ................................. ................................ ................ ............................. 148 Appeara nce settings of the brows er ....... ................................ ................................. ................ ..... ........................... ............. 148 Cookies ............................. ................ ................................ ................................. .......... ...... ................................ ................ ............. 14 9 Bookm arks ...................... ................................ ................................ ................. ............... ................. ................................ ............. 150 Receivin g a boo kmark .............................. ................ ................................. ............................ .................... ............................. 15 0 Downlo ading .................. ................................ ................................ ................. ................. ............................... ................ ............. 15 1 Service inbox .................. ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ................................................ ............. 151 Service inbox settings .............. ................ ................................ ................................. .......... ...... ................................ ............. 151 The cache memo ry ....... ................................ ................................ ................. ....................... ......... ................................ ............. 152 Browse r security ........... ................ ................................ ................................. ................ ... ............................. ................ ............. 15 2 Security mod ule ......................... ................ ................................ ................................. ...... .......... ................................ ............. 152 Certificate s .. ................................ ................ ................................ ................................. ................................ ............................. 153 Digital signa ture ........................ ................ ................................ ................................. ..... ........... ................ ............................. 154 SIM se rvices ....... ................................ ................................ ................ ................................. ................ ................................ ............. 15 5 7. PC Connectivity........... ............................................................ .............................. ......... ............ 156 PC Sui te............... ................................ ................ ................................ ........................ ......................... ................................ ............. 156 (E)GPRS, HS CSD and CSD ........................... ................................ ................. ............................. ... ................ ............................. 158 Using d ata comm unicatio n applica tions... ................ ................................. ................................ ...... .......... ................ ............. 15 8 8. Battery information .... .............................. ............................................................ ............ ......... 159 Charging and Discharging ............................. ................................ ................. ......................... ....... ................................ ............. 159 CARE AND M AINTENANCE ........................................................ .............................. ..................... 160 IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION ........... ............................................................ ..................... 161
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. FOR YOU R SA FET Y 12 FOR YOU R SA FET Y FOR Y OU R SAFETY Read these simple guideline s. Brea king t h e r u les ma y be dang erous or i llega l. Furt her detailed infor mation is given in this manual. Do not s witch t h e phon e on w hen wirel ess phone u se i s prohib ited or when i t may cause in terfe rence or dange r. RO AD SAFETY COME S FIRST Don't use a han d-held phone while drivin g. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interference, which could affect performance. SWIT CH OFF IN HO SPIT AL S Foll ow a ny regul ation s or rules. Switch the phone off nea r me dical e quipme nt. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRA FT Wireless devices can cause interference in ai rcraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLING Don't use th e phone at a refuell ing point. Don't u se near f uel or che micals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BL ASTING Don't use the pho ne where blasting is in pro gress. Observe restrictions, and follow a ny regulations or rules.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. FOR YOU R SA FET Y 13 FOR YOU R SA FET Y USE SEN SIB LY Use on ly in the norma l position. Don't t ouch the ant enna unn ecessaril y. QUALIFI ED S ERVICE Only quali fied pe rsonnel may i nstall o r repair pho ne equipme nt. ACCESSO RIES AND BATT ERIES Use only appro ved access ories and batte ries. Do not co nnect incomp atible p roducts. CONNECTING TO OTHER DE VICES When connecting to any other device, read its u ser's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect i ncompatibl e prod ucts. BACKUP COPI ES Reme mber to mak e back up co pies of all impor ta nt da ta. WATER-RESISTA NCE Your p hone is not water-re sistant. Keep it dry. CALLIN G Ensure the phone is swit ched on and in s ervice . Enter the phon e number, in cluding the area code, then press . To end a call, pres s . To answer a call, p ress . EMER GEN CY CAL LS Ensure the phone is switch ed on and in s ervic e. Pres s as many time s as ne eded (e .g. to e xit a ca ll, to exit a men u, etc.) to clear the di splay. En ter the e mergency number , then pre ss . Give your lo cation. Do not end the call u ntil to ld to do so.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. FOR YOU R SA FET Y 14 FOR YOU R SA FET Y â Netw ork Se rvice s The wireless phone des cribed in this g uide is appr oved for use on the EGSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 19 00 network. Triba nd is a network-d ependent featu re. Check with your local se rvice prov ider if you can subs cribe to and use this feature. This p hone s uppor ts W AP 2.0 protoco ls (H TTP a nd SSL) tha t run o n TCP/I P prot oco ls. Som e feat ures o f thi s phone, such as MMS (Mu ltimed ia Messagi ng Service), browsing, e-mail, in stant mes sages, pr esence-en hanced conta cts, re mote Sy ncM L, an d co nte nt do wnloa ding v ia bro wse r o r ove r M MS, req ui re n etw ork su ppo rt for t hes e techn ologie s. A number of feat u res i ncluded in th is gui de are ca lled Net work Services . Thes e are special s ervices that you arrange through your wirel e ss service pr ovider. Befo re you can take advantage of any of these Network Service s, you must subscribe to them through your s ervice provider and obtain instructions for their u se from your service provider. Note : So me netw orks m ay no t sup port a ll la nguag e-dep endent cha racte rs and /or s ervice s. â Abo ut a cce ssories Check the model number of any charger before u se with this device. Th is device is int ended for use when supplie d with po wer f rom ACP- 12, ACP-8 , A CP-7, LCH -9 an d LC H-1 2. Warn ing: U se on ly b atte ries, c harg ers a nd ac cess ories appro ved by the p hone manuf act urer f or use with this p arti cular p hon e mode l. The use of any oth er typ es may inva lidate any appro val or warr anty apply ing to the pho ne, an d may be dang erous . For ava ila bility of approve d acce ssori es, pleas e check wi th your deal er. A few practical rules for a ccessory operation ⢠Keep a ll accesso ries out of the reach of smal l children . ⢠Whe n you di sco nnect th e pow er c ord of a ny a ccessory , gras p and pull the pl ug, not the c ord. ⢠Chec k regularly th at any vehicle -installed acces sories are mo unted and are opera ting properl y. ⢠Insta llation of any complex car accessorie s must be made by qualif ied pers onnel only.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Ge neral inf ormat ion 15 Ge neral inf ormat ion Gener al inform ation â Ac cess cod es Secu rit y code (5 to 10 dig its ) The security code protect s your phone against unaut horised use. The pre-set code is 12345. Change the code, and keep the ne w code se cret and in a safe place separate from your phone. T o change the code, and to s et the phone to request the code, see Sec urity settings on page 111. If you k ey in an incorrect s ecurit y code f ive time s in succession, t he phone ignor es further ent ries of the code. Wa it for 5 minutes and key in the c ode again. PIN and PIN 2 co des (4 to 8 di git s) , Modu le PI N an d Si gni ng PIN ⢠The PIN (Personal Ident ification Number) c ode protects your SIM card a gainst unauthorised use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. Set the phone to request the PIN code each time the phone is s witched on, see Securit y settings on pa ge 111. ⢠The PIN2 code may be supplied with the SIM card and is r equired to access some functions, such as call counters. ⢠The module PIN is required to acc ess the infor m ation in the s ecurity module. See Se curity module on page 152. The module PIN is s upplied with the S IM card if the SIM c ard has a s ecurity module in it. ⢠The signing PIN is required for th e digital signature. See Digital signature on page 154. T he signing PIN is supplied w ith the SIM car d if the SIM c ard has a secur ity module in it .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Ge neral inf ormat ion 16 Ge neral inf ormat ion If you key in an inc orrect PIN code three times in succession, the phone may dis play PIN block ed or PIN code blocked , for example, and ask y ou to enter the PUK code. PUK an d PUK 2 codes (8 digi ts) The PUK (Personal U nblocking Key) c ode is requir ed to change a bl ocked PIN code. The PU K2 code is required to change a blocked PIN 2 code. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM car d, co ntact your local service provider for the codes. Barri ng pass word (4 dig its ) The barring password is required when using the Call barring servic e , see Security settings on page 111. You can obtai n the password from your service provider. Wall et cod e ( 4 to 10 d i git s) The wallet code is re quired to acc ess the wal let servic es. If you k ey in an inc orrect w allet code three times in succ ession, the w allet application is blocked for five minut es. Next three incorrec t entries of the code will duplic ate the t ime. For further information, see Wallet on page 130. â Dow nloa ding c onte nt and a pplicat ions You may be able to download new content (for example images and video clips) and applications into the phone (network service). 1. Select the download f unction for example in the Collection and Gallery menu. To acce ss the download function, see the r espective menu desc riptions. A list of bookmarks is shown. Select More bookmarks if you want to vi ew the bookmar ks available in the We b menu.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Ge neral inf ormat ion 17 Ge neral inf ormat ion 2. Select the bookmar k of the brows er page you want to access. If the connection fails, change the active set of connect ion settings in t he Web menu and try t he connect ion again. Follow the instructions provide d by the web service. For the av ailability of diff erent services, pricing a nd tariffs, cont act your ne twork operator and/or the service provider. Note tha t Nokia d oes not w arrant for a pplicatio ns from non -Nokia s ites. If you choos e to downl oad Ja va appli cati ons from them , yo u should take the same precaut ions , for securi ty or c ontent , as you w ould wi th any s ite. â Ov ervi ew of t he func tions of the phone The Nokia 6230 phone provides many f unctions that are pra ctical for daily use, such as a calendar, a clock, an alarm clock, a r adio, a music player, an d a built-in camera. The camera can be used f or recording video clips and taking pictures that you can, for example, attach as wallpapers in standby mode or as thumbnail pic tures in Contacts . See Camera on page 115. Also, a range of Nokia Xpress- on TM colour cove rs is availa ble for your phone. To ch ange the covers, see Changing the covers on page 23. Your phone also s upports ⢠EDGE ( Enhanced Data rates f or GSM Evolution), see (E)G PRS on page 104. ⢠Multimedia messaging ser vice (MMS) and is a ble to send a nd receive multimedia me ssages composed of t ext, a pict ure, a sound clip and a v ideo clip. You can s ave the pictures and ringing tones for personalising your phone. See Multimedia messages (MMS) on page 58. ⢠xHTML browser that enables you t o fetch more colourful and r icher graphical co ntent from web servers and t o view it. See Web on page 144.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Ge neral inf ormat ion 18 Ge neral inf ormat ion ⢠E-mail function to receive, r ead and send e-mails. See E- mail messages on page 65. ⢠Presence-enhance d contacts that enables you to convenient ly share yo ur availability information with your c olleagues, family and friends. See My presence on pa ge 87. ⢠Instant messages , which is a w ay of s ending short text me ssages that a re delivered immediately to online users. See Ins tant messages (IM) on page 71. ⢠Polyphonic sound (MIDI) that consists of several sound components play ed at the s ame time. The phone has sound components from over 128 ins truments, but it can play up to 24 instr uments at the same time. Poly phonic sounds are used in ringing t ones and me ssage alert tones. The phone supports Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI) format. ⢠Java 2 Micro Edition, J2ME TM , and includes some Java a pplications an d games that have been specially designed for mobile phones. You can download new applicat ions and games to your phone, see Applications on page 137. ⢠Bluetooth technology, t hat enables wir eless connect ions between electronic dev ices at a range of maximum 10 metres. T here is no charge to connec t devices v ia Bluetooth technology. A Bluetooth connection can be used to send business card s, calendar notes , graphics, pic tures, video clips or tones. Use th e phone as modem for data dialup connections or to connect wireless to Bluet ooth accessories . In some countries, there may be restrict ions on using Bluetooth dev ices. Check with your de aler and the local authorities. See also Bluetooth wireles s technology on page 101. ⢠Multimedia card t o extent the me mory capa city of your phone to stor e pictures, vide o clips, for example.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Ge neral inf ormat ion 19 Ge neral inf ormat ion Nok ia PC Sui te an d Noki a Audi o Man ager The CD-ROM supplie d with the phone contains the Nokia PC Suit e software which includes an extensive colle ction of diff erent applications. With these applic ations you can, for e xample, creat e new ri nging tones, manage t he photos and v ideo clips captur ed with the phone âÂÂs camera, and install new Java TM applications to your phone. With the Nokia Audio Manager application you can transfer AAC or MP3 music files from a compatible PC to your phone via the USB cable (DKU-2). You c an also create play lists of your music files and s ave your CD audio files in AAC format and transfer them to your phone. You ca n then play the music files in your phoneâÂÂs Music player menu. Nokia PC Suite is als o available on NokiaâÂÂs Web sit e at www.nok ia.com. For more infor mation, refer t o the documen tation and Help fi les that come wit h Nokia PC Suite and Nokia Audio Manager. Shar ed memory The following f eatures in this phone may shar e memory: contacts, text, instant messages and multimedia message s, e-mails, voi ce tags and SMS di stribution lists, calendar, to-do notes, and Java games and appl ications, and note applic ation. Using a ny such feature s may reduce the memory available for any features sharing memory . This is es pecially tr ue with heav y use of any of the f eatures (although some of the features may have a c ertain amount of memory specially allotted to t hem in addition to t he amount of memory shared with other fea tures). For ex ample, saving many java applications, et c., may take all of the shared memory and your phone may dis play a mes sage that t he memory is fu ll. In this ca se, delet e some of the inf ormation or ent ries store d in the shar ed memory features before continuing. Note that gallery fi les share a different me mory, for further informat ion see Ga llery on page 112.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Getting s tarted 20 Getting s tarted 1. Gett in g s tar ted â Ins tallin g the SI M card and th e batte ry Keep all min iature S IM cards out of th e reach of small ch ildre n. The SIM card and its contact s can e asily be damaged by sc ratches or bending, s o be car eful when handling, inserting or removing the card. Before installing the SIM card, always make sure that the phone is switched off and disconnected from any enhancement and then remove the battery. 1. To remove the bac k cover of t he phone: With the ba ck of the phone facing you, push t he back c over release button (1). 2. Slide the back c over to remove it from the phone (2). 3. Remove the battery by lifting it as shown(3). 4. To r elease the SIM card holder, gently pull the locking clip of t he car d holder and open it (4).
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Getting s tarted 21 Getting s tarted 5. Inse rt the SIM card into the SIM card holder (5). Make sure t hat the SIM card is properly inserted and that the golden contact area on the card is facing downwards. 6. Close the SIM card holder (6) and press it unt il it snaps into position. 7. Replace the battery (7) . 8. Slide the back c over into its place (8). â Chargi ng the ba ttery 1. Conn e ct the l ead fro m the char ger to the socket on th e bottom of your phone. 2. Conn e ct the c harge r to an AC wall soc ket. The text Charging is displayed briefly if t he phone is switched on. If the battery is completely flat, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator app ears on the display or befor e any call s can be made. You can use the phone whil e the cha rger is connect ed. The charging time depends on the charger and the battery used. For example, charging a BL5-C battery with the ACP-12 cha rger takes approx imately one hour and 30 minutes while the phone is in standby mode.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Getting s tarted 22 Getting s tarted â Swi tching t he pho ne on an d off Warn ing: D o n ot sw itch th e phon e on w hen w irel ess phon e use is prohib ited o r wh en it ma y cau se inter ference o r danger. Press and hold the power k ey as shown. Note that if t he phone display s In se r t SI M ca rd even though the SIM card is properly inserted, or SIM card not supported , contact your network operator or service provider. Your phone does not support 5-Volt SIM cards and the card may need to be changed. ⢠If the phone as ks for a PIN code , key in the PIN code (f or example, dis played as ****), a nd press OK . See also PIN code request in Security se ttings on page 111 and Access codes on page 15. ⢠If the phone as ks for a securit y code, ke y in the sec urity code (for example, dis played as *****), and press OK . See also Access cod es on page 15. â Norm al ope rati ng pos ition Use th e phone only in it s normal o perating position . Your pho ne ha s a bu ilt-i n ant enna. As wit h any ot her ra dio transm itting d evice , do not to uch the antenna unnecessaril y w hen the p hone is switched on. Contact w ith the anten na affects call qu ality and may caus e the phone to operate at a higher power le vel than otherwis e needed . Not tou ching the ante nna area during a phone call optimi s es the ante n na performance a nd the talkti me of your phone.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Getting s tarted 23 Getting s tarted â Ch ang ing the co vers Before changing the cove r, always switch off the power and di sco nnect t he pho ne fr om the cha rger o r an y othe r devi ce. Avoid touch ing elect ronic comp onents whil e changing the co vers. Alwa ys store an d use the phon e with the covers att ached. 1. Remove the back cover from t he phone. See step 1 in Ins talling the SIM card and t he battery on page 20. 2. Gently remove the front cover from the phone. For this gently prise the front cove r away from the phone beginning at the top of the phone (1) and detach the front cover (2). 3. Remove the key mat from the f ront cover by pressing it gently out (3). 4. Place the key mat in t he new f ront cover (4). 5. Press t he key mat gent ly in (5).
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Getting s tarted 24 Getting s tarted 6. Replace the front cov er by press ing it gently on the phone, be ginning from the bottom (6). 7. Replace the back cover of the phone. See step 8 in Installing the SIM ca rd and the battery on page 20. â Ins tallin g a mu ltime dia card Use only comp atible multime d ia cards (MMC) with this device . Other memory ca rds, such as Secure Dig ital (SD) cards , do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compatibl e with this devi ce. Usin g an incomp atible memory ca rd ma y d amage t he m emory c ard as well as p hone, and data stored on the in compatible ca rd may be corru pted. 1. Remove the back cover and battery from the phone. See step 1 and 2 in Installing t he SIM car d and the battery on page 20. 2. Place the multimedia card in the card holder . Make sure that the multimedia card is pr operly inserted and that the golden contact area on the car d is facing downwards. 3. Replace the battery and back cover of the phone. Se e step 7 and 8 in Installing the SIM car d and t he battery on pa ge 20. The multimedia car d can be used in menu Gallery as a separate folder. Refer also to the options in Gallery , see Gallery on page 112.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 25 Your phone 2. Y our pho ne â Key s and c on ne c to rs 1. Power k ey Switches the phone on and off . When the k eypad is locked, pre ssing the power ke y briefly turns the phoneâÂÂs display lights on f or approximately 15 seconds. 2. Earpiece 3. Volume keys Adjust the volume of the earpiece or the loudspeaker, or the headset when it is c onnected to th e phone. 4. Loudspeaker 5. Selection k eys and , middle selection key The function of these k eys depends on t he guiding te xt shown on the display above t he keys. Se e Standby mode on page 28. Pres sing the middle selection k ey briefly in the middle selec ts the menu item or confir ms a sele cti on.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 26 Your phone 6. 4-way navigation key , , , Enables naviga tion through names, phone numbers, menus or settings. The 4-way navigation and selection key is als o used to move the cursor up and down, left and right when writ ing text, us ing the cal endar, and in some game applicat ions. 7. dials a phone number, and answers a call. In standby mode it shows the list of the most recently called numbers. 8. ends an active c all. Exits from any function. 9. - enter numbers and characters. and are used for various purposes in different functions. 10. Charger connector 11. Pop-Port TM connector used, for example, f or headsets and the data cable. Connect an e nhancement t o the Pop-Port c onnector as shown in the picture. 12. Infrared (IR) port
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 27 Your phone 13. Camer a lens on the ba ck cover of the p hone.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 28 Your phone â Sta ndb y mode When the phone is ready for use, and yo u have not keye d in any char acters, t he phone is in standby mode. 1. Shows t he name of the network or t he opera tor logo to indicat e in which cellular network the phone is cur rently be ing used. 2. Shows the signal strength of the cellular network at your current location. The higher the bar, t he stronge r the signal. 3. Shows the battery charge level. The highe r the bar, t he more power in the battery 4. The left selection key in standby mode is Go to . Press Go t o t o view the f unctions in personal shortcut list. Select a function to act ivate it. Press Options and select ⢠Select options to view the list of a vailable functions that you can add. Scroll to the des ired function and press Ma rk to add it to the s hortcut list. To remove a function from the list, press Unmark . ⢠Organise to rearrange t he functions on your personal s hortcut list. Selec t the desired function and press Move , then select where you want to mov e the funct ion. If you for s ome reason have deleted the content of the Go t o menu, press Ad d to add a f unction. 5. The middle selection k ey in standby mode is Menu . 6. The right selection k ey in standby mode is Name s to acce ss the Co nt ac t s menu or another shortcut to a function you have s elected. See Personal shor tcuts on page 100. Or it has an operator specific name to acces s an oper ator specific web site. See also Essential indicators on page 29.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 29 Your phone Wallpaper You can set y our phone to dis play a back ground picture, wallpa per, when the phone is in s tandby mode. See Displa y settings on page 98. Screen saver You can set y our phone to dis play a scre en saver, w hen the phone is in standby mode. See Display settings on page 98. Pow er sav ing For power saving a digital clock view overwrit es the display when no f unction of the phone has bee n used for a certain pe riod of time. Pr ess any k ey to de activate t he screen sav er. If you have not set the t ime, 00:00 is displayed. To set t he time, see Time and date settings on page 99. In addition you can set a screen saver f rom Gallery . See Display sett ings on page 98. Essenti al indicators You have received one or several text or picture messages. See Reading and replying to an SMS message or an SMS e- mail on page 53. You have rec eived one or several multimedia messages. See Reading an d replying to a multimedia message on page 61. The phone has registered a mis sed call. See Call register on page 81.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 30 Your phone or Your phone is connected to the instant messages serv ice and the availability status is online or offline, res pectively. See Connecting t o the instant me ssages service and disconnecting on page 74. You have r eceived one or several i nstant messages and you ar e connected t o the ins tant messages ser vice. See Connecting to the ins tant messag es service and dis connecting on page 74. The phoneâÂÂs keypad is loc ked. See Keypad lock (Keyguard) on page 32. The phone does not ring for an incoming call or text message when Incoming call alert is set to Off and Message ale rt tone is se t to Of f . See Tone sett ings on page 97. The alarm c lock is set to On . See Alarm clock on page 125. The countdown timer is running. See Countdown t imer on page 142. The stopwatch is running in t he background. See Stopwatch on page 143. When the (E)GPRS connec tion mode Alway s online is s elected and the (E)GPRS service is available, the indicator is shown on the top left of the dis play. Refer to (E)GPRS connection on page 105. When a (E)GPRS connec tion is established, the indic ator is shown on t he top left of the display. Refer to (E)GPRS connection on page 105 and Browsing the pages of a service on page 146. The (E)GPRS connection is s uspended (on hold), for ex ample if ther e is an incoming or outgoing call dur ing a (E)GPRS dial-up conne ction. The indicator is shown on the top r ight of the display.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 31 Your phone Infrared connection indicator, se e Infrared on page 103. All your calls are diverted to another number, Dive rt all voic e calls . If y ou have two phone lines, the divert indicator for the f irst line is and for the second line . See C all settings on page 106. or If you have two phone lines, the indicator displays the selected phone line. See Call settings on page 106. The louds peaker has bee n activated, see Options dur ing a call on page 36. Calls are limi ted to a clos ed user group. Se e Security settings on page 111. The timed pr ofile is s elected. See Pr ofiles on page 96. , , or A headset, hands free, loopset or music s tand is connected t o the p hone. Bluetooth connection indicator. See Blue tooth wireless technology on page 101 . To set the phone to show the time and da te in standby mode, see Time and date s ettings on page 99.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 32 Your phone â Key pad lo ck (K eyguard) You can lock t he keypad t o prevent the keys being accidentally pres sed, for example, when your phone is in your handbag. ⢠Locking the keypad In s tandby mode, press Me nu and then wit hin 1.5 seconds. ⢠Unlocking the keypad Press Unlock and then within 1.5 seconds, or if the Security ke yguard is set On , press Unlock and key in t he security code. To answer a call when t he keyguard is on, pre ss . During a c all, the phone can be oper ated normally. When you e nd or reject t he call, t he keypad will automati cally be locked. For Automatic keyguard and Securi ty keygu ard , s ee Phone settings on page 108. For the s ecurity code se e Security code (5 to 10 digits) on page 15. For locking t he keypad dur ing a call, see Options dur ing a call on page 36. Note : When Keyguard is on, calls may b e possible to the emergency nu mber programmed i nto your phone (e.g. 112, 911 or o ther officia l emergenc y numbe r). Key in the emerge ncy numb er and pre ss . The number is displa yed only af ter you have keyed in its last digit.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Your phone 33 Your phone â Confi gurat ion sett ings se rvice In order to use MMS, (E)GPRS and other wireless service s, you need to have pr oper connection settings on your phone. You may rece ive the settings directly as an c onfiguration message and you need t o save the settings on your phone. For more informat ion on the availabilit y of the settings, cont act your network operator, service p rovider or near est authorised Nok ia dealer. You may be able to receiv e the c onnection settings for (E)GPRS, mult imedia messages , synchronisation, E-mail, ins tant messages and presence and for br owser. When you have r eceived the connection s ettings as a c onfiguration message , and the settings are not automatically saved and ac tivated, Connection se ttings received is displayed. ⢠To save the received s ettings, press O ptions and select Sav e . If the phone asks Enter settings' PIN: , key in t he PIN code for the settings and pr ess OK . For availabilit y of the PIN code, c ontact the service provider that supplies the settings. If no settings are saved yet, these settings are saved under t he first free connection set. ⢠To view the receiv ed setti ngs fi rst, press Options and select View . To save the se ttings, press Save . ⢠To discard the received settings, press O ptions and se lect Disca rd . To activate the settings , see, for ex ample Making a connecti on to a ser vice on page 146.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Call functions 34 Call functions 3. Call fu ncti on s â Making a call 1. Key in the phone number, including the area code . I f you key in an in correc t charact er, pres s Clear to delete it. For international calls, pres s twice for the international prefix (the character r eplaces the international acces s code) and then k ey in the count ry code, the area code without the le ading 0, if necessary, and the phone number . 2. Press t o call the number. 3. Press to end the c all or to ca ncel the c all attempt. See also Options during a call on page 36. Making a call using the cont acts To search for a name/phone number that you have saved in Contacts , see Searching for a contact on page 85. Press to call the number. Last number redialling In s tandby mode, press once to access the list of up to 20 numbers you las t called or atte mpted to call. Scroll to the number or name you want, and press to call the number. Calling your voice mailbox In standby mode, press and hold , or press and . If the phone as ks for the voice mailbox number, key it in and pr ess OK . See also Voice messages on page 80.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Call functions 35 Call functions Spee d dia llin g a phon e number Before you can use spe ed dialling, assign a phone number to o ne of the speed-dialling key s, from to , see Spee d dials on page 93. Call the number in either o f the following way s: ⢠Press the s peed-dialling key that you want and then press . â¢I f Speed dialling is set to on, press and hold a speed-dia lling key unt il the ca ll is started. See Call settings on page 106 . â An swe ring or re ject ing an incom ing ca ll Press to answer an incoming call and press t o end the call. Press to reject an incoming ca ll. If you pres s Silen ce , only the ringing tone is muted. Then either a nswer or reje ct the call. If a compatible headset s upplied with the headset key is connected t o the phone, you can ans wer and end a call by pressing t he key. Tip: If the Divert if busy function is activated to diver t the calls , for ex ample to your voice mailbox, rejec ting an incoming call w ill also dive rt the call. Se e Call settings on p age 106. Note that when somebo dy is calling you, the phone s hows the callerâÂÂs na me, phone number or the text Private number or Call . If mor e than one name is found in Contacts with the same seven last digits of the phone number as the caller âÂÂs number, only the phone number will be displa yed, if this is available. The phone may display an incorrect name, if the caller âÂÂs number is not saved in Contacts but th e re is another name saved with the same seven l ast digits in t he phone number as in the phone number of the caller.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Call functions 36 Call functions Call waiting During a call, press to ans wer the wai ting call. The first c all is put on hold. Press to end the active call. To a cti v ate th e Call waiting function, see Call se ttings on page 106. â Options d uring a cal l Many of the opt ions that you can use during a call are network se rvices. For av ailability, contact your network operator or service provide r. Press Options during a ca ll for some of the following opt ions: ⢠Mut e or Unmu t e , End call , End all calls , Cont act s , Menu , H old or Unhold , New call , Private c all , Record , Answer and Reject . ⢠Conference to make a confe rence call t hat allows up t o five per sons to take part in a conference call. During a call, make a call to a new par ticipant ( New call ). The fir st call is put on hold. When the new call has been answere d, select Conference to include the first participant in the conference call. To hav e a privat e conversation wit h one of the participants, select Private call a nd sele ct the desired participant. To rejoin the conference call, select Conference . ⢠Lock keypa d to act ivate t he keypad lock. ⢠Send DTMF to send DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequenc y) tone strings, for example, pa sswords or bank account numbers. The DTMF system is used by a ll touch-tone telephones . Key in the D TMF string or search for it in Contac ts and press DT MF . Note that you can key in the wait characte r w and the pause character p by repeatedly pressing . ⢠Swap to switch between the active call and the call on hold, Tra n s fe r to connect a call on hold to an active call, and disconnect yourself from the calls.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Call functions 37 Call functions ⢠Loudspeaker to use your phone as a loudspeak er during a call. D o not hold the phone to yo ur ear during loudspeaker oper ation. To act ivate/deactiv ate the loudspe aker, selec t Loudspeaker / Handset or press Loudsp . / Nor mal . The loudspeaker is automatically dea ctivated when you end the call or call attempt or connect the handsfree unit or headset t o the phone. If you have co nnected a c ompatible handsfree unit or the heads et to the phone, Handset in the options list is replaced with Handsfree or He adset and the s elect ion key Normal with Hands f. or Heads . , r espectively . Using the loudspeake r with the r adio or the music pla yer, see Usi ng the radio on page 122 or Mus ic player on page 119 .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Wr itin g te xt 38 Wr itin g te xt 4. Writing t ext You can key in text, f or example, w hen writ ing messages, using t raditional or pr edictive text input. When you are w riting text, th e predictive text input is indicated by and the t raditional text input by at the t op left of t he display. The char acter case is indicated by , , or nex t to the text input indicat or. You can change the charact er case by pressing . The number mode is indicated by , and you can change bet ween the letter and number mode by pressing and holding . â Set ting p red ictiv e text in put on or off When writing text, press Op tions and select Dictionary . ⢠To set th e predictive text input on, s elect a language in t he dictionary options list. Pre dictive text input is only av ailable for th e languages on the list. ⢠To revert to t raditional text input, select D ictionary of f . Tip : To quickly set the predic tive text input on or off when wr iting text, pr ess twice, or press and hold Options . â Us ing pre dicti ve te xt inp ut You can key in any letter with a single keypr ess. The predictive text input is based on a built-in dictionary to whic h you can also add new words. 1. Start wr iting a wor d using the key s to . Pres s each key only once for one le tter. T he word change s after eac h keystr oke.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Wr itin g te xt 39 Wr itin g te xt Example: To write Nokia when t he English dictionar y is selec ted, press , , , an d . For more instruct ions for wr iting text, see Tips for wr iting text on page 40. 2. When you ha ve finis hed writing the w ord and it is correct , confirm it by adding a space wit h or by pressing any of the s croll keys . Pressing a scroll key also moves the curs or. If the word is not corr ect, press repeatedly or press Options an d select Matches . Wh e n the word that you want appears, confirm it. If the ? c haracter is displayed after the w ord, the wor d you intended t o write is not i n the dictionar y. To add the wor d to the dic tionary, press Spell , key in the wo rd (traditional t ext input is used) and press Save . When the dict ionary b ecomes full, t he new word r eplaces the oldest one that was added. 3. Start writ ing the nex t word. Writing compound words Key in the first part of the word and confirm it by pressing . Write the last par t of the w ord and confirm the word. â Using tra dit ion al text in put Press a numbe r key, to , repeate dly until the des ired charac ter appears. Not all charact ers available under a number key are print ed on the key. The character s available depend on the language selected in t he Phone language menu, see Phone settings on page 108. ⢠If the next letter you w ant is located on the same key as the pr esent one, wait until the c ursor appears, or pr ess any of the scroll key s and t hen key in t he letter.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Wr itin g te xt 40 Wr itin g te xt ⢠The most c ommon punctuation marks and special characters are available under the numbe r key . For more instruct ions for wr iting text, see Tips for wr iting text on page 40. â Tips for w rit ing text The following functi ons may also be available for writing tex t: ⢠To insert a s pace, pr ess . ⢠To move the c ursor to the left, r ight, down or up, press the s croll keys , , or , re spec tiv el y. ⢠To insert a number while in letter mode, pr ess and hold t he desired number k ey. ⢠To delete a c haracter to the left of the cursor, press Clear . Press and hold Clear to dele te the characters more quickly. To delete all t he char acters at once when writ ing a message, pr ess Options and select Clear te xt . ⢠To insert a wor d when us ing the predictive text input, press Options and select Insert word . Write the word using the traditional text input and pr ess Save . The word is also adde d to t he dictionary. ⢠To insert a s pecial char acter when using the tra ditional t ext input, pres s , or when using the predictive text input, press and hold , or press Options and selec t Insert symbol . Press any of the scroll keys to s croll to a character and press Us e to selec t the cha rac ter . You can also scroll to a character by pressing , , or , and select t he character by pressing .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Wr itin g te xt 41 Wr itin g te xt ⢠To insert a s miley when us ing the traditional text input, pr ess twic e, or when using the predictive text input, press and hold and press again, or press Options and select Insert smiley . Press any of the scroll keys to s croll to a smiley and pres s Us e to s elect the s miley. You can also scroll to a smiley by pr essing , , or , and select t he smiley b y pressing . The following options are available when writing text messages: ⢠To insert a number while in letter mode, pr ess Options and select Insert number. Key i n the phone number or sear ch for it in Contacts and press OK . ⢠To insert a name from Co nt ac t s , pres s Options and select Ins ert contact . T o insert a phone number or a text item attached to the name, press Options an d se lec t View details .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 42 Using the menu 5. Usin g th e m enu The phone off ers you an ex tensive range of functions, which a re grouped int o menus. Most of the menu functions are provided with a brief help text. To view the help text, s croll to the me nu function you want and wait for 15 s econds. To exit the help text, pres s Back . See Phone settings on page 108. â Ac cess ing a menu fu nctio n By scrolling 1. To access the menu, press Menu . 2. Scroll wit h or t hrough the menu (or w ith any of the scroll k eys if t he grid menu view is selected) and s elect, for e xample, Settings by pressing Select . To change the menu view, see Menu view in Display s ettings on page 98. 3. If the menu contains submenus, select the one that you want, for example Call settings . 4. If the selected s ubmenu contains further submenus , repeat step 3. Selec t the next submenu, for example Anykey answer . 5. Select t he setting of your choic e. 6. Press Back to return to the pr evious menu level, and Exit t o exit the menu. By using a shor tcut Menus and opt ions are numbered s o that you ca n quickl y keyâÂÂpress your way t o an option. The numbers appear in t he top right cor ner of the display and s how your locat ion in the menu. Press Menu , and within 1.5 s econds start keying in the number of the menu function you want to access .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 43 Using the menu If the shortcut you w ant to us e has menu numbers that are lower t han 10, make sure to us e a zero in front of the numbers . For example, t o personalise the Silent prof ile: 1. To access the menu, press Menu . 2. Within 1.5 seconds start keying in the numbers 04 01 02 02.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 44 Using the menu â Lis t of me nu fu nc tions ⢠Messages 1. Text messages 1. Creat e message 2. Inbox 3. Cr eate SMS e-mail 4. Sent items 5. Saved text msgs. 6. Te mplates 7. My folders 8. Distribution lists 9. Delete me ssages 2. Multime dia msgs. 1. Creat e message 2. Inbox 3. Outbox 4. Sent items 5. Saved items 6. Delete me ssages 3. E-mail 1. Create e- mail 2. Retrieve 3. Inbox 4. Other folders 5. Other options 4. In stan t mess age s 1 1. L ogin 2. Saved conve rs. 3. Connect . settings 5. Voice messages 1. Lis ten to voice messages 2. Voice mailbox n umber 6. Info messages 1. Info se rvice 2. T opic s 3. La nguage 4. Inf o topics saved on SIM card 5. Read 2 7. Message s ettings 1. Text messages 2. Multimedi a msgs. 3. E-mail messages 4. Other s ettings 8. Service commands 1. For ava ilabi lity , contac t your ne twor k operato r or serv ice prov ider. 2. This menu is show n onl y if any info me ssag es are r ece ive d.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 45 Using the menu ⢠Call register 1. Miss ed calls 2. Received c alls 3. D ialled numbers 4. Delete recent c all lists 1. All 2. Mis sed 3. Received 4. Dialled 5. Call dur ation 1. Last ca ll duration 2. Received c alls' duration 3. Dialled calls ' duration 4. All c alls' duration 5. Clear timers 6. GPRS data counter 1. D ata sent in las t session 2. Data receiv ed in last s ession 3. All s ent data 4. All received data 5. Clear c ounters 7. GPRS connect ion timer 1. D uration of last session 2. D uration of all sessions 3. Clear timers 8. Message count er 1. Sent messages 2. Received message s 3. Clear counters 9. P ositioning ⢠Contacts 1. Search 2. Add new contact 3. Delete 4. My presence 5. Subscribed names 6. Copy 7. Settings 1. Memory in use 2. Contac ts view 3. Memory s tatus 8. Speed dia ls 9. Voice t ags
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 46 Using the menu 10.Info numbers 1 11.Service numbers 1 12.My numbers 2 13.Caller groups 2 ⢠Settings 1. Profiles 1. General 2. Silent 3. Meeting 4. Outdoor 5. P ager 2. Tone settings 1. Incoming call alert 2. Ringing t one 3. Ringing v olume 4. Vibrating alert 5. Mes sage alert tone 6. Insta nt mess a ge a lert to ne 7. Keypad tones 8. Warning tones 9. Alert for 3. D isplay settings 1. W allpaper 2. Colour schemes 3. Menu vie w 4. Operator logo 5. Screen save r 4. Time and date settings 1. Clock 2. Dat e 3. Auto- update of date & t ime 5. Pe rsonal short cuts 1. Right selection key 2. Voice commands 6. Connectivity 1. Bluet ooth 2. Infr ared 3. G PRS 7. Call settings 1. Call divert 2. Anykey answer 3. Automatic redial 4. Speed dialling 5. Call waiting 6. Summary after call 7. Send my calle r ID 8. Line for outgoing calls 3 1. Shown if sup porte d by yo u r SI M card . Fo r ava ilabi lit y, co ntact yo ur n etwork o perator or ser vice prov ide r. 2. If In fo numbe rs , Ser vice numb ers or both are n ot su pport ed, the nu mber of th is me nu i tem ch anges accor dingly. 3. For ava ilabi lity , contac t your ne twor k operato r or serv ice prov ider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 47 Using the menu 8. Phone s ettings 1. Phone language 2. Memory status 3. Auto ma t ic k eyg ua rd 4. Sec urity keyguard 5. Cell info display 6. Welcome note 7. Op erator selection 8. Conf irm SIM service ac tions 9. Help text ac tivation 10.Start-up tone 9. IM and my prese nce settings 1. Curren t IM and presence settings 2. Edit current IM and presence se ttings 10.Enhancement settings 1 1. Headset 2. Hands free 3. Loopset 4. Music stand 5. Text phone 6. Charger 11.Security se ttings 1. PIN code request 2. Call barring service 3. Fixed dialling 4. Closed user group 5. Security le vel 6. A ccess codes 12.Restore f actory settings ⢠Operat or menu 2 ⢠Gallery 1. Memory car d 3 2. Images 3. Video clips 4. Music f iles 5. Graphics 6. Tones 7. Recordings 1. This me nu is sh own o nly i f the phone is or has be en con nec ted to a compat ibl e enh ancement av ailable for th e ph one. 2. If this menu is n ot sh own the fol lowi ng me nu numb ers chang es acc ordi ngl y. Th e name de pen ds on the n etwor k ope r- ator. 3. This menu is no t show n if no mul timedi a card i s in serte d. Th e fo llow ing menu n umbers c hanges acco rdi ngly . The na me depend s on th e memor y card .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 48 Using the menu â¢M e d i a 1. Camera 2. Media player 3. M usic Player 4. Radio 5. Voic e recorder 6. Media equaliser ⢠Organiser 1. Alarm clock 1. Alar m time 2. Re pe at ala rm 3. Alarm t one 2. Calendar 3. To-do list 4. N otes 5. W allet 1. Wallet profiles 2. Cards 3. Ticket s 4. Receipts 5. Personal notes 6. Settings 6. Synchronisation 1. Sy nchronise 2. Settings ⢠Applications 1. Games 1. Selec t game 2. Game downloads 3. Memory 4. App. s ettings 2. Collection 1. Selec t application 2. App. downloa ds 3. Memory 3. Extras 1. Calculator 2. Countdown timer 3. Stopwatch â¢W e b 1. Home 2. Bookmarks 3. Downlo ad links 1. Tone downloads 2. Graphic downloads 3. Game downloads
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Using the menu 49 Using the menu 4. Video downloads 5. App. downloads 4. Last web addr . 5. Service inbox 6. Settings 1. Connection settings 2. Appearance se ttings 3. Secur ity setti ngs 4. Service inbox settings 7. Go to add re ss 8. Clea r th e ca che ⢠SIM services 1 1. Only sho w n if sup porte d by yo u r SIM c ard. The n ame and content s vary depen ding on th e SIM car d.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 50 Menu functions 6. Menu f unctions â Mess ages You can read, w rite, send and save text , multimedia and SMS e -mail messages. All messages are or ganised into folder s. Before you can send a me ssage, y ou need to sav e some message settings. To select the font size for reading and w riting messages, press Menu , and select Messages , M essage se ttings , Oth er se tt ing s and Font size . Text me ssages (SMS) Using the SMS (Short Message Service) y our phone ca n send and rec eive multi-part mes sages, which consist of s everal ordinary text messages (network service). Invoicing is bas ed on the number of ordinary messages that ar e required for a multi-part message. This may affect t he invoicing f or the message. You can also send and recei ve text mes sages that cont ain pictures. A pi cture mess age is made up of several text messages. Note : The picture m ess age fun ction can b e used onl y if it i s suppo rted by your ne two rk opera tor or servi ce prov ider . Only p hones that o ffer pictu re mes sage featur es ca n rece ive a nd di splay pictur e mes sages. The text messages function uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 51 Menu functions Wr itin g an d s en din g me ss age s The number of available charac ters / the curr ent part number of a multi-part me ssage are sh own on the top right of the display, for example 120/2. 1. Press Menu , and select Messa g es , Text messages and Create mess age . Tip: To s tart writing mes sages quickly, press in standby mode . 2. Key in a message. See Writing text on page 38. To insert text templates or a picture into the message, see Templates on pa ge 55. Each pic ture message is made up of s everal tex t messages. Therefore, s ending one pictu re message may c ost more t han sending one text mes sage. 3. To send t he mess age, press Send . 4. Enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or search for the phone number in Con ta ct s . Pre ss OK to send the message. Note : Whe n s endin g mess age s via th e SMS networ k se rvice , you r pho ne may di splay the words Me ssage sen t . This is an i ndicat ion that the mes sage has been sent by y our phone t o the message c entre num ber programme d into your p hone. This is not a n indica tion that the message has b een r eceived a t th e inten ded destinati o n. For more deta ils about SMS services, check with your se rvice provi der. Opti ons for send ing a message After you have written a mess age, press O ptions and s elect Sending options . ⢠To send a mes sage to several recipients, select Send t o many . When you have s ent the message to everyone you want to send it to, press Done . ⢠To send a mes sage using a distribution list, select Send to list . To create a dis tribution list, see D istribution lists on page 54.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 52 Menu functions ⢠To send a mes sage using a mes sage profile, select Sending prof ile and then t he desired mes sage profile. To define a mes sage profile, s ee Writing and s ending a SMS e-mai l on page 52. Writ ing and se nding a SMS e-mai l Before you can se nd a SMS e-mail, you need t o save the settings for sending SMS e- mails, see W riting and sending a SMS e-mail on page 52. To check SM S e-mail s ervice availability a nd to subsc ribe to the service, contac t your serv ice provider. To save an e -mail addre ss in Contacts , see Saving mult iple numbers or text it ems per name on page 84. 1. Press Menu , and select Messa g es , Text messages and Create SMS e-mail . 2. Key in the recipientâÂÂs e-mail address or search for it in Con ta ct s and press OK . 3. If you wish, you can key in a subject f or the SMS e-mail and pr ess OK . 4. Key in the e-mail mes sage. See Writing text on page 38. The t otal number of cha racters t hat you can key i n is shown on the top right of the dis play. The e -mail address and subject ar e included in the total number of characters. See also Templates on page 55. Pictures cannot be ins erted. 5. To send the SMS e-mail, press Send . If you have not saved the settings for sending SMS e-mails, the phone asks f or the number of the e- mail server. Press OK to send the e-mail. Note : Whe n sen ding e -ma ils v ia the SMS n etwo rk se rvi ce, y our phon e ma y dis play t he w ords Messag e sen t . Thi s is an indi cation that the e - mail has been sent by your phone to th e e-mail se rver. Th is is not an indicat ion that th e e-mail has been received at the intende d destinati on. For more deta ils about e-mail services, ch eck with your service p rovider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 53 Menu functions Readi ng and re plying to a n SMS mess age or an SMS e-mail When you have r eceived a message or an SMS e-mail, the indicator and the numbe r of new messages followed by message s received ar e shown. The blinking indicates that t he message memor y is full. Before you can receiv e new messages , delete some of y our old message s in the Inbox folder . 1. Press Show t o view the ne w message , or pres s Exit t o v i e w i t l a t e r . Reading the message later: Press Menu , and select Me ssag es , T ext message s and Inbox . 2. If more t han one mess age has been received, s elect the one that you wa nt to read . An unread message is indic ated by in fr ont of it. 3. While r eading or viewing t he message, pr ess Options . You can sele ct an option, for example, to d elete, f orward or edit t he mess age as a tex t message or an SMS e-mail, rename the message you are reading or to mov e it to another folder. Select Copy to calendar to copy text at the beginning of the message to your phoneâÂÂs cale ndar as a reminde r note for the current day. Select Mes sage details to view, if available , the sender âÂÂs name and phone number, the message centre used, and the date and time of receipt. Select U se detail to extract numbers, e-mail address es and website a ddresses fr om the current message. When reading a picture mes sage, select Save picture to save the pict ure in the Templates folder . 4. Select Reply to reply to a message. Selec t Original text to include the original me ssage in the reply, or select a s tandard answ er to be inc luded in the reply, or s elect Empty screen .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 54 Menu functions When replying to an SMS e-mail, conf irm or edi t the e-mail address and s ubject first. T hen write your reply message. 5. To send t he mess age, press Send , and press OK to s end the mess age to the dis played number. Inbo x and sent it ems fold ers The phone s aves incoming text messages in t he Inbox folder and sent mes sages in the Sent items folder of the Text messages submenu. Text messages that you wis h to send lat er can be s aved in t he Saved text msgs. , My folders or Templates folder. Dist ribut ion li sts If you need to s end messages frequently to a fixed group of recipients, you can define a distribution list for that purpose . You can save these distribution lis ts in the phoneâÂÂs memory. N ote that the phone sends the messa ge separatel y to each recipient on the list. Theref ore, sending a mess age using a distribution list may cost more t han to send a mes sage to one recipient. Make sure t hat the cont acts you wa nt to a dd to the dis tribution lists, are s aved in t he phoneâÂÂs intern al contact memory. Distribution lists us e shared memory, see Shared memor y on page 19. Press Menu , and select Me ssag es , T ext message s and Distribution lists . T he names of t he available distribution lists ar e shown. ⢠If you hav e not saved any lists, pres s Add t o c r e a t e o n e . Key in the name for the lis t and pres s OK . Press View and t hen Add and select a contact from t he phoneâÂÂs contact memory. Pr ess Add agai n to add m ore c ontac ts to th e crea ted l ist.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 55 Menu functions ⢠Otherwise, s croll to a list. Press Vie w to view the contact s on the s elected l ist. Pres s Options and you can view t he details and delet e the select ed contact. Pres s Add to add more cont acts to the lis t. ⢠To display the other options of t he distribution lists folder, press Options and you can s elect ⢠Add list to create a new distribution list. ⢠Rename list to change the name of the select ed list. ⢠Clear list to delete all names and phone numbers from the sele cted list. ⢠Delete list to dele te the se lected distribution lis t. If a message cannot be s ent to certain recipients on the dis tribution list, a folder Unde livered is shown. Select U ndelivere d and press View t o view th e list of the recipients to whom the lat est message sending failed. Press Options and select ⢠Resend to list to resend the message to the r ecipient s on the Undelivered list. ⢠Delete list to dele te the Unde livered list. ⢠View message t o view the f ailed message. Tem pla tes Your phone includes text templates, indicated by , and picture templates, indicated by . To access the template list, press Menu , and select Messages , Text messages and Templates . ⢠To insert a t ext template int o the messa ge or the SMS e -mail that you are writing or replying to, press Options . Select Use template and select t he template that you want to insert. ⢠To insert a pic ture into the t ext mess age that you a re writing or replying to, press Options . Select Insert pi cture and select a pict ure to view it . Press Insert t o insert the picture int o your message. The indicator in the header of the mess age indicates that a picture has been atta ched. The number of character s that you can enter in a message, de pends on the si ze of the picture.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 56 Menu functions To view the text a nd the pictur e together bef ore sending t he message, pres s Options and selec t Preview . Saved items fold er and My fo lders To organise y our messages, you can move s ome of them t o the Saved text msgs. folder, or add new folde rs for y our messag es. While reading a message, pre ss Options . Select Mo ve , s croll to t he folder that you want to move the message to and press Select . To add or delet e a folder , press Menu , and select Messages , Text messages and My folders . ⢠To add a folder if you have not saved any folder, pr ess Add . O therwise, press Options and select Add fol d er . ⢠To delete a folder , scroll to the folder that you want t o delete, pr ess Options and select Dele te fol d er . Dele ting mes sages To delete mes sages, pres s Men u , and select Messages , Text messages and Delete me ssages . ⢠To delete all me ssages from a folder, s elect the folder from w hich you want t o delete the messages and press OK . ⢠To delete all me ssages from all text mes sage folders, s elect All messages and when Delete all messages from all folde rs? is displayed, press OK . If the folder contains unread mes sages, the phone will ask whether you want to delet e them also.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 57 Menu functions Sett ings f or text and SMS e -mail messages The message s ettings affect the sending, r eceiving and viewing of messages. 1. Press Menu , and select Messa g es , Message settings , Text messages and Sending pr ofile . 2. If more t han one message pr ofile set is supported by your SIM c ard, select the set you w ant to change. ⢠Select Mes sage centre number to save the phone number of the message centre t hat is required for sending text me ssages. You will receive t his number from your service provider. ⢠Select Messag es sent via to sele ct th e me ssage ty pe Text , E- mail or Paging . ⢠Select Mes sage validity to select the length of time fo r which the network should attempt to deliver your message. ⢠For message ty pe Text , select Default recipient number to save a default number f or sending messages for this profile. For message type E-mail , s elect E-mail s erver to save the e -mail server numbe r. ⢠Select D elivery repor ts to ask the network to send delivery reports about your messages (n etw ork se rv ice) . ⢠Select Use GPRS and s elect Yes to set GPR S a s the p refer r ed SMS bea rer . Also , se t the GP RS connection to Always online , see (E)G PRS connection on page 105. ⢠Select Reply via same ce ntre to al low the recipie nt of your mes sage to send you a r eply via your mess ag e c ent re (n etw ork se rv ice ). ⢠Select Rename sending profile to change the name of the selec ted message profile. The message profile sets ar e only displayed if your SIM car d supports more t han one set.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 58 Menu functions Overwrite settings When the te xt message me mory is full, t he phone cannot receive or send any new messages. However, you can s et the phone to aut omatically replace old t ext messages in the Inbox and Sent items folders with th e ne w ones . Press Menu , and select Me ssag es , Message settings , Text messages and Overwriting in sent items or Overwriting in inbox . Sele ct Allowed to s et the phone to replace t he old t ext messages wit h new ones in the Sent it ems or the Inbox f older, re spective ly. Multi media mess ages (MM S) Note : Thi s funct ion ca n be us ed on ly if it is sup porte d by y our netw ork o perat or or servi ce pro vider. O nly phones that offer compat ible multimedia mes sage feat ures can rec eive and disp lay multime dia messa ges. A multimedia message can contain t ext, sound and a picture or a video c lip. The phone supports multimedia messages that are up to 100 kB in siz e. If t he maximum si ze is exceeded, the phone ma y not be able to receiv e the message . Depending on the network, y ou may r eceive a text message t hat includes an Intern et address w here you can view th e multimedia mess age. If the message contains a picture, the phone scales it down to fit the display a rea. The multimedia message function uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19. Note : If Allow multi media reception is s et to Ye s or I n hom e netwo rk , yo ur op erator or serv ic e pr ovider may charge you for every me ssage you receive. Multimedia messaging s upports the following formats: ⢠Picture: JPEG, GIF, WBMP, BM P, and PNG. ⢠Sound: Scalable Polyphonic MIDI (SP-MIDI), AMR audio and monophonic ringing tones.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 59 Menu functions ⢠Video clips in 3gp format with SubQCIF image size and AMR audio. The phone does not necess arily support all variations of the aforementioned file formats . If a r eceived message conta ins any unsupported e lements, they may be r eplaced with t he file name and the text Object format not supported . Note that you are not able to receive any multimedia messages if you have a call in progress, a game or another Java application running, or an a ctive browsing session over GSM data (see Keying in the service settings manually on page 145). Because deliv ery of multimedia messages can fail for a variety of reasons, do not rely solely upon them for essential communications. Wr itin g an d s end ing a m ult ime dia me ssag e To set the s ettings for multime dia messaging, see Set tings for multimedia me ssages on page 63. To check ava ilability and to subscribe to t he mult imedia me ssaging service, contact your network operator or service provider. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ri nging t ones and other c ontent from being copied, modified, transfer red or forwarded. 1. Press Menu , and select Messa g es , Multimedia msgs. and Create message . 2. Key in a message. See Writing text on page 38. ⢠To insert a f ile in the mes sage, press Options , sel ec t Insert and select the desired option. You cannot select an option if it is dimmed. The list of available f olders in the Gallery is shown. Open a specific folder, scroll to t he desired file, press Options and select Insert . An attached f ile is indicated with the file name in the mes sage. ⢠You can also ins ert a New sound clip directly out of your voice r ecorder. Pres s Opt ions , s elect Insert and New so und cl ip . The voice recor der start s automatically and y ou can start with the recording. The new sound clip is added automa tically, when you end the rec ording.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 60 Menu functions ⢠Your phone supports the sending and rec eiving of multimedia messages that contain several pages (slides). T o insert a slide in the me ssage, press , and selec t Insert and Slide . Each slid e can contain text, one image a nd one sound clip. ⢠If the message contains seve ral slides, y ou can open t he desired one by pressing Options and selecting Previous slide , Next slide or Slide list . To set the int erval between t he slides, pr ess Options and select Slide timing . To move the text component to the t op or bottom of t he message, press Options and select Place text f irst or Plac e text last . ⢠To insert a name from the contacts list, press Options and selec t More options , Inse rt contact and the desir ed name. To insert a number f rom the c ontacts list, pr ess Options and select More options and Ins ert number . ⢠To insert a ca lendar note, pr ess Options and select Insert and Calendar note . ⢠To insert a bus iness ca rd, press Options and select Insert an d Busine ss card . ⢠To delete an ima ge, slide or s ound cl ip from the message, press Options and select Dele te and the desired function. ⢠To save the message in the Save d items folder, press Options and select Save message . ⢠To add a s ubject to t he message, pr ess Options and select More options and E dit subject . ⢠To view for example the s ize or recipient of t he message, pr ess Options and selec t More options and Message de tails . During writ ing a multimedia mess age, the r emaining space left is shown on the display. 3. To view t he mess age or slide p resentation bef ore sending it, pr ess Options and selec t Preview .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 61 Menu functions 4. To send t he mess age, press Send and select Phone number , E- mail address or Many . Depending on your operator, more options may be ava ilable. 5. Enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number (or e-mail addr ess) or sear ch for it in Contacts . Pr ess OK and the message is mov ed to the Outbox folder for sending. It takes more time to send a multimedia mes sage than to send a text message. W hile the multimedia message is being sent, t he animated indicat or is displayed and you can use ot her functions on the phone. If there is an interruption while the message is being sent, the phone t ries to resend it a few t imes. If this fails, the mes sage will remain in the Outbox folder and you c an try to resend it lat er. The messages that you have sent will be saved in t he Sent i tems folder if the s etting Save s ent messages is set to Ye s . See Se ttings for multimedia messages on pag e 63. This is not an indication that the message has bee n received at the intended destination. Readi ng and re plying to a multimed ia messa ge When your phone is receiving a multimedia messa ge, the anima ted indicator is displayed. When the message has been received, the indicat or and t he text Multimedia message recei ved are shown . The blinking indicates that the memory for multimedia messages is full, se e Multimedia messages memory full on page 63. 1. Press Show t o view th e message, or press Exit t o v i e w i t l a t e r . Reading the message later: Press Menu , and s elect Mes sages , Multimedia msgs. and Inbox . 2. Scroll t o view th e message. Pr ess O ptions and, for example, some of the f ollowing options may be available. ⢠Play presentation t o view the presentation attached in th e message.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 62 Menu functions ⢠View text t o view only the text in the messa ge. ⢠Open image , Open s ound clip or Ope n video clip to open t he corre sponding file. ⢠Save image , Save sound clip or Save video clip t o save the corresponding file in the G allery . ⢠Details to view the de tails o f the atta che d file . ⢠Delete message to de lete a s aved message. ⢠Reply or Repl y to all to reply t o the message. To send the reply, press O ptions and select Send . ⢠Forward to no. , F orward to e-mail or Forward to many to fo rwa rd the mess ag e. ⢠Edit to edit a message. You can only edit messages you have creat ed. See Wr iting and sending a multimedia message on page 59. ⢠Message details to view the subject, size and t he type of message. ⢠Refer also to t he options in Gallery , se e Gallery on page 112. Inb ox, Out b ox, Sav ed an d Se nt it ems fol d ers The phone s aves the mult imedia messages that have been received in t he Inbox f older of the Multimedia msgs. submenu. Multimedia messages that have not yet been s ent are moved to the Outbox folder of the Multimedia msgs. submenu. The multimedia mes sages that you w ish to send la ter, can be saved in the Saved items folder of t he Multimedia msgs. submenu. The multimedia mes sages that have been s ent are saved in the Sent items fol d er of the Mult imedia msgs. submenu if th e setting Save s ent messages is set to Ye s . See Settings for multimedia messages on page 63.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 63 Menu functions Mult ime dia mess ages m em ory full When you have a new multimedia message waiting and the me mory for the messages is full, the indicator blinks and Multimedia memory full, v iew waiting msg. is shown. To view the wait ing message, press Show . To save the message, press Options , select Save message and d elete old messages by first selecting the folder and t hen the oId message to be deleted. To discard t he waiting mes sage, press Exit and Ye s . If you press No , you can view the message. Dele ting mes sages To delete mes sages, pres s Men u , and select Messages , Mult imedia msgs. and Delete messages . To delete all mess ages from a f older, selec t the fo lde r from which y ou want to dele te the mes sages and press OK . If the folder contains unread mes sages, the phone will ask whether you want to delet e them also. Set ting s fo r m ult imed ia m ess age s You may receive the mult imedia connection s ettings as a conf iguration message from the network operator or service provider. To receive t he settings as configurat ion message, se e Configuration settings service on page 33. Keying in the sett ings manually Press Menu , and select Me ssag es , Message settings and Multimedia msgs. . Select ⢠Save sent messages . Select Ye s t o set the phone to s ave sent mult imedia mes sages in t he Sent i tems folder. If you select No , th e sent messa ges a re not saved. ⢠Delivery repor ts to ask the netw ork to send delive ry reports about your mess ages (network se rvice). ⢠Scale image down to de fine the image size when you ins ert the image to the multimedia message. ⢠Default slide timing to def ine the default time for slides composed f or multimedia messages.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 64 Menu functions ⢠Allow multimedia reception . Choose No , Ye s or In home net work to use the mult imedia servic e. If you choose In home net work , you cannot rec eive multimedia messages when outside your home network. The def ault setting is In home network . ⢠Incoming multimedia mess ages . Select Retrieve to automatically allow the rece ption of multi media messages, Retrieve manually to allow the reception of mult imedia message only after being prompted or se lect Reje ct . This setting is not shown if the Allo w multimedia rece ption is set to No . ⢠Connection settings to define connec tion settings for r etrieving multimedia messages. First s elect Act ive multimedia s ettings and activate t he set in which you want to save the connection sett ings. Select Ed it active multimedia se ttings and edit th e active settings . Select e ach of the set tings one by one and key in all t he required settings . Contact your network operator or service provider fo r the set tings. ⢠Settings' name . Key in the new n a me for the connection set and press OK . ⢠Homepage . Key in t he homepage addr ess of the service provider that you want to use , press for a dot, and press OK . ⢠Proxies . Selec t Enable or Disable. ⢠If you have enabl ed the proxies , you can select Primary proxy and Secondary proxy , and e dit them . ⢠Data bearer . Select GPRS. ⢠Bearer sett ings to s et the se ttings for the selected bear er. ⢠GPRS access point . Key in the access point name to establish a connectio n to a GPRS net work and press OK . ⢠Au thenti catio n typ e . Select Secure or N ormal .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 65 Menu functions ⢠User name . Key in the user name and pres s OK . ⢠Pa s s w o r d . Key in the password and pres s OK . ⢠Allow adverts to choose if you allow the rec eption of mes sages defined as advertisement. T his setting is not shown if the Allow multimedia reception is set to No . E-mail messages The e-mail application allows y ou to acc ess your e-mail a ccount via the phone. The compatible e- mail system that you use in the office or at home may be supported by the e-mail funct ion on your phone. You can write, send, and read e-mails with your phone. Your phone supports POP 3 and IMAP4 e-mail serve rs . The e-mail function uses s hared memory, see Shared memory on page 1 9. Before you c an send and retrieve any e -mails, you may ne ed to do th e following: ⢠Obtain a new e-mail account or use the current one. For availabilit y of your e-mail account contact your e-mail s ervice provider . ⢠For the settings required for e-mail, contact your network operator or e-ma il service provide r. For receiving the e-mail settings as configuration me ssage, see Configuration settings service on page 33. ⢠To set the e-mail set tings on your phone, press Menu and select Mes sages , Message settings and E- mail messages . See Settings for e- mail on page 68.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 66 Menu functions Wr itin g an d s end in g a n e- ma il You can write your e-mail mes sage befor e connecting to the e-ma il service, or connect to t he service first, and then w rite and se nd your e-mail. 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , and Create e-mail . The wait ing note is displayed. 2. Key in the recipientâÂÂs e-mail address and press OK or press Edit and key in the e-mail address, a nd press OK . To search for the e-mail a ddress in Contacts , p ress Options , and select Search . 3. You can key in a subject for t he e-mail if you want, and press OK . If you pres s Options , you can select one of the f ollowing: the mes sage editor, add a new rec ipient, add a copy r ecipient or a hidden copy recipient. 4. Key in the e-mail mes sage, see W riting text on page 38. The number of char acters that y ou can key in is shown on t he top right of the display. 5. To send t he e-mail message, p ress Send . Sele ct ⢠Send now t o send the e-mail immediately. If you have not already connected to the e-mail account, your phone establishes t he connect ion first and then s ends the e-ma il. ⢠Send later to se nd your e-mail lat er and the e-mail is sav ed in the Outbox folder. If you want to edit or continue w riting your e-mail later, you c an save it in Dra fts by selecting Save draft msg. . Sending the e-mail later: Press Me nu and select Mes sages , E-mail , Other options , and Send now or Retrieve and send . Note: When sending e-mails, you r phone may disp lay the wor ds Mes sag e sen t . Thi s is an indicati on that the e-ma il has been sent b y your phone to the e-mail server. This is not an ind ication that the e-mai l has been recei ved at the inten ded d estinati o n. For more detai ls about e-mai l services, ch eck wit h your serv ice pro vid er.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 67 Menu functions Downlo ading e-mail message s from yo ur e-mail ac count 1. Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , and Retr ie ve to download e- mail messages that have been sent to your e- mail account. O r: Press Menu and select Messages , E-mail , Other options , and Retrieve and s end to download new e- mail messages and to send e-ma ils that have been sav ed in the Outbox folder. If the mes sage memory is full, delete some of your older messages before you start t o download new messages. 2. Your phone mak es a connec tion to the e-mail service. A status bar is shown whil e your phone is downloading e-mail messages to your phone. 3. Press Select to view the new me ssag e in Inbox , or press Back t o v i e w i t l a t e r . If more than one message is received, select the message tha t you want to read. An unr ead message is indicated by . Readi ng and re plying to a n e-mail message 1. Press Menu , select Messages , E- mail and Inbox . 2. While r eading the message, pr ess Options . You can, for example, view the details of the selec ted message, mark the message as unread, delete , reply, reply t o all, fo rward or move the message t o another folder . 3. To reply to an e-mail, press Reply . Select Original text to include the original message in the reply or sele ct Empty screen . When replying to an e-mail, f irst confirm or edit the e -mail address and s ubject, th en write your reply. 4. To send t he mess age, press Send and select Send now .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 68 Menu functions Inbo x and Other fol ders (Draft s, Archiv e, Outb ox and Sent it ems) Your phone has th e following folders in the E-mail me nu: ⢠Inbox for saving e- mails that y ou have downloaded from your e-ma il account. ⢠Other folders contains the folders : Dr afts for sa ving un finished e -mails, Ar chive for organis ing and saving your e- mails, Outbox for saving e-mails that have not been sent, if y ou have selected Send later , see Writing and sending an e- mail on page 66, and Sent items for saving e-mails that have been sent. Dele ting e- mail m essage s ⢠To delete e-ma il messages, pr ess Me nu and select Messages , E-mail O ther options and Delete messages . To delete all me ssages from a folder, s elect the folder from w hich you want t o delete the messages and press Ye s . To de lete all messages from all folder s, select All messages and pres s Ye s . Note that delet ing an e-mail from your phone does not d elete it fro m the e-mail se rver. Sett ings for e- mail You may receive the e- mail settings as a configuration mes sage from the network oper ator or se rvice provider. For receiving the settings as a configuration message, see Configuration s ettings service on page 33. Keying in the sett ings manually Press Menu and select Messages , Message settings , and E-mail messages . ⢠First select Active e-mail settings and act ivate the s et in which you w ant to save the settings. Select Edit active e- mail settings and edit the active s ettings. Select e ach of the set tings one by one and key in all t he required settings . Contact your network operator or e-mail service pr ovider for th e settings.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 69 Menu functions ⢠Mailbox name . Key in t he name that you want to use for the mailbox. You can use any name. ⢠E-mail address . Key in your e- mail address. ⢠My name . Key in your name or nickname. Your name and e- mail address w ill be shown. ⢠Outgoing SMTP server . Key in the s erver address. ⢠Incoming server type . Se lect eith er POP3 or IMAP4 depending on the type of e-mail system that you are using. If both types ar e supported, select IMAP4 . C hanging the server type also changes the incoming p ort number. ⢠If you have s elected POP 3 a s a serve r type, t hen Inc oming POP3 server , POP3 user name , and POP3 password are shown. If you have selected IMAP4 as a server type, then Incoming IMAP4 serve r , IM AP4 user name , and IMA P4 password are shown. Key in the e-mail server a ddress fo r incoming e-mail, then key in the user name and pas sword to acces s the e-mail account. If you have not def ined a SMTP user name or SMT P password the e -mail server uses POP3/IMAP4 user name and passwor d instead. ⢠Oth er se tt ing s and select: ⢠Include signature . You can define a signature that is automatica lly added to t he end of your e-mail, when you write y our message. ⢠Use SMTP authorisation . If y our e-mail servic e provider requires authenticat ion for sending e-mails, selec t Ye s . In this case, you must also define your SMTP user name and SMT P password . ⢠SMTP user name . Key in t he user name for outgoing mails th at you have obtained from your e-mail service provider. ⢠SMTP password . Key in t he password that you want t o use for outgoing mails.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 70 Menu functions ⢠Outgoing SMTP port . Key in th e number of the e-mail se rver port for outgoing e- mail. The most common default value is 25. If you have selected POP 3 as a server type, the followi ng options are shown: ⢠Incoming POP3 port . Key in the port number that you have obta ined from your e-mail service provider. ⢠Reply-to address . Key in the e-mail address to which you want the replies to be sent. ⢠Secure login . Select Se cure login on if your connection requires an encr ypted login, otherwis e leave it to Secure login off . Contact y our service provider if in doubt . Using encr ypted login enables increas ed security fo r user names and passwords. It does not increas e securit y for the connection itself. ⢠Retrieve e-mails . Ke y in the maximum number of e-mails that you w ant to retrieve at a t ime. ⢠SMTP connection settings to define the connection settings required for out going e-mail. ⢠POP3 connection settings to define th e connection se ttings for incoming e- mail. See Keying in the service sett ings manually on page 145. Select e ach of the set tings one by one and ke y in all the r equired settings. Cont act your e- mail service provider for the settings. If you have selected IMAP4 as a server type, the f ollowing options are shown: ⢠Incoming IMAP4 port . Key in the port number that you have obtained from your e-mail service provider. ⢠Reply-to address . Key in the e-mail address to which you want the replies to be sent. ⢠Retrieve e-mails . Ke y in the number of e-mai ls that you want to retriev e at a time.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 71 Menu functions ⢠Retrieval method . Selec t Lat est if you want t o retrieve a ll new received e-mai ls or selec t Latest unread if you want t o retrieve only e-mails that you have not read. ⢠SMTP connection settings to define the connection settings required for out going e-mail. ⢠IMAP4 connection settings to define the connectio n settings required for incoming mail. See Keying in the se rvice settings manually on page 145. Select e ach of the set tings one by one and ke y in all the r equired settings. Cont act your e- mail service provider for the settings. Inst ant messages (IM) Note : Thi s funct ion ca n be us ed on ly if it is sup porte d by y our netw ork o perat or or servi ce pro vider. O nly phones that offer comp atible in stant messa ges featu res can recei ve and display instan t messages . Depending on your service provider, the displa y texts may vary. Instant messaging i s a way of sending short text messages that are deliver ed over TCP/IP pr otocols to online users (network service). Your contact lis t show s you when the contacts on the list are online and available to par ticipate in a n instant me ssages convers ation. When you ha ve written and s ent your message, it stays on the di splay. The reply mes sage appea rs below your or iginal message. Before you c an use instant mes sages, you need to subscr ibe to the s ervice. For a vailability, charging and subscription to the service, contact your network operator or service provider, from whom you also receive your unique ID and pas sword and t he settings for instant messaging. For setting the r equired settings for the ins tant messages s ervice, see IM and presence settings on page 109. The icons and texts on the display may vary depending on the instant messages s ervice.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 72 Menu functions You can use the other functions of the phone, while you have an active instant messages session in the background. Depending on the network, the ac tive instant messages session may cons ume the phoneâÂÂs battery fas ter and y ou may need t o connect t he phone to a charger. Instant messages use s shared memory, see Shared memory on pa ge 19. Bas ic st eps fo r in stant messa ging ⢠To enter the instant messages menu (offline), see Entering the instant messages menu on page 73. ⢠To connect to the instant messages service (onlin e), se e Connecting to the instant messages service and disconnecting on page 74. ⢠To start a n instant messages session with a contact , see IM cont acts in Starting an instant messages se ssion on page 74. To create your own instant mes sages contact lis ts, see Contacts for instant messaging on page 77. ⢠To join a public instant message s session, see Groups in Starting an instant messag es session on page 74. To join a gr oup instant messages session via invit ation message, see Accepting or rejecting an instant messages invit ation on page 75. To create your own ins tant messages groups, or to join or delet e a public group, see Gr oups on page 79. ⢠To edit your own i nformation, s ee Editing your own information on page 77. ⢠To search user s and groups, se e Search in Starting an instant messages session on p age 74. ⢠To read a mes sage for a new instant mes sages session, see Reading an instant message on page 76. ⢠To write and send messages dur ing an active in stant mess ages se ssion, see Par ticipating in an instant messages c onver sation on page 76.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 73 Menu functions ⢠To view, rename or dele te saved conv ersations, select Saved convers. when you have ent ered the Instant messages menu. ⢠To block/unblock contacts, see Blocking and unblocking messages on pa ge 78. ⢠To disconnect from the instant messages se rvice, see Connecting to the inst ant messages s ervice and disconnecting on page 74. Enter ing the in stant m essa ges menu To en ter the Instant messages m enu while still offline, pres s Menu , and select Messages and Instant messages . If more than one connect ion setting set for instant mes sages services i s available, select the set of the desired instant messages service. If there is only one set defined, this set will be s elected automatically. Then the following options are shown: ⢠Login to conn ect to the i nsta nt mess a ges serv ice. To set th e phone to automatically conne ct to th e instant mes sages service when you enter the Instant messages menu, see Connecting to the instant messages service and disc onnecting on page 74. ⢠Saved convers. to view, er ase or rename the instant messages conv ersations that you have saved during the instant mes sages session. You can select Saved convers. also when you have connec ted to the instant messages service. ⢠Connect. settings t o edit the settings needed f or instant messaging and presence connection. See IM and presence settings on page 109. You can also select Connect. settings when you have connected to the instant messages service.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 74 Menu functions Con ne ctin g to th e in sta nt m ess age s se rv ice and di sco nne ctin g To connect to the ins tant messag es service, ent er the Ins tant messages menu, ac tiva te a ins tant messages s ervice a nd select Login . Select one of the av ailable sets. Key in the Use r ID: and the Pa s s w o r d : . When the phone has successfully connected, Logged in is displaye d. Tip: To s et the phone to aut omatically connec t to the instant messages service when you enter the Instant messages menu, connect to t he instant messages service, select My settings , Automatic login and On IM s tar t-u p . To disconnect from the instant messages service, select Logout . Star ting an i nstan t messages s essi on Ente r th e Instant messages menu and connect to the ins tant messages service. You can select ⢠Conversations to view the list of new and read instant mes sages or inv itations to instant mes sages during the active instant mes sages session. Sc roll to the message or invit ation that you want and press Ope n to r ead the messag e. indicates t he new and the read instant messages. indicates the new and read group mes sages. indicates the invitations. ⢠IM contacts includes the contacts that you have added. Sc roll to the contact with whom you would like to chat and pr ess Cha t or press Open if a new contact is shown in t he list. To add contacts see Contacts for instant mes saging on page 77. If you have r eceived a new message f rom a conta ct, it is indicat ed with . indicat es the online and t he offline c ontacts in the phone âÂÂs contact s memory. indicat es a blocked c ontact, refe r to Blocking a nd unblocking messages on page 78.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 75 Menu functions To add contact s to the list, see Cont acts f or instant messaging session on page 77. ⢠Groups and Public groups . The list of bookmar ks to public groups provided by the net work operator or service provide r is displaye d. To start an instant me ssages session with a group, scroll t o a group and press Join . Enter your screen name that you want to use in the conv ersation. When y ou have successfully joined the group conv ersation, th e phone shows Joined group: a nd the group name. To create a private group, s ee Groups on page 79. ⢠Search and select Us er s or Groups to search for othe r instant messages use rs or public groups o n the n et wor k. ⢠If you select User s , you can search for a us er by phone number, screen name , e-mail addres s or name. ⢠If you select Groups , you can search for a group by a group member, group name, topic or ID. To start the inst ant messages session when y ou have f ound the user or the group, s croll to the us er or the group t hat you want, press Options and select Chat or Join group . ⢠To start a n instant messages s ession from Contacts , s ee Viewing the s ubscribed names on page 90. Acc ept ing or r eje ctin g a n in sta nt m ess age s in vi tat ion In standby mode, when you have connected to th e instant messages se rvice and you receive an invitation, Ne w invitation re ceived is displayed. Press Re ad t o r e a d i t . If you receive more than one invitation, the number of messages followed by new invitations receiv ed is displayed. Press Read , scroll t o the invitation you want, and press Ope n . ⢠To join the private group conversation, press Accep t . Enter the screen name that you want to use as a nickname. When you hav e successfully joined the group, t he phone s hows Joined g roup: and the group name. ⢠To reject or delete the invitation, pre ss Options and select Reject or Dele te .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 76 Menu functions Readi ng an ins tant messag e In standby mode, when you have connected to the in stant mess ages service and you receive a message from a person who is not taking part in the conversat ion, New instant message is displayed. Press Re ad to re ad it. ⢠If you receive more than one message, the number of mes sages followed by new instant messages is displayed. Press Read , scroll t o the message , and press Open . New messages r eceived during an a ctive instant mes sages ses sion are held in th e Conve rsations of the Instant messages menu. If the message is fr om a person whos e contact informat ion is missing from t he contact lis t in IM contacts , the senderâÂÂs ID is show n. If the cont act informat ion can be found in the phoneâÂÂs memory fo r contacts and the pho ne recognises it, the senderâÂÂs na me is show n. To save a new contact in th e phoneâÂÂs memory, pr ess Options and select ⢠Save contact and enter the name of the per son. ⢠Add t o contac t and select t he contact to which you want to add the detail and press Add . Part icipati ng in an i nstant messages co nversati on Join or s tart an instant messages session by pressing Wr ite . Tip: If yo u receive a new message dur ing an instant messages from a pe rson that is not within the insta nt messages conver sation, t he indicator is shown on the t op of the display. Write your message and pr ess Send or to send it . If you pr ess Options , some of the following options are available. ⢠View conversation t o view th e ongoing instant mess ages conversat ion. To save t he instant messages conv ersation, pres s Save and ente r the name f or the c onversation. ⢠Save contact , see Reading an instant message on page 76.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 77 Menu functions ⢠Add t o contac t , see Reading a n instant mes sage on page 76. ⢠Group members to vie w the membe rs of the select ed private group. The opt ion is only shown if you have creat ed the group. ⢠End conversation t o end the o ngoing conversation. ⢠Dictionary , see Setti ng predictive text input on or off on page 38. Edit ing your own i nformat ion Ente r th e Instant messages menu and connect to t he instant me ssages service. Se lect My s ettings to view and edit your own availability information or screen name. Select A vailability and Available f or all or Avail. for contacts (or A ppear offline ) to allow all the other instant messages us ers or only t he contacts on your instant messa ges contact list to see y ou as being online when you hav e connected t o the instant mes sages service. When you are connected to the inst ant messages s ervice, indicates that you are online and that you are not vis ible to other s. Conta cts for in stant messa ging To add contact s to the instant messages contact s list, connect to t he instant messages servic e and sele ct IM c ontacts . If the contact s list is empt y the p hone displays Contact lis t empty . Copy c ontacts from server? to retrieve avai lable c ontacts from the server. Otherwise press Options and select Add contact , or if you have no contacts added, press Add . Select ⢠Enter ID manually to enter th e ID manual ly. ⢠Search from serv . to seac h for a contac t from the server . ⢠From contacts t o s e a r c h fo r a na m e i n Contacts. ⢠Copy from server to copy a name from a server-based contacts list.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 78 Menu functions When the cont act is added, the phone di splays Added to IM contacts: and t he contact name. Scroll to a contact, and press Chat to star t to chat, o r pres s O ptions and select ⢠Contact info to view t he details of the selec ted contact . If you want to edit th e details, see Editing or deleting details in the Contacts menu (menu 3) on page 87. ⢠Edit name to edit t he contactâ s name. ⢠Block contact (or Unblock contact ) t o block (or unblock) the messages from the selected contact. ⢠Add contact to add a new contact f rom the phoneâÂÂs contact memory. ⢠Remove contact to remove a contact f rom the instant mes sages contact list. ⢠Copy to server to copy a name t o a server-based contacts list. ⢠A vailability alerts to mark fro m whom you wis h to receiv e presence a lerts. Bloc king and u nblocking mess ages Connect to t he instant message s service and s elect Conversat ions or IM c ontacts . Highlight the contact in th e contacts lis t from whom you want to block incoming me ssages. Press O ptions , s ele ct Block contact a nd press OK . To unblock the me ssages, connect to the instant mess ages se rvice a nd select Blocke d list . Scr oll to th e contact from whom you want t o unblock th e messages an d press Unblock . You can also unblock the messages from the contact lis t, see Contacts for instant messag ing on page 77.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 79 Menu functions Groups You can creat e your o wn private groups f or a instant me ssages session, or use the public groups provided by t he service provider. The pr ivate groups exist only during an active instant messages session. You ca n add to a pr ivate group only the contacts that are in your contact list and thus in th e phoneâÂÂs contact s memory, s ee Saving name s and phon e numbers (Add new contact ) on page 84. If the server you are logged into does not support group s ervices all gr oups related menus are dimmed. Public groups You can bookmark public groups that y our service pr ovider may maint ain. Connect to the instant messages s ervice, select Groups and Public groups . Scroll t o a group that y ou want t o chat with and press Joi n . If you are not in the gr oup, key i n your screen name as your nick name for t he group. If you press Options , you c an select Delete group t o delete a gr oup from your group list. Creating a private group Connect to t he instant message s service , select Groups and Create group . Key in the name f or the group and the screen name for yourself that you want t o use for the group. You can use another scre en name in another group. Mark from th e contacts list y our private gr oup members and k ey in an invitation to newly added members.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 80 Menu functions Voice messages The voice mailbox is a network serv ice and you may need t o subscribe to it . For more informati on and for the voice mailbox number, co ntact your ser vice provider. Press Menu , and select Me ssag es and V oice messages . Selec t ⢠Listen to voi ce messages to ca ll your voic e mailbox at the phone number that you have saved in t he V oice mailbox number menu. If you have t wo phone lines availa ble (network s ervice), each phone line may have its own voice mailbox number. Refer to Call settings on page 106. ⢠V oice mailbox number t o key in, search for or edit your voice mailbox number and pre ss OK to save it. If supported by the network, the indicator will show new voice messages. Press Listen to call your voice mailbox number. Tip: Pressing and holding calls your voic e mailbox if you have the number set. Info m essages With the info message networ k servic e you may be able torece ive mess ages on various topics from your service provider. The se messages may include, f or example, w eather or traffic conditions. For availability, topics and th e relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Servi ce comma nds Press Menu , and select Messages and Service commands . Key in and send service reques ts (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for net work services , to your service provide r.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 81 Menu functions â Call regis ter The phone registers the phone numbe rs of missed, r eceived and di alled calls, and the approximate lengt h of your calls . The phone register s missed and received calls only if t he network s upports these functions, and the phone is switched on and within t he networkâ s service ar ea. When you press Opt ions in the Missed calls , Rece ived calls and Dialled numbers menu, you c an, for example, view t he date and the time of the call, edit or delete the phone number from the list, save the number in Contacts , or send a mes sage to t he number. Recent calls lists Press Menu , and select Call register and then selec t ⢠Missed calls to view the list of the last 20 phone numbers from which s omebody has tried to call you (network service). The number in front of t he (name or) p hone number indicates t he amount of call attempts from that caller. Tip: When a note about mis sed calls is displayed, press List to ac cess the li st of phone numbers. Scroll to the number you wo uld like to call back and press . ⢠Received calls to view t he list of the last 20 phone number s from which y ou have most r ecently accepted calls (network s ervice). ⢠Dialled numbers to view the list of the 20 phone numbers that y ou have most r ecently calle d or attempted to c all. Tip: In standby mode, press once to access the list of dialled numbe rs. Scroll to t he number or name you want , and press to c all the number.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 82 Menu functions ⢠Delete recent call lis ts to del ete the recent calls l ists. Select whe ther you want to de lete all the phone numbers in th e recent calls lists, or only those numbe rs in the miss ed calls, received calls or dialled numbers lis ts. You cannot undo t he operation. Coun ters an d time rs fo r calls, data and me ss ages Note : The actual i nvoice for calls and services from your s ervice provider may vary, dependin g upon network fe atures, roundin g-off for billi ng, taxes and so for th. Press Menu , and select Call register and then selec t ⢠Call duration . Scroll to view the approximat e duration of your inc oming and outgoing c alls in hours, minutes and seco nds. The securit y code is requir ed to cl ear the timer s. If you have t wo phone lines availa ble (network s ervice), each phone line has its own call duration timers. The timers o f the curr ently selected line are displayed. R efer to Call s ettings on page 106. ⢠GPRS data counter . Scrol l to chec k the amounts of data th at were sent or receiv ed in the last session, data s ent and recei ved in total, and to cle ar the counter s. The counter unit is a byte. The security code is required to c lear th e counters. ⢠GPRS connection timer . Scr oll to ch eck the dura tion of the last G PRS connection or the total GPRS connection time. You can als o clear the timers. The security code is required to clear the timers. ⢠Message counter . Sc roll to check the amount s of text messages that were sent or received and t o clear the counters. Pos iti onin g inform ation Some networks allow to request t he position of the phone (network service). T his menu allows yo u to view the received pos ition requests from the ne twork oper ator. Contact your net work operator or service provider to subscrib e and to agree upon the deliver y of locat ion information.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 83 Menu functions â Contact s You can save names and phone number s (Contacts) in t he phoneâÂÂs memory and in the SIM cardâÂÂs memory. ⢠The phoneâÂÂs memory may save up to 1000 names with numbers and text notes about each name. You can als o save an image fo r a certain number of names. T he number of names that can be saved depends on the length of the names, and the number and le ngth of the phone numbers and text items. Contacts use sha red memory, see Shared memory on page 19. ⢠The phone supports SIM cards that can save up to 254 names and phone numbers. Names a nd numbers saved in the SIM cardâÂÂs me mory, are indicated by . In dynamic contact s (Presence) you c an publish yo ur c urrent ava ilability status to communicate to anyone who has access to t his service and who is r equesting this inf ormation. You can view the availability status of any of the c ontacts that you ha ve subsc ribed to in t he Subscribed names menu and in the detailed view of a name in Contacts . Selectin g set tings f o r cont a cts Press Menu and select Contacts and Settings . Select ⢠Memory in use to select the memory, either SIM car d or p hone, that you w ant to use for your contacts. To recall names and numbers fr om both memories f or contacts, select Phone and SIM . In that case, t he names and numbers will be s aved in th e phoneâÂÂs memory. ⢠Contacts vie w to sele ct how the na mes, numbers and images in c ontacts are displaye d. ⢠Memory status to view how much memory is availa ble in the selec ted memory for contacts .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 84 Menu functions Savi ng names and pho ne numbers (Add new c ontac t) Names and number s will be save d in the used me mory, see Sel ecting settings for contacts abov e. 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and A dd contact . 2. Key in the name a nd press OK . See U sing traditional text input on page 39. 3. Key in the phone number, and press OK . T o key in the numbers , see Mak ing a call on pa ge 34. 4. When the name and number are save d, press Done . Tip: Quick save In standby mode, key in the phone nu mb er. Press Opt ions , and select Save . Key in the name, press OK and Do ne . Saving multiple nu mbers or t ext i tems per name You can save dif ferent types of phone numbers and s hort text items per name in the phoneâÂÂs intern al memory for cont acts. The first numbe r saved is aut omatically set as the default number and it is indicated wi th a fra me around the number t ype indicator, for example . When you s elect a name from contact s, for example to make a ca ll, the default number is us ed unless you s elect another number . 1. Make s ure that the memory in use is eithe r Phone or Phone and SIM . See Selecting settings for contacts on page 83 . 2. To a ccess the list of names and phone numbers, pres s in standby mode. 3. Scroll t o the na me saved in t he phoneâÂÂs inter nal memory f or the contact to wh ich you want to add a new number or text item, and press Details . 4. Press Options and select Add number or Add detail . 5. To a dd a number or deta il, select one of th e number types or t ext types , respect ively.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 85 Menu functions ⢠If you s elect the text type User I D : Select Sear ch to search for an ID by a mobile phone number or an e-mail address in the server of the operat or or service pr ovider i f you have connec ted to t he presence s ervice. See My prese nce on page 87. If only one ID is found, it is automatically saved. Otherw ise, to save t he ID, press Options , and select Save . To key i n the ID, s elect Enter ID manually . Key in the ID and pr ess OK to save it. To change the numbe r or tex t type, s elect Change type in t he options list. Note that you c annot change the type of an ID when it is on t he IM c o nta c ts or in th e Subscribed name s list. To set th e selected numbe r as the default number, s elect Set as default . 6. Key in the number or t ext item and press OK to save it. 7. Press Back and then Exit to r eturn to standby mode . Addin g an image to a name or number in con tacts You can add an image in supported format to a name or number s aved in the phoneâÂÂs internal memory. Press in standby mod e, scroll to t he contact y ou want to add an image to and pres s Details . P re ss Options and select Add image . The phone opens t he list of folders in the Gallery . Scroll to t he desired image, press Options and select Save to contacts . A c opy of the ima ge is added to the cont act. Searching for a contact 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Search , or t o quickly find a contact name, pr ess in standby mode. 2. You can key in t he first cha racters of t he name you a re searc hing for in th e pop-up window.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 86 Menu functions Press and to scroll through the names in the lis t, and and to move th e cursor in t he pop-up window. 3. Scroll t o the contac t name you want , and press De tails . Scroll to view the details of the s elect ed contact. Depending on the Con t act s v iew selec tion in Selecting settings for contact s on page 83, t he subscribed names are shown differently. Either only the availability indicat or or t he availability indicator, persona l logo and the status message ar e shown. Press Detai ls and all of t he dynamic information is shown. Tip: Viewing a contact. To quickly view a specific name with the def ault phone number, press and hold at the name while scrolling through the c ontact names. To view the status message i n full, press Details and press and hold at the dynamic cont act while s crolling through the contact names . Delet ing conta cts Press Menu and select Contacts and Delete to dele te contacts a nd all the details attached to them. ⢠To delete cont acts one by one, selec t One by one a nd scroll to the name you want to delete . Press De lete and press OK to confirm. If the contact has an ID on the IM contact s or in the Subscribed names list, the n ote Presence information will be deleted is shown befor e the contac t is deleted. ⢠To delete cont acts all a t once, select Delete all a nd then sc roll to eit her of the me mories From phone mem. or From SIM card and press Del ete . Press OK and conf irm with t he securit y code.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 87 Menu functions Edi tin g or del eti ng deta ils Search for t he contact you want to e dit or delete and press Details . Scroll to the name, nu mbe r, text item or image you wa nt to edit or delete and press Options . ⢠To edit a name, number or t ext item or t o change image , select Edit name , Edit number , Edit detail or Change image , respec tively. Note that you cannot edit or delete an ID when it is on the IM contacts or in the Subscribed names list. ⢠To delete a numbe r or text item, select D elete number or Delet e detail , respectiv ely. ⢠To delete an ima ge attached t o the c ontact, select Delete image . Deleting an image from contacts does not delete it from Gallery . My presence With the pres ence servic e (network s ervice) you c an share your presence s tatus with ot her users, for example your family, friends and colleagues with compatible dev ices and ac cess to t he servic e. Presence status includes your av ailability, status message and pe rsonal logo. Other us ers who have access to the service a nd who a re requesting y our information are able to s ee your status. The requested information is shown in Subscr ibed names in the v iewers Contacts menu. You can personalize the inf ormation tha t you want to share with ot hers and cont rol who can s ee your status. Before you c an use presence, y ou need to subscribe t o the ser vice. To check the ava ilability, c harging and to subscribe to the service, cont act your network operator or service provider, from whom you also receive your unique ID and pas sword and t he settings f or the service. T o set the required settings for the presence service, see IM and presence setting s o n page 109. W hile you have connected to the
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 88 Menu functions presence service, you c an use the other functions of the phone, and the presence servic e is active in the background. Press Menu and select Contacts and My pres ence . Select ⢠Connect to 'My presence' ser vice (or D isconnect ) to connect to (or to dis connec t from) the serv ice. ⢠My current presence to change your presence status. Select ⢠View current presenc e and select Private pres. or Public presence to view your current pr ivate or public status. ⢠My availability to set your availability status to A vai lable indicated by , o r to Bus y indic ated by , or to Not available indicated by . ⢠My presence message and key in the text to be shown t o other per sons or press Options and sele ct Previous ms gs. and select an old message as the s tatus mes sage. ⢠My presence logo to s elect your personal logo fr om the Graphics folder in the gallery. If you sele ct the Def ault , the logo is not published. ⢠Show to to select the groups to whom y ou want to s how your presence status or if not to show them . Select Pr ivate and public and contact s in your privat e list are able to se e all your pr esence information: availabilit y, status mes sage and logo. O ther contacts ca n see only your availability . Select Pr ivate viewers and the contacts in your private list can see all y our presence information (availability, st atus message and logo). Other users will not see any infor mation. If you select No one , no one can see y our presenc e information. ⢠Viewers and select ⢠Current view ers to v iew all the persons who have subscribed t o your presence information
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 89 Menu functions ⢠Private list is a list of the per sons who ar e allowed to v iew all your presence information, including availability, status messag e and logo. You c an manage your own private list. Other persons who a re not in the pr ivate list, can see only your ava ilability. ⢠Blocked list to v iew all the persons you have blocked from viewing your pr esence infor mation. ⢠Settings and selec t ⢠Show current presence in idle to show t he current status indicator in standby mode. ⢠Synchronise with pro files to select w hether you want to upda te your My presence message and My availability manually or automatically by linking them to t he currently active profile. Refer also to Profiles on page 96. Note that you cannot link a personalized st atus logo to a Profile. ⢠Connection type to select if the phone connects automat ically to the service whe n the phone is switched on. ⢠Connect. settings , see IM and pr esence settings on page 109. Subs cribe d n ame s You can creat e a list of contacts whos e presence s tatus information you want to be aware of. You can view the information if the contacts allow you to view it and if it is not prevent ed by t he contact or network. You can view thes e subscribed names either by scrolling thr ough the contact s or via the Subscribed names menu. Make sur e that the memor y in use is either Phone or Phone and SIM . See Selecting settings for contacts on page 83 . To connect to the Pr esence ser vice, pres s Menu and select Contacts , M y presence and Connect to 'M y presence' s ervice . You can view the subs cribed names e ven when you are not connected to the presence service but you can not see t he presence s tatus information about the contact .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 90 Menu functions Addin g contacts t o the sub scri bed names 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Subscribed names . If you have not connected to t he Presence service, the p hone asks if you w ant to connect now. 2. If you have no contacts on your list, press Ad d . Otherwis e, press Opti ons and select Subscribe new . The list of your contacts is s hown. 3. Select a contact from the lis t and if the cont act ha s an user ID s aved, the cont act is adde d to the subscribed name s list. If th ere are more than one ID, s elect one of them. After subscription to the contact, Subscr iption activated is shown. Tip : To subscribe to a contact from Contacts list, pres s in standby mode and scrol l to the contact you want to subscribe to. Press Details and press Opt ions . To subscribe, s elect Re q ue st presence and select A s subscr iption . If you only want t o view th e presence infor mation but not t o subscribe t o a contact , select Request presenc e and O ne ti me on ly . Viewi ng the su bscribed nam es Refer also to Searching for a contact on page 85 to vie w the pres ence information. 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Subscribed names . The status infor mation of the f irst contact on the subs cribed names lis t is displayed. T he information that the person wants to give to the others may include text and some of the following icons: , or indicate that the person is either available, discreet or not available. indicates t hat the per sonâÂÂs presence info rmation is not available.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 91 Menu functions 2. Press D etails to view the det ails of t he selected contact, or press Opti ons and select ⢠Subscribe new to add a new contact to the lis t of subscr ibed names. ⢠Chat to start a n instant messs ages convers ation. ⢠Send message to send a t ext message or a multimedia message to the selected contact. ⢠Send SMS e-mail to send a n e-ma il to th e sele c te d contac t. ⢠Send bus. card to s end a busines s card fr om the select ed contact. ⢠Unsubscribe to remove the selected cont act fr om the list of subscribed names . Unsu bscr ibing a contact ⢠To unsubscribe a contact from the Contacts list, press in standby mode and scroll to the contact you want t o unsubscribe. Press Details and select the ID and press Options . To unsubscribe, select Unsubscribe and press OK t o confirm. ⢠To unsubscribe via the Subscribed names menu, s ee Viewing t he subscribed names on page 90. Copy ing c onta cts You can copy names and phone numbers from the phoneâÂÂs memory t o your SIM cardâÂÂs memor y and vice versa. No te that any t ext items saved in the phone âÂÂs internal memory, such as e-mail addres ses, will not be co pied to the SIM c ard. 1. Press Menu and select Contacts and Copy . 2. Select t he copying direc tion, Fr om phone to SIM card or F rom SI M card t o phone . 3. Select One by one , All or De fault numbers . ⢠If you select One by one , scroll to the na me you want to copy and press Copy .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 92 Menu functions Default numbers is shown if you copy from the phone to the SIM card. Only the default numbers will be copied. 4. To choose whet her you want to keep or delete the original names and numbers, se lect Keep original or Move original . ⢠If you select All or Default numbers , p re ss OK when Copy contacts? or Mo ve contacts? is displayed. Send ing and rece ivi ng a bu sine ss ca rd You can send and receive a personâÂÂs contact information f rom a compatible device that supports the vCard standard a s a business card. When you have rec eived a business card, pr ess Show and Save to save the busines s card in the phoneâÂÂs memory. To dis card the bus iness ca rd, press Exit and then OK . To send a business car d, search for the name and phone number you want to s end from contacts, pres s Details and Options and select Send bus. card . ⢠To send the bu siness card v ia IR , sele ct Via infrared . Refer to Infrared on page 103. ⢠To send the business card as a text mes sage if it is supported by the networ k, select Via text message . ⢠To send the business card as a multimedia message if it is supported by the network, select Via multimedia . ⢠To send the business card via Bluetooth wirele ss technology, select Via Bluet ooth .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 93 Menu functions Spe ed dia ls To assign a number to a spe ed-dialling key, press Menu and select Co nta ct s and Speed dials and scroll to the speed-dialling key number t hat you want. Press As sign , or if a numbe r has already been assigned t o the key, press Options and select Change . Press Search , and select first the name and then t he number you want to a ssign. If the Speed dialling function is off, t he phone asks whether you want t o activate it. See also Speed dialling in Call s ettings on page 106. To make a call using the speed-dialling k eys, see Spee d dialling a phone numbe r on page 35. Voice dia lling You can make a phone call by saying a voice tag th at has been added to a phone number. Any spoken word(s), such a s a personâÂÂs name (s), can be a voic e tag. You can add up t o 25 voice tags. Before using voice dia lling, note that: ⢠Voic e tags are not lan guage dep enden t. The y are d epende nt o n the speak er's v oice . ⢠Voice ta gs are sensitive to backgro und noise. Reco rd them and make calls in a quiet enviro nment. ⢠When reco rding a voice tag or ma king a call by sa ying a vo ice tag, hold the phone in the normal position ne ar to your ear. ⢠Very sho rt names are not accepted. U se long names a nd avoid simila r names for d ifferent numb ers. Note : You must say the name ex actly as you said i t when you recorded it. This may be difficult in, for example, a noisy envi ronment or durin g an emergency, so you should not rely solel y u pon voice dialling in all circu mst ances .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 94 Menu functions Addin g and managing vo ice tag s Save or copy in the phoneâÂÂs memory the contacts, to which you want to a dd a voice tag. You ca n also add voice tags to the names in the SIM card, but if you replace your SIM ca rd with a new one, you f irst need to de lete the old v oice tags befor e you can add new ones. Voice tags us e shared memor y, see Shared memory on page 19. 1. In standby mode, press . 2. Scroll t o the contac t to which y ou want to add a voice t ag and press Details . Scroll to the phone number you want and pr ess Options . 3. Select Add voice tag . 4. Press Start , and say clearly t he word(s) you want to record as a v oice tag. After recording, the phone plays the r ecorded tag. When the voice tag has been succ essfully s aved, Voice tag saved is displayed, a beep sounds and a symbol appears after t he phone number wit h a voice tag. To check the voice tags, press Menu and select Contacts and V oice tags . Scroll to the contact wit h the voice tag t hat you wa nt, and selec t an option t o listen to, delet e or change t he recorded voice tag. Ma kin g a c all by us ing a voic e ta g If the phone has an application us ing the GPRS connec tion sending or re ceiving data, f irst end the application to mak e a call by using voic e dialling. 1. In standby mode, press and hold the volume down key. A short t one is heard and Spe ak now is displayed. 2. Say the voice tag clearly. The phone plays the recognised voice tag and t hen dials the phone number of the voic e tag aft er 1.5 seconds.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 95 Menu functions If you are using a c ompatible heads et with the headset k ey, press and hold the heads et key to start the voice dialling. Info numb ers and service numbers Your service provider may hav e included information numbers or service numbers in your SIM card. Press Menu and select Contacts and Info numbers or Service numbers . Scroll through a cat egory to an information number, or t o a service number, and pr ess to call the number. My numbers The phone numbers assigned to your SIM card are s aved in My numbe rs if this is allowed by the card. To view the numbers press Menu and select Contacts an d My numbers . Scroll to the de sired name or number, and press View . Call er grou ps You can arrange the names and phone numbers sav ed in Contacts into caller groups . For each c aller group, you can s et the phone to sound a specific ringing t one and show a selected graphic on the display when you receive a call from a phone number in the group, s ee below. To set the phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbers belonging to a select ed caller gr oup, see Alert for in Tone settings on page 97. Press Menu and select Contacts and Caller groups and select th e desired ca ller group. Sele ct ⢠Group name , key in a new na me for the calle r group and pr ess OK. ⢠Group ringing t one and select the ringing tone for the group. Default is the r inging tone selected for the currently active profile.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 96 Menu functions ⢠Group logo and select On to set the phone t o display the group logo, Off not to display it, or View to view the logo. ⢠Group members to add a name to the caller group. If the re are no na mes in the group, pr ess Add , or otherwise, press Options and se lect Add contact . Scroll to the name you want t o add to the group and press Add . To remove a name from a c aller group, scr oll to the na me you want to remove, and press Options and select Remove contact . â Sett ings Prof il es Your phone has va rious setting groups , profiles, for which you can customise the phone tones for different events and environments. Initially , personalise the profiles to your own liking and then yo u only need to ac tivate a pr ofile to use it . Available prof iles are G eneral , Si lent , Meeting , Outdoor , and Pager . Press Menu , and select Settings and Profiles . Scr oll to a profile and press Select . ⢠To activate the select ed profile, select Ac tiv ate . ⢠To set the pr ofile to be active until a certain t ime up to 24 hours, select Timed and set the time the profile setting shall end. When th e time set for t he profile expires , the previous profile that was not timed, becomes active. ⢠To personalise t he profile, s elect Personalise . Select the se tting you want to change and make t he changes. The s ame settings can also be change d in the Tone settings menu, see Tone settings on page 97. To rename a prof ile, Profile name . The General profile ca nnot be renamed.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 97 Menu functions To change y our presence stat us information, s elect My presence . This menu is available if you have set Synchronise with profiles to On , se e My presence on page 87. Select My availa bility to cha nge your availabilit y status and My pr esence mess age to edit y our status messa ge. Tip : To change t he profile quick ly in standby mode, press t he power key , scroll to the pr ofile you want t o activate and pres s Select . Tone setting s Press Menu , and select Settings and then Tone settings . You can find th e same settings in th e Profiles menu, see Profiles on page 96. Note that the settings you mak e will change the sett ings in the act ive profile. Select Inc oming call alert t o choose how the phone no tifies you of an incoming voice call. The options are Ringing , A scending , Ring once , Bee p on ce and Off . Select Ringing t one for incoming voic e cal ls. To select r inging tones fro m Gal l ery , select O pen gallery from the r inging tone list. Tip: If yo u receive a ringing t one via inf rared co nnection or via Bluetooth wirele ss technology or by downloading, you can save the ringing tone in the Galler y . Select Ringing v olume and Vibrating alert for incoming voice calls and messages. The vibrating alert does not wor k when the phone is connect ed to a charger, a desktop stand, or a car k it. Select Message alert tone to set the aler t tone f or the incoming messages or Instant message alert tone to set the aler t tone for inst ant messages m essages. Select K eypad tones , or Warning tones to s et the phone to sound t ones, for example, when the battery is runni ng out of power. Select Alert for to set t he phone to ring only upon calls from phone numbe rs that belong to a select ed caller group. Scroll to the c aller group you want or All calls and press Ma rk .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 98 Menu functions Display setting s Press Menu , and select Settings and Display se ttings . ⢠Select Wallpaper t o set your phone to displa y a backgr ound image, know n as wallpape r, when the phone is in st andby mode. Some images are pr esaved in the Gallery menu. You can also receive images, for example , via multimedia message s, or tr ansfer them with PC Suite f rom your PC and then save them in Gallery . Your phone supports JPEG , GIF, WBMP, BMP and P NG formats but not necessarily all variations of these f ile formats. To select the wallpaper, select Select wallpaper and open an image folder. Scroll t o the image y ou want to set as wallpaper, pr ess Options and select Set as wallpaper . To activa te/deactivat e the w allpaper, select On / Off , res pectively . Note that t he wallpaper is not displayed whe n the phone a ctivates the screen sav er. ⢠Select Colour schemes to change the colour in some display components, f or example indicat ors and signal and battery bars. ⢠Select Menu v iew to s et the way the phone displays the main menu. Select Lis t for th e menu list view and Grid for the menu gr id view. ⢠Select O perator logo to set your phone t o display or hide the ope rator logo. If you have not s aved the operator logo, the Operator logo menu is dimmed. The operator logo is not displayed whe n the phone activates t he screen saver. For more infor mation on availabilit y of an oper ator logo, c ontact your net work operator or service provider. See als o PC Suite on page 156. ⢠Select Sc reen saver to set your phone t o display a screen s aver when t he phone is in standby mode and none of the phoneâÂÂs funct ions has been use d for a ce rtain time. Select On to switc h the sc reen save r on or Of f to switch it off.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 99 Menu functions Select in Time-out after whic h time the s creen saver will be activated. In Other you can set the length of the t imeout from 5 se conds to 10 minutes (minutes:seconds). Wit h Sel ect s. saver you can choose an animat ion or a still image as screen saver from G allery . Press any ke y to deactivate t he scr een sa ver. The sc reen saver is also deact ivated whe n the phone is out of the network co verage area. Independent of th e screen saver settings, fo r power saving a digital clock view will be act ivated when for a certain time no f unction of th e phone has been used. See Po wer saving on page 29. Note that t he screen s aver over rides all the gr aphics and text s on the dis play in standby mode. Tim e and da te set tings Press Menu , and select Settings and Time and date s ettings . ⢠Select Cloc k and Show clock (or H ide clock ) to show (or hide) the time on the top right of the display in standby mode. Select Set the tim e to a djust th e cl ock to the corr ect ti me, Time zone to set the time zone, and T ime format to select the 12-hour or 24-hour time format. The clock serves the functions Messages , Call register , Alarm clock , timed Prof iles , C ale ndar , No tes and Scree n save r , for example. If the battery is removed fr om the phone or if the battery is flat, you may need to set the time again. ⢠Select Da t e and Show date (or Hide date ) and the date is shown (or hidden) on the display when the phone is in standby mode. Select Set the date t o adjust the date. You ca n also select the date fo rmat and date separat or. ⢠Select Aut o-update of date & time (network se rvice) and On to set the phone to aut omatica lly update the time and date acc ording to the current time zone. To set t he phone to ask for a confirmation before the update, select Confirm first .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 100 Menu functions The automatic update of t he date and ti me does not change the t ime that you ha ve set f or the alarm clock, c alendar or t he alarm note s. They are in local t ime. Updating may cause some a larms that y ou h ave se t to e xpi re . For information on availability, c ontact your net work operator or service p rovider. Pe rson al shortc uts With personal s hortcuts you get quic k acces s to often used f unctions of the phone. Right sele ction k ey You can set one phone function fr om a predefined list to the right selection k ey. Refer also to Standby mode on page 28. This menu is not shown in some op erator v ariants. Press Me nu , and s elect Settings , P ersonal shor tcuts and Right selecti on key . Select a function f rom the list. The name of the r ight selection key changes in standby mode acc ording to the function. Voice commands You can have phone functions w hich can be activated by saying a v oice tag. Up to 16 functions can be selected t o add a voic e tag. Press Menu , and select Settings , Pe rsonal shortcuts and V oice commands . Select the function folder you want, scroll t o the function to which y ou want to add a voice tag and pr ess Ad d . If the function already has a voice t ag, the indicat or is shown. To add a v oice command, refer t o Adding and managing v oice tags on p age 94. To activate a v oice command, refer to Mak i ng a c all by using a voic e tag on page 94. During a call or when an application using the (E)G PRS connection is sending or receiving data, you cannot activate or add a voice command.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 101 Menu functions Connectivity You can connect the phone t o a compatible dev ice vi a infrared or Bluet ooth connection. You can also define the set tings for (E)GPRS dial-up c onnections. Blue tooth wi reless t echnology The phone s upports Bluetooth wireless technology which a llows you t o connect the phone to a compatible Bluetooth devic e within 10 meters. The Bluet ooth connection c an be subjec t to interference from obstructions s uch as wal ls or other el ectronic devic es. The phone supports also the Bluetooth SIM acc ess profile. This Bluetooth profile allows you to connec t to compatible de vices, lik e the Nokia 610 car k it phone via the Bluetooth connect ion. When the SIM access pr ofile is act ive, Remote SIM mode is shown on the phone display to indic ate that the phone is disconnected from t he GSM network, and thus, all phone functions ar e deactivated. For compatibility between yo ur phone and a nother device with Bluetooth tec hnology, consult t he deviceâÂÂs documentatio n and y our Nokia dealer. In s ome countries, there may be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with y our local au thorities. Note : Using Blueto oth wire less techno logy consumes the batte ry and the phone' s opera ting time w ill be reduced. Be careful not to let it run in the background when performing other operations with your p hone. Setting up a Bluetooth c onnection 1. Press Menu , and select Settings , Connect ivity and Bluetoot h . 2. To activate t he Bluetooth function, select Bluetooth and On . The active Bluetooth c onnection is indicated by at the top of th e display. If you do not use the Bluetooth f eature for some time, y ou can deactivat e it to s ave power.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 102 Menu functions 3. Select Search for audio enhancements to search for compatible Bluetoot h audio devices and select the devic e that you w ant to connect t o the phone or select P air ed devices t o search for any Bluetooth dev ice in range and press New to list any Bluetooth device in range. Scro ll to a device and press Pa i r . 4. Enter the Bluetooth passcode of the device to associat e (âÂÂpairâÂÂ) and connect t he device to y our phone and star t using the d evice. You only need to give t his passcode when you connec t to the device f or the f irst time. Blue tooth co nnecti on Press Menu , and select Settings , Connectivit y and Bluetooth . Select ⢠A ct ive de vice to check which Bluetooth connection is cur r ently active. If you want to close the connection to t he selec ted device, pr ess Disconnect . ⢠P air ed devices to view a lis t of Bluetoo th devices t hat are c urrently paired with the phone. Scroll to the desired device. If y ou want to dele te the pairing to the dev ice, press De lete . Press Connect to connec t to the selected devic e or pres s Options to access some of th e following functions depending on the status of the dev ice and the Bluetooth connection. Se lect ⢠Ass ign short name t o give a nic kname (visible to you only) t o the select ed device ⢠Auto-conn. without conf irmation and select Ye s if you want t he phone connect to the s elected device aut omatically, or select No if you want the phone to ask for your per mission first. Blue tooth se ttings Press Menu , and select Settings , Connectivit y , Bluetooth . and Bluetooth settings t o define how your phone is shown t o other Bluetooth de vices. Select
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 103 Menu functions ⢠My phone's visibility and Shown to all t o show the phone to all other Bluet ooth devices or Hidd en to show the phone only to t he paired devices . The ph one is not visible to other devices when already connected to one device. ⢠My phone's name to c hange your phoneâÂÂs Bluetooth dev ice name th at can be s een by othe r Bluetooth device users. Infr are d You can set up the phone to receive da ta through it s infrared (IR) port. To us e an IR connect ion, the device w ith which y ou want to establish a connec tion must be IrDA compliant. You can send or receive data such as business cards, graphics, images , sound clips, videos and c alendar notes to or from a compatible phone or data device (f or example, a computer) via the IR port of your phone. Do not point th e IR (infrared ) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfe re with other IR devices . This device i s a Class 1 Lase r pr oduc t. Sending and receivi ng data via IR ⢠Ensure that th e IR ports of the sending and rece iving devices are pointing a t each other and that there are no obstructions between t he devices. The preferable distance between the two devices in an infrared connec tion is one met re at most. ⢠To activate t he IR port of your phone to receive dat a via IR, pres s Menu , and s elect Setti ngs , Conn ectivi ty and Infrared . ⢠The user of t he sending phone se lects the desired IR function to start data transfer. If data transf er is not star ted within two minut es after the activation of the IR port , the connect ion is cancelled and has to be star ted again.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 104 Menu functions IR connection indic ator ⢠When is shown continuously, the IR connection is activate d and your phone is ready to send or receive dat a via its IR port . ⢠When blinks, y our phone is trying to connec t to the other device or a connection has been lost. (E)G PR S GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) is a network service that a llows mobile phones to be used for sending and rece iving data over an Internet Protoc ol (IP) -based network. GPRS is a dat a bearer that enables wireless access to data networks such as the Int ernet. EGPRS (Enhanced GPRS) is s imilar to GPRS but enables faster connections. For mor e information on availability of (E)GPRS and data t ransfer speed, contact your network ope rator or service provider. The applications that may use (E)GP RS are MMS, vide o streaming, browsing sessions, e-mail, r emote SyncML, Java appli cation downloading and the PC dia l-up (for example, Int ernet and e- mail). Before you can use (E)GPRS technology: ⢠Contact your net work operator or service provider for availabilit y and s ubscription to t he (E)GPRS servi ce . ⢠Save the (E)GPRS settings for eac h of the applic ations used over (E)GPRS. For information on pricing, conta ct your network operator or s ervice pr ovider. Note that when you have selected GPRS as a data bearer, t he phone uses EGPRS instead of GPRS if this is available in the network. You cannot sele ct be tween EGPRS and GPRS but for some applications you may be able t o select either GPRS or G SM data (CSD, Circuit Swit ched Data).
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 105 Menu functions (E)G PR S c onne ct ion Press Menu , and select Settings , Connectivit y , GPRS and GPRS connection . ⢠Select Alway s online to set the phone to aut omatically reg ister to a (E)GPRS net work when you switch the phone on. When the (E)GPRS service is available, the i ndicator is shown on the top left of the dis play. When you sta rt an application us ing (E)GPRS, the conne ction between phone and network is established, the i ndicator is shown and da ta transfe r is possible. W hen you end the a pplication, the (E)GPRS connection is ended but t he registration to the (E)G PRS network remains. If you receive a call or a text message, or make a call dur ing a (E)GPRS connection, the indicator will be show n on the top right of the display to indicat e that the (E)GPRS connection is s uspended (on hold). Note that GPRS and EGPRS are not indicat ed separately, t he indicators for GPRS and EGPRS are the same. ⢠Select W hen needed and the (E)GPRS registration and connect ion are establis hed when an application using (E)G PRS needs it and c losed when y ou end the applicat ion. Note that your phone supports three simultaneous (E)GPRS connections. For exa mple, yo u can at the same time browse xHTML pa ges, receive multime dia messages a nd have an ongoing PC dial-up connection. (E) GPRS modem setti ngs You can connect the phone v ia Bluetooth wireless technology, inf rared or a data cable conne ction to a compatible PC and use the phone as a modem to enable (E)GPRS connec tivity from the PC. To define the se ttings for (E)GPRS conne ctions from your P C, press Menu , and select Settings , Connectivity , GPRS and GPRS modem settings .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 106 Menu functions ⢠Select Active access point and activate the access point you w ant to use. ⢠Select Ed it activ e access point to change the access point settings. ⢠Select Alias for access point . Ke y in the name you would like for t he activ ated access point and press OK . ⢠Select G PRS access point . Key in the Access Point Name (APN) to e stablish a connection to a (E)GPRS network and pres s OK . Contact your network operator or s ervice pr ovider for t he APN. You can also set the (E)GPRS dial- up service settings (Acce ss Point Name ) on your PC using the Nokia Modem Options software, see PC Suite on page 156. If you have set the se ttings both on your PC and on your phone, not e that the PCâÂÂs settings will be used. Call setti ngs Press Menu , and select Settings and Call settings . Se lect ⢠Call divert (networ k service). With c all divert, y ou can dir ect your inco ming calls to anot her number, for example, to your voice mailbox number. For details, contact your service provider. Divert options not supported by your SIM card or your networ k operator may not be shown. Select the divert option you want, for example, select Divert if busy to diver t voice calls when your number is busy or when you rejec t an incoming call. To set th e divert set ting to on, s elect Activ ate and t hen select th e timeout aft er which the call is diverted, if t his is available for the divert opt ion. To set the divert setting to off , select Ca nc el , or sele ct Check s tatus , if this is available for the diver t option, to check whether call divert is activated or not. Several divert options may be act ive at the same time. To see the divert indicators in standby mode, see Standby mode on page 28 .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 107 Menu functions ⢠Anykey answer and On and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pr essing any k ey, except , selection keys and , and . ⢠Automatic redial and On and your phone will make a maxi mum of ten atte mpts to connect the call after an unsuc cessful call attempt. ⢠Speed dialling and On and the names and phone numbers assigned t o the speed-dialling keys, from to , can be dialled by pressing and holding the co rresponding number ke y. ⢠Call waiting and Ac ti va te and t he network will notify you of an incoming call while you have a c all in progress (networ k service). See Call waiting on page 36. ⢠Summary after call and On and the phone will brief ly display the duration and cos t (network service) of th e call after each call. ⢠Send my caller ID and Ye s and your phone number will be displayed to the person you are c alling (network se rvice). Se lect Set by network and the setting agreed upon with your service provider is used. ⢠Line for outgoing calls which is a net work service , to select the phone line 1 or 2, that is, t he subscriber number, f or making calls . For example, you can have a private and a business line. F or more information on availa bility, contact yo ur network oper ator or se rvice provider. If you select Line 2 and have not subs cribed to this network serv ice, you will not be abl e to make calls. Howeve r, calls on both lines c an be answered regardless of t he selected line. If supported by your SIM card, you can prevent the line selection by selecting t he option Loc k . Tip : In standby mode, you can s witch from one line t o the other by pressing and holding .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 108 Menu functions Phon e set tin gs Press Menu , and select Settings , Phone set tings . ⢠Select Phone language to s et the display language of your phone. If you s elect Automatic the phone selects the la nguage accor ding to the infor mation on the SIM ca rd. ⢠Select Memor y status and selec t one of th e following items: ⢠Phone to view t he free me mory or th e used memory of your phone. ⢠Memory card to view the free memory, the us ed memory and the total si ze of your memor y card. You may also find the memory i nformation in t he menu of s ome of those functions, for ex ample, in gallery folder v iew. ⢠Select Aut omatic keyguard to set the k eypad of your phone to l ock automatically after a pre-set time delay when the phone is in standby mode and no funct ion of the phone has been used. Select On and you can set t he time from 5 seconds to 60 minut es. Refer also to Keypad lock (Key guard) on page 32. ⢠Select Se curi ty keyguard , enter the security code and select On to s et the phone to a sk for the security code when you unlock the keyguard. Refer also to Keypad lock (Key guard) on page 32. Note : Whe n Keygua rd is on, ca lls ma y be po ssib le to the eme rgency num ber pro gramme d in to your phone (e .g. 112, 911 or ot her officia l emerge ncy nu mber). Key i n the em ergency number and press . The number is disp layed only a fter you have keyed in its last digit. ⢠Select Cell info display and On to receive information from t h e network operator depending on the network cell use d (network s ervice).
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 109 Menu functions ⢠Select We lco m e no te and key in the note you would like to be shown brie fly when the phone is switched on. T o save th e note, press Save . ⢠Select O perator selec tion and Automatic and the phone automatica lly selects one of the cellular networks available in your area. If you select Manual , you can se lect a netw ork that has a roaming agreeme nt with your home network operator. If No n etwo rk acce ss is displayed, y ou must select a nother network. The phone stays in ma nual mode until the automatic mode is selected or another SIM car d is inserted into t he phone. ⢠Select Conf irm SIM service actions . See SIM services on page 155. ⢠Select H elp text act ivation to s et the phone t o show or not to sh ow the help texts. See a lso Usi ng the menu on page 42. ⢠Select St art-up tone to se t the phone t o play or not to play a s tart-up tone when the phone is switched on. IM and pr esen ce se tti ngs For the s ettings required for IM and presence, contact your network oper ator or servic e provider. To receive t he IM and presence settings as c onfiguration message, s ee Configuration sett ings service on page 33. Keying in the sett ings manually 1. Press Menu , and select Settings , IM and my pr esence settings and Current IM and presence settings . 2. Scroll t o the set you would like to activat e and press Activat e . You n eed to activ ate the conne ctio n set where you wa nt to sav e the sett ings. A connec tion set is a collection of settings required to make a connection to the ins tant messages and presence services.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 110 Menu functions 3. Select Edit current IM and presence settings . Select e ach of the set tings one by one and k ey in all t he required set tings according to the information you have receive d from your net work operator or service provider. N ote that the connection set tings are in the Connection settings menu. Enha nceme nt s ett ings The enhancement s ettings menu is s hown only if t he phone is or has been conne cted to a c ompatible mobile enhancement , chargers and handsfree units, for example. Press Menu , and select Settings and Enhancement sett ings . You can select an enhancement menu if the corresponding enhancement is or has been connec ted to the phone. Dependi ng on the enhancement, you c an select s ome of the f ollowing options: ⢠Default profile to s elect the prof ile that you want to be a utomatically activa ted when you connec t to the sel ected enhancement. You c an select an other profile while the enhancement is connected. ⢠Automatic answer t o set the phone to answer an incoming call aut omatically after five s econds. If the Incoming call alert is set to Beep once or Off , automatic ans wer will not be in use. ⢠Lights to set the lights permanently On . Select Automatic to s et the lights on for 15 seconds after a keypress. ⢠When the phone is connect ed to the fu ll car kit , select Ignition det ector and On to automatically switch off the phone approximately 20 seconds after you have switched off the carâÂÂs ignit ion. â¢F o r T ext phone , select Use t ext ph one and select Ye s to use t he text phone settings ins tead of headset or loopset settings. If your text phone supports baudot and CTM sending, s elect baudot. Always use the original cabl es supplied with t he text phone.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 111 Menu functions Secu rit y sett ing s Note : Whe n secu rity featur es that re stri ct cal ls ar e in us e (c all ba rring, c los ed use r grou p an d fixe d dialling) , calls may b e possible to certain e merge ncy numb ers in s ome net works (e.g. 112, 911 o r othe r official emerg ency numbers). Press Menu , and select Settings and Security settings . Select ⢠PIN code request to s et the phone to ask for your PIN code ever y time the phone is s witched on. Some SIM cards do not allow the PIN code request to be turned of f. ⢠Call barring service (network service) to res trict incoming cal ls to and outgoing calls f rom your phone. A barring pa ssword is required. ⢠Fixed dialling to restrict your outgoing c alls and text mes sages to s elected phone number s if this function is supported by your SIM card. The PIN2 code is required. When the fixed dia lling is on, (E)G PRS connections are not possible exc ept while sending text messages over a (E)GPRS connect ion. In this ca se, the recipientâÂÂs phone number and t he message centre number hav e to be included on the f ixed dialling list. ⢠Closed user group . Closed use r group is a network service that spec ifies the group of people whom you can call and who can call you. For more informat ion contact your network operat or or service provider. ⢠Security lev el . Select Phone and the phone will as k for t he security code whenever a new SIM card is inserted into the phone . Select Memory and the phone will as k for the security code when the SIM cardâÂÂs memory is selected and you want to change the memory in use (see Select ing settings for contact s on page 83) or copy from one memory t o another (Copying contacts on page 91). ⢠Access codes to change the security code, PIN code, PIN 2 code or bar ring password. Codes can only include numbers fr om 0 to 9.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 112 Menu functions Restore factory settings To reset some of the menu settings to their original values , press Menu , and select Settings and Restore fact ory sett ings . Key in the security code and press OK . Note that the data you have keyed in or downloaded, for example, the names and phone number s saved in c ontacts are not de leted. â Operato r menu This menu lets you acces s a portal t o services pr ovided by y our network operat or. The name and the icon depends on the ope rator. For more information contact your network o perator. If this menu is not shown the following menu numbers changes accordingly. The operator can update this menu w ith a s ervice mes sage. For more informat ion refer to Se rvice inbox on page 151. â Galler y In this menu you c an manage gra phics, images, r ecordings and tones that you have saved, for exa mple, from mult imedia messages. These files are arranged in folders. Note : Yo ur phone m ust b e sw itched on to us e this function. D o not swit ch the p hone on whe n wi reless phone use is pro hibit ed or w hen it may ca use interfe rence o r dang er. Your phone supports a D igital Rights Management (DRM) system to protect ac quired content. A piec e of content, f or example r inging tone, can be protected and associated with cert ain usage rules , for example number of usage times and a cer tain usage period. The rules are defined in t he contentâÂÂs activation key which can be deliv ered either togeth er with the content or indepe ndently depending on the servi ce provider. You may be a ble to update th ese activa tion keys . Always check the delive ry terms of any conte nt and activat ion key be fore acquir ing them, as t hey may b e subject to a fee.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 113 Menu functions The files stored in G allery use a memory that has a capacit y of approx . 8 MByte in the phone . If your phone displays a message that the memory is full, delet e some of the files in Gallery before continuing. A compatible multimedia card can be used to exten t the memor y capacity to s tore images, ringing tones, video c lips and sound clips in gallery. Plea se no te that it is not pos sible to stor e Java games and applications on t he multimedia card. 1. Press Menu and select Gallery . A list of folders is show n. Images , Video clips , Music files , Graphics , Tones and Recordings are the original folder s on the phone. If a multimedia card is inse rted in the phone, a multi media card icon is shown. 2. Scroll t o the desired f older and pre ss Ope n to view a list of f iles in the f older or pres s Options and one of the opt ions may be av ailable: ⢠Add f ol der , Delet e folder , Move , Rename folder , Details , Sort , Type of view , Memory s tatus , Activation key list and Downloads . You cannot delete, rename or mov e the original f olders on the phone. With a multimedia car d additiona l options may be available: Set pas sword (to protect the multimedia card against unauthorised use wit h other devices), Change password , Delete password , Rename me m. card an d Format mem. card . When a multimedia card password (1 to 8 digit s) is set the card is als o locked. The phone has a list with up to five pas swords. If the pa ssword is known to the phone the multimedia can be accessed wit hout entering the password. If the password is not on the list a locked multimedia card appears loc ked. If a multimedia c ard password is deleted the card is als o unlocked. Warning: Formatting your multimedia car d will delet e all files and folders stored on it.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 114 Menu functions ⢠Do wnloads to download more images, tones a nd videos. Se lect Graphic downloads , Tone downloads or Video downloads . The list of available brows er bookmarks is shown. Sele ct More bookmarks t o access t he list of bookmar ks in the Web menu, see Bookmarks on page 150. Select the a ppropriate bookmar k to connect to the des ired site. If the connect ion fails, y ou may not be able to access t he page f rom the servic e whose connect ion settings ar e currently ac tive. In this c ase , enter th e Web menu and activate another set of s ervice settings, see Making a connection to a service on page 146. Try again to connec t to the site. For availabilit y of differ ent services, pr icing and tariffs, contact your network operator and/or the service provider. Download content only fr om the sources you trust. 3. If you hav e opened a folder , select the file you want to view and press Open . Or: Pre ss Options and use one of the following functions that may be ava ilable for t he selected file: ⢠De lete , Send , Edit image , Mov e , Rename , Set as wallpaper , Set as ring tone , D etails , Type of view , Sort , Del ete all , Open in sequence , Play , Zoom , Mute audio ( U nmute audio ), Se t contrast , A dd fol d er , Memory status . ⢠Send to send the s elected file via multime dia (MMS), infrared connect ion, or Bluetooth wireless technology. ⢠Delete all to dele te all the f iles and folders in the selected folder. ⢠Edit image to inser t text, a f rame or clip-art into the se lected picture or to cro p the image. ⢠Open in sequence to v iew the f iles in the folder one by one. ⢠Play to listen t o or to vie w a sound or i mage file that is contained in the mes sage. ⢠Zoom to increas e the size of the image that is c ontained in the mes sage. ⢠Mute audio ( Unmute audio ) to mute (unmute) the s ound file.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 115 Menu functions ⢠Set contrast to adjust the contrast level of the image. ⢠Activ ate c o nten t to update the ac tivation key of the selected file. The option is only shown if the activation ke y updating is supported by t he file. ⢠Act ivation key list t o view the lis t of all av ailable acti vation keys. You can delet e the activ ation keys, for example del ete the expir ed ones. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing t ones, and other c ontent from being copied, modified, t ransferred or forwarded. â Me dia Note : Your phone mus t b e switch ed on to use the f unctio ns in the Me dia menu. Do not switch the phon e on when wirel ess phon e use is prohib ited or when it may cau se interf erence or dang er. Camera Note : Obey all local la w s governin g the taki ng of picture s. Do not use this feature il legally. You can take phot os or record video clips wit h the phone âÂÂs built-in camera. The camera le ns is on the back of t he p hone, and the dis play of the phone work s as a viewfinder. The camera produces pict ures in JPEG format and t he video c lips in 3GP f ormat. If there is not enough memory t o take a n ew photo, you need to f ree some by deleting old phot os or other files in the gallery.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 116 Menu functions Taki ng a photo 1. Press Menu , and select Media , Camera and Standard photo , P ortrait photo o r if the light ing is dim for taking photos, s elect Night mode . If you want to add the photo to a name or phone number saved in contacts, s elect Portrait photo . Tip: To quick ly open t he camera viewf inder with standard photo view , pres s in standby mode. To quickly change the camera mode, for example vi deo, press or . 2. The live image appea rs on the display, and y ou can use the display as a viewfi nder. 3. To take a photo, press Capture . When taking a photo, a shutter sound is heard. The phone saves t he photo in the Images folder of t he Gallery menu if Default folder is selec ted. With O ther folder you can select another folder. See Camera settings on page 117 . To define the default title for the photo, see Default title in Camera se ttings on page 117. 4. Select Back to take another pho to, or press Options and select, for example, an option to delete or rename the saved photo, se nd it as a multimedia message, or attach the photo to a name or phone number in contac ts, or acces s the galler y. Tip: You can a ctivate t he self-timer of the came ra for one pict ure at a time. Pres s Menu , and sele ct Media , Camera , and Standard photo , Por trait photo or Night mode . Press Options and sele ct Self-timer . Press St art , and after the timeout, t he camera takes the photo and s aves it in the G allery menu. Wh ile the self-timer is running, a beeping sound is heard. Recor ding a vi deo cl ip 1. Press Menu , and select Media , Camera and Video . 2. To st art recording a vide o clip, pr ess Record . When you are rec ording a video clip, the indicator and the remaining recording time ar e shown on the top of t he display. To pause the r ecording, press Pa u s e and to r esume the r ecording, press Continue .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 117 Menu functions 3. To st op the recording, p ress Stop . The phone saves the recor ding in the Video clips folder of t he Gallery menu if Default folder is sele cted. With Other folder you can select another folder . See Camera settings on page 117. Press Options and select, for example, an option t o delete or rename the saved video clip, se nd it as a multimedia message, or access the gallery. Camera settings Press Menu , and select Me dia , Camera and Settings . Select ⢠Image quality to define how much the photo file will be compressed when saving t he image. Select High , Normal or Basic . High p rovides the best image qualit y but take s more memory. ⢠Video clip length to select the length of the vid eo clips t hat you record. The maximum le ngth of a video clip is approximately 4 minut es in duration, depending on conditions . Only video clip s that are of default lengt h or shor ter can be sent in a multimedia me ssage. ⢠Camera sounds to se t the shut ter so und and th e sel f-ti mer to ne to On or Off . ⢠Def ault ti tle to define the tit le that will be used when saving a photo or a vide o clip. If you select Automatic , the default title will be used, or if you select My tit le , you can k ey in or edit a new title . ⢠Image storage to de fine the folder that will be used to stor e the photos or videos. Se lect Default fol d er to use the default folder, or select Other folder to define t he folder by yourself.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 118 Menu functions Medi a playe r With the me dia player you c an view, play and download files , for exa mple images, a udio, video and animated images fr om different kinds of sources. Further the media player allows you to see compa tible streaming videos fr om a net work server. Streaming functionality is an operator dependent feature and requires network support. Check the availability of these servic es, pricing and tariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose service y ou wish t o use. Service pr oviders will also give y ou instructions on how to use t heir servi ce s. Press Menu , and select Me dia and Media player . Sel ect ⢠Open gallery to open the Ga llery . See G allery on page 112. ⢠Bookmarks to open the Bookmarks . Se e Bookmarks on page 150. ⢠Go to addr ess and key in the address of t he service and press OK . ⢠Media downloads to download mor e graphics, tones or videos t o your phone. D ownload content only from sources you trust. Sett ing up th e phone for a st reaming se rvice You may receive the s treaming settings as a configura tion message from t he network operator or service provider that off ers the service that you want to use. For more infor mation and for t he appropriate s ettings, contact t he netw ork operator or service provider that offers the s ervice that you want t o use. T o receive th e service settings as c onfiguration message, see Configuration settings service on page 33. You can also key in t he settings manually or add a nd edit the s ettings with PC Suite.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 119 Menu functions To key i n the settings manually: 1. Press Menu , and select Media , Media play er and Streaming sett. . 2. Select Active connection s ettings . 3. Scroll t o the connect ion set you would like to activate and press Ac tiv at e . You need to activate the connection s et where you want to save the service settings. A connec tion set is a collection of settings required to make a connection to a service. 4. Select Edit activ e connection settings . Select e ach of the set tings one by one and k ey in all t he required set tings according to the information you have receive d from your net work operator or service provider. Note that all t he bearer-relat ed settings ar e in the Bearer settings menu. Music player Your phone includes a music player for listening to music tracks, recordings or other MP3 or AAC sound files that you have transferred to the phone with t he Nokia Audio Manager applica tion. Music files stored in a folder in the phoneâÂÂs memory or in a folder of t he multimedia card, will automatically be detected and added to the default track list. You can listen to t he sound files via a c ompatible headset, such as HDS-3, or the phoneâ s loudspeaker. Press Menu , and select Me dia and Music player . To transfer mus ic tracks from a compatible PC and manage the music track s and track lis ts, see the instructions for t he Nokia Audio Manager application t hat is included with t he Nokia PC Suite softw are. You can make or answer a call while us ing the music player. During a call, the playback is paused.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 120 Menu functions Play ing the musi c track s transferr ed to the phone When you open the Music player menu, the details of the first track on the default track list are shown. To play a track, s croll to the t rack that y ou want and press Play or pr ess . ⢠To adjust th e volume leve l, use the vol ume keys on the side of the phone. ⢠To stop the playing, press St op or press . ⢠To skip to the beginning of th e next track , press down. To skip t o the beginning of the previous trac k, pr ess tw ice . ⢠To rewind the current track, press and hold . To fast forward the current track, pr ess and hold . Release the key at t he position you want. War ning ! Listen to music a t a moderate l evel. Contin uous exp osure to hi gh volume may dama ge your hearing. Sett ings for t he music p l ayer In the Music player menu, pressing Options allows acc ess to t he following sett ings. ⢠Play options : Select Random to play t he tracks on the track list in random order. Sele ct Repeat to play the current track or t he entire t rack list repeatedly. ⢠Music downloads : You can connect t o a browser s ervice r elated to the cur rent track. T his function i s only available when the a ddress of the se rvice is incl uded in the track . For more inform ation, see Downloading content and applications on page 16. ⢠Loudspeaker : You can lis ten to the music player via t he phoneâÂÂs loudspeaker. ⢠Headset : You can lis ten to the music player via a compat ible headset c onnected to t he phone. Tip: When using a headset, you can skip to t he next track by pressing the headset key quickly. T o stop the playing, press and hold the headset key.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 121 Menu functions ⢠Track list : You can view all the track s available on the track list and play the de sired track. To play a track, scr oll to the des ired track and press Play or press . If you pres s Options , you can refres h the track li st (for example after a dding new track s to the list) and change t he track list that is shown when you open the Music playe r menu, if several track lis ts are available in the phone. Radio To listen to t he radio on your phone connect the compatible headset to the headset connec tor on the bottom of the phone. The lead of the heads et functions as t he radio antenna, so let it hang freely. Note that t he quality of the radio br oadcast depends on the radio stationâÂÂs coverage in t hat particular area. 1. To turn on t he radio, pr ess Menu and select Media and Radio . On t he display are ⢠Channel location number and the name of the radio c hannel if y ou have saved t he channel. ⢠Frequency of t he radio channel. 2. If you ha ve alrea dy saved radio channels, you can sc roll to the channe l you would like to lis ten to, or select a radio channel locatio n 1 to 9 by pressing the c orresponding number k ey. When using the compatible hea dset supplied w ith the headse t key, press the key t o scroll t o the desired saved radio c hannel. 3. When the radio is on, press Options and sele ct Switch off t o turn off th e radio. Tip : To quickly turn off th e radio, press and hold .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 122 Menu functions Tuni ng a radi o channel When the radio is on, press and hold or to start the cha nnel search. Searc hing stops when a channel is found. To save t he channel, press Options , and select Save channel . Key in t he name of the channel and press OK . Select the location where you want to save the channel. Tip : To quickly save the channe l in a location 1 to 9, press and hold the correspo nding number key, then key in the name of the channe l and press OK . Usin g the rad io When the radio is on, press Options and select ⢠Switch off to turn off the radio. ⢠Save channel to save t he radio channel y ou have found, refer to Tuning a radio channel a bove. Up to 20 radio channels can be saved. ⢠Automatic tuning . Briefly pr ess or to s tart the c hannel search upwards or downw ards. The search stops when a channel has been found, pr ess OK . To save the channel, see Save channel above. ⢠Manual tuning . Briefly press or to move the channel search 0.05 MHz upwards or downwards or press and hold down the k eys to quickly s earch upwards or downwards f or a channel. To save the channel, press OK and see Save channel above. Tip : To quickly select Manual tuning , pr ess w hen in th e Radio menu. ⢠Set frequency . If you know t he frequency of the radio channe l you would like to lis ten to (between 87.5 MHz and 108.0 MHz), key it in and press OK . To s ave the channel, se e Save channel a bove. Tip : To quickly select Set frequency , press when in the Radio menu.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 123 Menu functions ⢠Delete channel . To delete a saved channel, scroll to it, press De let e , and OK . ⢠Rename . Key in a new name for the saved channel and press OK. ⢠Loudspeaker (or Headset ) to li sten to the r adio using the louds peaker (or headse t). Keep the he adset connected to the phone. T he lead of the headset f unctions as t he radio antenna . ⢠Mono out put (or Stereo out put ) to listen to t he radio in mono (or in stereo). You can normal ly make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the r adio. The v olume of the radio is muted. W hen you end t he call, the radio volume will automatically be tur ned up again. When an application using a (E)GPR S or HSCSD connection is sending or receiving data, it may interfere with the radio. Voice reco rder You can record pieces o f speech, sound or an a ctive call for three minut es. For example, this is useful when recording a name and phone number for writing them down lat er. Note : Obey all local la w s governin g recordi ng of calls. Do not use this fea ture ill egally. Recor ding 1. Press Menu , select Media and Voice recorder . 2. To st art the rec ording, select Record . To start the recording during a ca ll, pres s Options, and selec t Record . While rec ording a ca ll, all par ties to the c a ll will hear a faint be eping sound approximat ely every five seconds. When recording a call, hold the phone in the normal position near to your e ar.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 124 Menu functions 3. To en d the recording, pres s Stop . The recor ding will be saved in the Recordings folder of the Gallery menu. 4. To list en to the lates t recording, s elect Play last recorded . 5. To send t o the l atest recording, s elect Send last recor ded . The r ecording can be sent via IR, Bluetooth wireless technology or MMS. Lis t of rec ordings Press Menu , and select Me dia , V oice rec order and Re cor din gs li st . The list of folders in the Gallery is shown. Open Recordings to see t he list wit h recordings. Pr ess Options and you can select s ome of the options for files in the Gallery . See Gallery on page 112. Defi ning st ore fol der To select another f old er than the default folder Recordings in the G allery menu, pr ess Menu , and s elect Media , V oice rec order and Select memory . Select a folder from the list of folder s in Galler y . Media equalizer With the e qualiser you can control the sound quality when using the music player b y amplifying or attenuating frequency bands. Press Menu , and select Me dia and Media equaliser . To activate a s et, scroll t o one of the equaliser se ts and press Ac tiva te . To view or edit a selected set, pres s Options and select View , Edit or Rename . Not a ll sets can be edited or renamed.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 125 Menu functions â Or gani ser Note : Your phone mus t b e switch ed on to use the f unctio ns in the Organ iser menu. Do not switch the phone on when wirele ss phone use is prohibited or when it may ca use inte rference o r dang er. Alarm cl ock The alarm clock uses the t ime format set for the c lock. The alarm c lock works even when the phone is switched off if t here is enough power in the battery. Press Menu , and select Organise r and Alarm clock . ⢠Select Alar m time , key i n the alar m time an d press OK . To change th e alarm time , select On . ⢠Select Repe at alarm to s et the phone to alert you on selec ted days of t he week. ⢠Select Alar m tone and select t he default alarm tone, personalise the alarm tone by s electing one from the ringing tone list or from Gallery, or set a radio c hannel as the alar m tone. If you select the radio as an alarm tone, connect the headset to the phone. The phone uses the most recently liste ned-to channel as an alarm tone via the loudspeaker. If t he headset is removed or the phone is switched of f, the default ala rm tone will be used instead of the r adio. When the ala r m tim e expir es The phone will sound an alert tone, and flash Alarm! and the current time on the dis play. Press Stop to stop th e alarm. If you let the phone continue to sound the alar m for a minute or press Snooze , the alarm s tops for about t en minutes and t hen resumes.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 126 Menu functions If th e alarm time is reached while t h e phone i s switched o ff, the pho ne switches its elf on and starts sou nding the alarm tone . If you p ress Sto p , the phone as ks whether you want to acti vate the phone for calls , Swit ch the phone on? . Press No to swi tch off the phone or Yes to make and receive ca lls. Note : Do n ot pr ess Yes when wireles s phon e use is prohi b ited or when i t may cause interfere n ce o r danger . Calen dar The calendar helps you t o keep t rack of reminders , calls that you need t o make, me etings, an d birthdays. The calendar uses shared memory, see Sha red memory on page 19. Press Menu , and select Organise r and Calendar . Tip: To quick ly open t he Calendar menu, pre ss in standby mode. Scroll to th e day you want. The cur rent day is indicated by a frame ar ound the day. If there are any notes set for t he day, the day is in bold type. To view the day n ot es, press Vi ew . To view a week, press Options and select Week v iew . ⢠To view a single note, s croll to the not e you want t o view, pres s Vi e w . The not e view allow s you t o view the details of the selected note. You can scr oll through the not e. ⢠For example, t here are also options for making a note, or for sending a note via IR, Bluetooth wireless technology , or as a note direct ly to another c ompatible phoneâÂÂs calendar or as a text message or a multimedia message. There are options for dele ting, editing, moving and repeating a note and for c opying a note to another day.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 127 Menu functions To delete all not es in the calendar, s elect the month or week view, pr ess Options and select Delete all notes . Settings to se t the date , time, date or time fo rmat, or t he first day of the week . In the Au to- dele t e notes option you can set the phone to delete old notes automatically after a s pecified time. However, th e repeat notes, for ex ample, birthday notes, will not be deleted. Making a calend ar note For keying in letters and numbers, see W riting text on page 38. Press Menu , and select Organise r and Calendar . Scr oll to th e date you wan t, press Options and select Ma ke a no te . Select one of the following note t ypes: ⢠Me eti ng - Key in the note (or press Options and search f or the name in contact s). Press Options and select Sav e . Key in th e location f or the meeting and press Options and select Save . Key in t he start time for t he meeting and press OK , and t hen the end time and pres s OK . To set the a lar m f or the n ote , se lect With tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Call - Key in the phone number, pres s Options and sele ct Save . Key in the name, pr ess Options and select Sav e . (Instead of key ing in the phone number, press Options to searc h for the na me and number in contac ts.) Then key in t he time for the call and press OK . To s et the alar m for th e note, sele ct W ith tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time. ⢠Birthday - Key in t he personâÂÂs name (or pres s Options and s earch for it in contacts), press Options and select Save . Then key in th e year of birth, and pres s OK . To set the alarm for the note, sele ct W ith tone or Silent (no alarm tone) and then set the alarm time.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 128 Menu functions ⢠Memo - Key in t he note, pr ess O ptions and select Save . Key in the end day f or the not e and press OK . T o set the alarm for t he note, selec t With ton e or Silent (no alar m tone) and then s et the alarm time. ⢠Reminder - Key in the s ubject for the reminder, pr ess Options and select Save . To set the ala rm for the n ote, sel ect Alarm on and then set t he alarm time . When you have s et the alar m, the indicator is displaye d when you vie w the not es. When the phone sounds an a larm for a not e The phone beeps , and displa ys the note . With a cal l note on the display, y ou can call t he displaye d number by pressing . ⢠To stop the alar m without vie wing the note, press Exit . ⢠To stop the alar m and to view the note, press View . Press Snooze and the phone sounds an alarm after ten minutes again. To-do lis t You can save a note for a task that you have t o do, select a priority leve l for the note and mark it as done when you have complet ed it. You can sort the notes by pr iority or by dat e. The to-do list uses shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19 . Press Menu , and select Organise r and To-do list . Press Add note to mak e a note. Key in the not e and press Save . Select t he priorit y for t he note, High , Medium , or Low . T he phone automatically s ets the d eadline without an alarm for the note. To change the deadline, view the not e and select the deadline option. Or scroll to a note and pres s Vie w or press O ptions .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 129 Menu functions ⢠To add a ne w note, select Ad d . ⢠For example, y ou can also view and delete the selected not e and delete all the note s that you have marked as done. You can sort the notes by priority or by deadline, send a note to another phone as a text message or a multimedia me ssage, s ave a note as a calendar note, or access t he calendar . While viewing a not e, you c an also, f or example, s elect an option to edit the select ed note, edit the deadline or priority for the note, or mark the note as done. Note s You can us e the Notes application for writing and sending notes to compatible devices via IR, Bluetooth wireless technology, SMS or MMS. The Notes application uses shared memory, s ee Shared memor y on page 19. 1. To acces s Not es , press Menu and select Organiser an d Notes . The phone will ask y ou to set the dat e and time, if they have not already been set whe n you st art to write a not e. 2. To a dd a note, pre ss Add note or press Options and select Ma k e a n ot e . 3. Key in the note and selec t Save . You c an ins ert the c urrent ti me a nd date to th e note. If the re is no t enou gh spac e to ins ert the m to the note, th e phone will a sk you to dele te the appropriate number of characters from your note. You can also send t he note to a c ompatible device via IR, Bluetooth wirel ess technology, MMS, or as a text mes sage (SMS). If the not e is too long t o be sent as a text message, the phone w ill ask y ou to delete the ap propriate number of character s from your note. The other options for notes include options for view ing, deleting, and editing a note. While editing a note, you can also exit the text editor without saving the changes.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 130 Menu functions Wallet In Wallet you can save personal information, for example, credit card number s and addresses. The data that are sav ed in the wallet can eas ily be r etrieved while br owsing to automa tically fill in data fields, for example, when making purchas es and the s ervice support s wallet functi onality. You can als o save access codes to mobile services that r equest a us er name and password. The data in the wallet is protected with a wallet code that you can define when you access wallet for the firs t time . At Create wallet code ke y in the code and press OK to confirm it a nd at Verify wallet code key in t he code again and press OK . See also W allet code (4 to 10 digits) on page 16 . If you want to delete all the content of the wallet and the wallet code, key in *#7370925538# (*#res wallet# in letters) in standby mode. You also need t he phoneâÂÂs secur ity code, s ee Access c odes on page 15. To add the cont ent into t he wallet menu, and to edit it, ac cess the w allet menu. To us e the c ontent of the wallet in a mobile servic e, access the wallet vi a the br owser, see W eb on page 144. Acc ess ing the wa llet me nu To access the wallet menu, press Me nu , select Or ganiser and Wallet . Key in your wa llet code and press OK , see Wallet settings on page 133. Select ⢠W allet profiles to create c ard combinations, for example, for different s ervices. A wallet profile is helpful if the s ervice ask s for many dat a items to be filled in. You c an select t he appropriate w allet profile instead of s electing different cards separately. ⢠Cards to save personal card inf ormation. You can save payme nt card, loy alty card, and acc ess card information, for ex ample username and password combina tions for dif ferent services, a nd also addresses and user dat a. See Saving card det ails on page 131.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 131 Menu functions ⢠Tickets to save the notifica tions of e- tickets that you have bought via a mobile service. To view the tic ket s, pre ss O ptions and select View . ⢠Receipts to save receipts of mobile purchases. ⢠P ersonal notes to save a ll kinds of per sonal infor mation that you want to ke ep protected by the wallet PIN code. See Personal notes on page 132. ⢠Settings , see Wallet settings on pag e 133. Savi ng card de tails 1. Acces s the wallet and select Ca rds . 2. Select t he car d type to s ave details: ⢠P ayment cards for credit and debit cards. ⢠Loyalty ca rds for members hip cards. ⢠Access cards for persona l usernames and passwords to online services. ⢠User i nfo card s for customised personal preferences for online services. ⢠Address cards for contact i nformation, for exa mple, for deliv ery and billing addresses. 3. If no card is added, pr ess Add new , otherwise, press Options and select Add new . 4. Fill in the fields f or the details and press Done . If supported by your service provider, you can also rec eive car d information to your phone as configuration message. You will be notified as to which category the c ard belongs to . Save or discard the received card. You can view and rename the saved card but not edit it. For availability of receiving card information as configuration settings, contact t he card issuer or service provider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 132 Menu functions Pers onal not es You can save per sonal notes, f or example, account numbers, pas swords, codes or notations. Access the wallet and select P ersonal notes . Pres s O ptions and you can view, add, edit a s elected note and sort notes eit her by name or date or delete notes . When viewing a note, you can edit or d elete the selected not e. The option Send v ia text msg. is for copying the note as a text message or a mult imedia message and Copy to calendar is for copying the not e to the calendar as a memo. Use det ail is for extracting numbers, e-mail addresses and web addresses from a not e. Crea ting a wal let prof ile When you have s aved your personal card de tails, y ou can combine th em together int o a wallet profile. You can use the profile t o retrieve wall et data from different cards while browsing. 1. Acces s the wallet and select W allet profiles . 2. To cre ate a new walle t profile if no profile is added, press Add n ew . Otherwise, pre ss Options and sele ct A dd new . 3. Fill in the following fields and press Done . Some of the fields contain data that are s elected from the wallet. You need t o save those data before you can create a wallet profile. ⢠Select payment c ard next - select a car d from the pa yment car d list. ⢠Select loya lty card next - s elect a card from the loyalty card list. ⢠Select access card next - select a card from the acc ess ca rd list. ⢠Select user info card next - select a card from the us er data card list. ⢠Select billing add ress next - select an address from t he address card list. ⢠Select shipping addr ess next - select an add ress from the addr ess card l ist. ⢠Select rece ipt delivery addres s next - select an address fr om the address c ard list.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 133 Menu functions ⢠Select rec eipt delivery met hod next - select the way to deliver the receipt, To phone number or To e-mail address . ⢠W allet profile name: enter a na me for the pr ofile. Wallet settings Access the wallet and select Settings . Select ⢠Change code to change the wallet code. ⢠RFID to set RFID ID with the RFID code and RFID ty pe . (RFID = Radio Frequency Identification, technology to s ecurely conduct c ommerce transac tions with your phone) Gui del ine s f or p ayi ng f o r yo ur p urc has es w i th t he w al let ⢠To do your s hopping, access t he desired w eb site that s upports the wa llet. The service nee ds to support the Elec tronic Commerce Modeling L anguage specification. See on page 146. Choose the pr oduct you want to buy and read carefully all provided information before your purchase. Note : The t ext may not fit within a single s creen. Ther efore, make sure to scroll through and read all of the text before your purchase. ⢠To pay for the items you wish to buy , the phone asks whether you want to us e wallet or not. The phone also asks for your walle t PIN c ode. ⢠Select the c ard you want to pay with from the Payment cards lis t. Provided that the data f orm you receive f rom the servi ce provider supports t he Elect ronic Commerce Modeling Language specification, t he phone automatica lly fills in t he credi t card informa tion or the wallet profile fr om the wallet. ⢠Approve the purchas e, and the information is forwar ded.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 134 Menu functions ⢠You may re ceive an ac knowledgement or a digital rec eipt of the pur chase. ⢠To close the wallet, select C lose w allet . If you do not use the wallet for 5 minutes, it w ill be automatically closed. Note : If yo u hav e tried to a cces s or ha ve acc essed confi dent ial i nforma tion re quiri ng pa sswor ds ( for example yo ur bank account) , empty the cache of your phone after each u se. To em pt y th e c ac he , s ee T h e ca c he me m ory on p ag e 1 5 2. Sync hron isat ion Synchronisation allows you to s ave your cal endar and c ontacts data in a remote Intern et server (network service) or in a comp atible PC. If yo u have saved data in the remote Inte rnet server, y ou can synchronise your phone by starting the synchronisation from your phone. You can als o synchronise the data in your phoneâÂÂs contact s, calendar a nd notes to correspond with the data of your compatible PC by starting the s ynchronisation from your PC. T he contact data i n your SIM ca rd will not be synchronised. Note that answer ing an incoming call during s ynchronisation will end the synchronisat ion and you will need to re-sta rt it. Syn chr o nisi n g from you r pho ne Before synchronising from your phone, you may need to do t he following: ⢠Subscribe to a synchronisation service. For more information on availability and the synchronisation service s ettings, contac t your network ope rator or s ervice provider. ⢠Retrieve t he synchronisation set tings from your net work oper ator or service provider, see Settings for the synchronisation on page 135.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 135 Menu functions ⢠Set the connect ion settings you need for the s ync hronisation. See Setti ng up the phone for a service on page 145. To start the s ynchronisation from your phone: 1. Activate t he connection settings you need for the synchronisat ion. See Set ting up the phone for a service on page 145. 2. Press Menu , select Organiser , Synchronisation , Se ttings and A ctive I nternet s ync setting s . Scroll to th e set you wish to ac tivat e and pr es s Activ ate . Mark the data to be synchr onised. See Da ta t o be synchronised in Settings for t he synchronisation on page 135. 3. Press Menu , and select Organiser , Synchronis ation and Synchronise . 4. The marked data of the active s et will be synchronised af ter confirmation. Note that synchronising for the first time or after an interrupted synchronisation may take up to 30 minutes to c omplete, if the c ontacts or ca lendar are fu ll. Sett ings for t he synchr onisatio n You may receive the synchronisatio n settings as a c onfiguration message from the network oper ator or service provider. To receive the settings a s configuration message , see Configuration settings service on page 33. Keying in the sett ings manually 1. Press Menu , select Organiser , Synchronisation and Settings . 2. Select Ac tive In te rnet sy nc se tti ngs . 3. Scroll t o the set you wish to activat e and press Ac tiv at e . You need to activate the s et where you want to s ave the synchronisation s ettings. A set is a collection of settings required to make a connection to a se rvice.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 136 Menu functions 4. Select Edit activ e Internet sync settings . Sele ct each setting one by one and key in a ll the required sett ing s. ⢠Settings' name . Key in the name f or the s et and pres s OK . ⢠Data to be synchronised . Mark the data y ou want to s ynchronise, Contacts , Calendar and/or Note s and press Done . ⢠Database addresses . Selec t Contacts dat abase , Calendar database and/or Notes database to be edited. Key in t he name of the database and press OK . ⢠User name . Key in the user name and pres s OK . ⢠Pa s s w o r d . Key in the password and pres s OK . ⢠Synchronisation server . Key in the na me of the s erver and press OK. ⢠Connection settings to define connec tion settings required for s ynchronisation. See Ke ying in the service settings manually on page 145. Select each of the s ettings one by one and k ey in all the required s ettings. Contact your network operator or service provider f or the s ettings. Select PC s ync settings to ke y in the settings for server alert ed synchronis ation. Select ⢠User name . Key in the user name and pres s OK . ⢠Pa s s w o r d . Key in the password and pres s OK . Syn chr o nisi n g from you r PC To synchronise contacts, t he calendar and the not e s fr om your PC, use either an IR connec tion or Bluetooth connection or a data cable. You also need the PC Suite s oftware of your phone installed on your PC. Start the synchronisation from your PC using PC suite.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 137 Menu functions â Ap plica tions Note : The phone must be sw itched on to us e this functi on. Do not s witch on the phone whe n the use of a wire less ph one i s prohi bite d or wh en it m ay c ause inte rference or danger. Games Your phone software includes some games specially designed f or this Nokia phone. Launc hing a game 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Games and Se lect game . 2. Scroll t o a game or a game set (the name depends on the game ). 3. Press . If the selec tion is a si ngle game it will be launched. Otherwise, a list of games in the select ed game set is displayed. To launch a single game, scroll to the desired game and press . Note that running some games may consume the phoneâÂÂs batt ery faster (and you may need to connect the phone to t he charger). Other option s avail able for a game or game set Options for games, see Other options available f o r an applicat ion or applicat ion set on page 139. Game downl oads Press Menu , and select Applications , Games and Game downloads . The list of available boo kmarks is shown. Selec t More bookmarks to acces s the list of bookmarks in the Web menu, see Bookmarks on page 150.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 138 Menu functions Select the appr opriate bookmark to connect to the desired page. If the connec tion fails, you may not be able to a ccess the page from t he service whose connec tion settings are currently active. In this case , enter the Web menu and act ivate another set of s ervice sett ings, see Ma king a connect ion to a servic e on page 146. Try again to c onnect to the page. For the av ailability of diff erent services, pricing a nd tariffs, cont act your ne twork operator and/or service provider. Download content only from sources you trust. To download more ga mes, refer also to Downloading an a pplication on page 140. Note that when downloading a game, it may b e saved in the Applicat ions menu instead of the Games menu. Memory status for g ames To view the amount of memor y available for game and a pplication installations , press Menu , and sele ct Applications , Games and Memory . See also Memory status for applications on page 141. The games use shared memory, see Shared memory on page 19. Game set t ings Press Menu , and select Applications , Games and App. settings to set sounds, lights and shakes for the game.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 139 Menu functions Applica tions Your phone software includes some Java applic at ions specially des igned for t his Nokia phone. Launc hing an ap plica tion 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Collection and Select application . 2. Scroll t o an application or an applicat ion set (the name depends on the applic ation). 3. Press Op en . If the selection is a single application it will be la unched. Otherwise, a list of appl ications in the sel ected application set is displayed. To launch a single application, scroll to the desired application and press Open . Note that running s ome applications may consume the phoneâÂÂs battery fas ter (and you may need to conn ect the phon e to the cha rger). Other option s avail able for an app lication or applic ation set ⢠De lete to delet e the application or applicati on set from t he phone. Note that if you delete a pre-installed applicat ion or a n application set f rom your phone, you may download it a gain to your phone from the support area o n the NokiaâÂÂs web site ww w.nokia.com. ⢠Details to give additional informati on about the applic ation. ⢠Update version to c heck if a new vers ion of the applic ation is available for download from the services (netwo rk service). ⢠W eb page to pr ovide further inf ormation or addit ional data for th e application f rom an Internet page. This feature needs t o be supported by the network. It is only shown if an Int ernet address has been provided wit h the appli cation.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 140 Menu functions ⢠App. acce ss to restr ict the applica tion from acces sing the network to prevent you from unexpected costs. Dif ferent categories are shown. Select in each cat egory, if available, one of the follow ing permissions: ⢠Ask every time and the ph one asks alwa ys for net access ⢠Ask first time only and the phone asks on first attempt t o net acces s ⢠Always allowed to allow th e net acces s ⢠Not allowed to not allow the net accesss ⢠Connect via for some applications t hat need specific service s ettings. Your phone is set to us e as default the servi ce settings for the browser. Downlo ading an appl icati on Your phone supports J2ME TM Java applications. Make sure t hat the application is compatible wit h your phone before downloading it . Download content only fr om sources you tr ust. You can download ne w Java applications in dif ferent ways: â¢P r e s s Menu , and selec t Applications , Collection and App. downloads and the lis t of available bookmarks is show n. Select More boo kmarks to access the list of bookmar ks in the Web me nu, see Bookmarks on page 150. Select the a ppropriate bookmar k to connect to the des ired page. If the connection fails, you may not be able t o access t he page f rom the service whos e connect ion settings ar e currently ac tive. In this case, e nter the We b menu a nd activate another set of service settings, see Making a connection to a service on page 146. Try again to connect to the page. For the av ailability of diff erent services, pricing a nd tariffs, cont act your ne twork operator and/or the service provider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 141 Menu functions â¢P r e s s Menu , and selec t We b an d Do wnload links . Select to dow nload an appropriate a pplication or game. See Downloading on page 151. ⢠Use the game download functionality, see G ame downloads on page 137. ⢠Use the Nokia Application installer from PC Suite to download t he applications in your phone. Note tha t Nokia d oes not w arrant for a pplicatio ns from non -Nokia s ites. If you choos e to downl oad Ja va appli cati ons from them , yo u should take the same precaut ions , for securi ty or c ontent , as you w ould wi th any s ite. Note that when downloading an application, it may be sa ved in the Games menu instead of the Applications menu. It is not possible to s tore Java games and applicat ions on the mult imedia card. Memor y stat us for a pplicati ons To view the amount of memor y available for game and a pplication installations , press Menu , and sele ct Applications , Collect ion and Memory . The applications use shared memory, see Sha red memory on page 19. Calcula tor The calculator in your phone adds , subtrac ts, multiplies, divi des, calcula tes the s quare and the square root an d converts currency values . This calc u lator has a limited accur acy and roundin g errors may occur, es pecially in long divis ions. 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Ext ras and Calculat or . 2. When âÂÂ0â is displayed on the s creen, key in th e f irst number in the calculation, press f or a decimal point. 3. Press Options and select Add , Su btr ac t , Multiply , D iv ide , Square , Squar e root or Change sign .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 142 Menu functions Tip: Alternati vely, press once to add, twice t o subtract, t hree times t o multiply or f our times t o divide. 4. Key in the second number. 5. For a total, press Equals . Repeat steps 3 to 5 as many times as is neces sary. 6. To st art a new c alculation, first pr ess and hold Clear . Performing a currency conversion 1. Press Menu , and select Applications , Ext ras and Calculat or . 2. To s ave the exc hange rat e, press Options and select Exchange rate . Select eith er of the di splayed options. Key in th e exchange rate, press f or a decimal point, and pr ess OK . The exc hange rate remains in th e memory until you replace it with another one. 3. To pe rform the currency conversion, k ey in the amount to be c onverted, pr ess Options and select In domestic or In for eign . Tip: You can a lso perform t he currency conv ersion in standby mode. Key in the amount to be converted , press Options and s elect In domestic or In foreign . Coun tdown timer Press Menu , and select Applications , Ex tr as and Countdown timer . Key in the a larm time in hours, minutes and s econds and press OK . If you wish, write your own not e text which is displaye d when t he time expires, and press Sta rt to st art the cou ntdow n time r. ⢠To change the c ountdown time, s elect Change time , or to stop the timer, select Stop timer . If the alarm t ime is reac hed when the phone is in standby mode , the phone sounds a tone a nd flashes the note text if it is se t or else Countdo wn time up . Stop the alarm by pressing a ny key. If no key is
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 143 Menu functions pressed, the a larm automatically s tops within 30 seconds. To sto p the alarm and to delete th e note text, press Exit . Stop watc h You can measure time, take intermediate times or lap ti mes using the s topwatch. Dur ing timing, the other functions of t he phone can be used. To set the st opwatch timing in the background, press . Using the s topwatch consu mes the battery a nd the phone's operating ti me will be red uced. Be careful not to let it run in the b ackg round wh en perform ing other op erations with your pho ne. Time observation and time splitting 1. Press Me nu , and s elect Applications , Extras , Stopwatch and Split timing . You can select Continue if you have set the timing in the ba ckground. 2. Press Sta rt to start t he time obser vation. Press Split every time you want to take an interme dia te time. The int ermediate times are listed below the running time on the display. Scroll to view t he times. 3. Press Stop to stop the time observation. 4. To save the times, press Save and enter a name. Or pr es s Options and select Start t o start t he time obser vation again. The new time is added to t he previous time. Select Res et to rese t the tim e wi thout s aving it. Lap times Press Menu , and select Applications , Ex tr as , Stopwatch and Lap timing . Pres s Start to star t the ti me observation and Lap to take a lap time. Press Stop to s top the lap timing. To save the times, press Save and enter a name. Or pres s Options and you can save or res et the lap times . Refer to Time observation and time splitting on page 143.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 144 Menu functions Viewing and deleting times Press Menu , and select Applications , Ex tr as and Stopwatch . If the stopwatch is not reset , you can select Show last to vi ew the most recent measur ed time. Select View times and a list of name s or final time s of the time sets is shown, select t he time set you want to view. To delete t he saved t imes, select Delete times . Select Delete all and pre ss OK , or select One by one , scroll to the times you want t o delete, pr ess Dele te and press OK . â Web You can access various mobile Internet services with your phoneâÂÂs browser. For example, these s ervices may include we ather reports, news or flight times and fi nancial information. Note : Y o u r p h o n e m u s t b e s w i t c h e d o n t o u s e t h i s f u n c t i o n . D o n o t s w i t c h t h e p h o n e o n w h e n w i r e l e s s phone use is prohi bited or whe n it m ay caus e in terferen ce or dang er. Check the availability of these services, pricing and t ariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose ser vice you wish to use. Serv ice providers will also give you instructions on how to use t heir services. With your phoneâÂÂs brows er you can view the services that use Wireless Mark-Up Language (W ML) or extensible HyperText Mark-up Language (xHTML) on the ir pages. Appearanc e may vary due screen s ize. Note that you may not be able to view all det ails of th e Internet pages. Basi c ste ps f or acc ess ing an d u sin g ser vic es 1. Save the service settings tha t are required t o access the s ervice that you want to use. See page 145. 2. Make a connec tion to the given service. See page 146.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 145 Menu functions 3. Start browsing t he pages of the service . See page 146. 4. Once you are finished browsing, end t he connection to t he service. See p age 148. Se ttin g up the phone for a servi ce You may receive the s ervice settings as a conf iguration message fr om the networ k operator or s ervice provider that offers the s ervice that you want to use. You can als o key in the sett ings manually or a dd and edit the s ettings with PC Suite. For more infor mation and for t he appropriate s ettings, contact t he netw ork operator or service provider that offers the s ervice that you want t o use. To receive the service settings as configuration message, see Configuration settings s ervice on page 33. Key ing in t he serv ice sett in gs manu all y 1. Press Menu , and select We b , Settings and Connection setti ngs . 2. Select Active web s ettings . 3. Scroll t o the connect ion set you would like to activate and press Ac tiv at e . You need to activate the connection s et where you want to save the service settings. A connec tion set is a collection of settings required to make a connection to a service. 4. Select Edit activ e web settings . Select e ach of the set tings one by one and k ey in all t he required set tings according to the information you have receive d from your net work operator or service provider. Note that all t he bearer-relat ed settings ar e in the Bearer settings menu.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 146 Menu functions Making a connect ion t o a s ervice Firs tly, make su re that th e ser v ice setti ngs of th e serv ice yo u want to use are a ctiv ated . To activ ate th e sett ing s: â¢P r e s s Menu , and select We b , Settings and Connection settings . Sele ct Active web s ettings and scroll to the con nection s et you want to act ivate and press Activat e . Secondly, make a connect ion to the s ervice. There are three ways to c onnect: ⢠Open the start page, f or example, the homepage of the s ervice provide r: Press Menu , and select We b an d Home , or in standby mode pres s and hold . ⢠Select a bookmark of the s ervice: Press Menu , and select We b , Bookmarks , and select a bookmark. If the bookmark does not work with the c urrent ac tive service settings, act ivate another se t of service settings and try aga in. ⢠Select t he last URL: Press Menu , and select We b , Last web addr . . ⢠Key in the address of t he service : Press Menu , and select We b an d t he n Go to address . Key in t he addre ss of the se rvice and pr ess OK . Brow si ng the page s of a se rv ice After you have made a connect ion to the s ervice, you can start br owsing its pages. The function of the phone keys may vary in different s ervices. Fo llow the text guides on the phone display. For more information, contact your service provider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 147 Menu functions Note that if GPRS is selected as the data bearer, the indicator is s hown on the top left of the display during browsing. If you receive a call or a text me ssage, or ma ke a call during a (E)GPRS connection, the indicator will be shown on t he top right of the display to indicat e that the (E)GPRS connection is suspended (on hold). After a call, for example, the phone tries to reconnect the (E)GPRS connection. Usi ng t h e ph on e ke ys w hil e bro wsi ng ⢠Use any of t he scroll ke ys to brow se through the pa ge. ⢠To select a highlighted item, press , or pr ess Options to se lect the opt ion for opening the link. ⢠To enter le tters and numbers, press th e keys - and to ent er special c haracters, pres s the k ey . Opti ons whil e browsi ng Press Options and t he following options may be av ailable. The service provider may also of fer other options. Select ⢠Home to re tur n to you r sta rt pa ge. ⢠Shortcuts to open a new lis t of options that are, for example, specific to t he page. This option is only available, if t he page act ually contains shortcuts. ⢠Add bookmark to save the page as a bookmark. ⢠Bookmarks . See Bookmarks on page 150. ⢠His tory to get a list show ing the last visited URLs. ⢠Do wnload links to show t he list of bookmar ks for downloading. ⢠Other options to show a list of other options, for example options for the wallet and some securit y options.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 148 Menu functions ⢠Reload to reload and update the c urrent page. ⢠Quit . See D isconnect from a service on page 148. ⢠Contacts to add or edit cont acts in your phonebook . Note : If yo u hav e tried to a cces s or ha ve acc essed confi dent ial i nforma tion re quiri ng pa sswor ds ( for example, your bank accoun t), empty the cache o f your phone afte r each use. To em pt y th e c ac he , s ee T h e ca c he me m ory on p ag e 1 5 2. Dir ect ca llin g The browser s upports functions th at you can ac cess wh ile browsing. You c an make a phone call, send DTMF tones while a voice call is in progress, and save a name and a phone numbe r from a page. To make a phone call during an active br owsing session pr ess Options , select Other options and Contacts . Select the number you would lik e to call and press . To get back to your Internet connection pres s Ba ck . Dis connect fr om a servic e To quit browsing and to end th e connection, press O ptions and select Quit . W hen Quit browsing? is shown, press Ye s . Alternatively, press twice, or press and hold Appear anc e se tting s of th e br ows er While brows ing, press Options and select Ot her options and Appear . se ttings , or in s tandby mode, press Me nu , and s elect Web , Settings and Appearance settings . ⢠Select Text wrapping . Se lect On and the text continues on the next line. If you s elect Off , the text will be abbreviat ed.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 149 Menu functions ⢠Select Font si ze and select Small , Normal or Large . ⢠Select Show images . Selec t No and any pictures appe aring on the page are not s hown. This can speed up the brows ing of page s that contain a lot of pictu res. ⢠Select Alerts and select Alert for unsecure connection and Ye s to set the phon e to ale rt whe n a secure connec tion changes to a n unsecure one during br owsing. Select Alert for unsecure items and Ye s to se t the phone to al ert wh en a sec ure pa ge co ntains an unsecure it em. Note th at these alerts do not guarantee a secure connection. For more information, see Brows er security on page 152. ⢠Select Char acter encoding to select the character set that the phone uses for showing browser pages that do not include that information or to select whet her to alw ays use UTF-8 encoding when sending a Web address to a compatible phone . Cookie s A cookie is data that a s ite saves in your phoneâÂÂs brows er cach e memory. The data can be, for exa mple, your user informat ion or your browsing preferenc es. Cookies will be saved until y ou clear the cache memory, see The c ache memory on pa ge 152. 1. While browsing, press Options and select Other opt ions , Sec urity and Cookie sett ings , or in standby mode, press Menu , and select Web , Set tings , Securi ty se ttings and Cookies . 2. Select Allow or Reject to allow or pr event the phone receiv ing cookies.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 150 Menu functions Book mark s While browsing you can save pa ge addres ses as bookmarks in the phoneâÂÂs memory, see Options while browsing on page 14 7 . To us e the bookmarks: 1. While browsing, press Options and select Bookmarks , or in standby mode, press Menu , and select Web an d Bookmarks . 2. Scroll t o the bookmark you want t o use and press Select to make a connect ion to the page associated with the bookmark. 3. Select Options to view the ti tle and the address of t he selected book mark, ed it or delete t he selected bookmark, or send it directly to another p hone as a book mark, or a s a text mess age, or create a new bookmark, or save it to a folder . Note that your phone may have some pre-installed bookmarks for sites not affiliated to Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for secur ity or conte nt, as you would with any Internet site. Recei ving a bookma rk When you have r eceived a bookmark (sent as a bookmar k) 1 bookmark receive d is displayed. Press Show to view t he bookmark To save the book mark, pres s Sav e , or press Options and sele ct View to see the details or Del ete to disc ard it. To discard the bookmark direct ly after you have rec eived the bookmark, press Exit and OK .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 151 Menu functions Downlo ading 1. To download mor e tones, image s, games or applications to your phone (netwo rk service), pres s Menu , and s elect Web and Do wnload links . 2. Select Tone downloads , Graphic downloads , Game downloads , Video downloads or App. downloads to download tones , images, games, v ideos or appl ications, respectively. Download content only from sources you trust. Service inbox The phone is able to receive service messages (p ushe d messages) sent by your service provider (net work service). Servic e messages are notifications of , for ex ample, news headlines, and they may contain a text message or an address of a se rvice. To acces s the Service inbo x in standby mode, when you hav e receiv ed a service mes sage, pres s Show . ⢠I f y o u p r e s s Exit the message is moved to the Service inbox . To acce ss the Service inbox lat er, press Menu , and s elect Web and Service inbox . To acces s the Service inbo x while browsing, press Options and select Other options and Se rvice inbox . Scroll to t he message you want, press Options . Select Retrieve to activa te the browser a nd download t he ma rke d co nt ent , or De tails to display de tailed information on the service not ification, or select De lete to delet e it. Serv ice inbox s etti ngs Press Menu , and select We b , Settings and Service inbox settings . ⢠Select Se rvice mes sages and On (or Off ) t o set the phone to r eceive (or not to r eceive) s ervice message. Select Message filter and On (or Off ) to set the phone to receiv e (or not to rece ive) service
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 152 Menu functions messages only from content a uthors approved by the serv ice provider. To view the list of the approved content a uthors, se lect Trusted channels . ⢠Select Aut omatic connection . If you have s et the phone to r eceive service messages and select On , the phone w ill automatically activate th e browser f rom standby mode when the phone has recei ved a service message. If you s elect Off , the phone will acti vate the brows er only after you have select ed Retriev e when the phone has receiv ed a servic e message. The cache memory The information or services you have accessed ar e stored in the cache of your phone. A c ache is a buffer memory, whic h is used to store data t emporarily. To empty the cache: ⢠while browsing, pres s Options and sele ct Other options and Clear the cache , or ⢠in standby mode, press Me nu , and s elect We b , and Clear the cache . Brows er secu rit y Security features may be r equired for some services, such as bank ing services or shopping on a site. For such connections you need secu rity certificates and possibly a s ecurity module which may be available on your SIM car d. For more information, contact your service provider. Secur ity modu le The security module can contain certif icates as well as private and public keys. T he purpose of t he security module is to improve security services for applications requiring br owser connec tion, and allows you to use a digit al signature. The certific ates are saved in the s ecurity module by the service provider.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 153 Menu functions Press Menu and select Web , Settings , Secu rity settings and Secur ity module settings . Sele ct ⢠Security module details t o show the s ecurity module title, its s tatus, manufacture r and serial number. ⢠M odu le P IN req uest t o set the phone to ask f or the module PIN when us ing services pr ovided by security module. Key in the code and sele ct On . To disable t he module PIN reques t, select Of f . ⢠Change module PIN to change the module PIN, if allowed by the security module. Enter the current module PIN code , then enter t he new code twice. ⢠Change signing PIN . Select t he signing PIN you want to ch ange. Enter the current PIN code, then enter the new code twice . See also Access cod es on page 15. Cert ificat es There are three kinds of certif icates: server c ertificates , authority cer tificates and user cer tificates. ⢠The phone uses a server certificate t o create a connection w ith improved secur ity to th e content server. The phone receives the server certificate from the se rvice provide r bef ore the connection is established and its validity is checked us ing the authority certificate s saved in t he phone. Server certificate s are not saved. The security indic ator is displaye d during a connect ion, if the da ta transmission bet ween the phone and t he content server is encrypted. ⢠Authority certificates are used by some services, such as banking service s, for checking the validity of other certificates. Author ity certificates can either be saved in the security module by t he service provider, or they can be downloaded from the network, if the service supports the use of authority certificate s.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 154 Menu functions ⢠User certif icates ar e issued to user s by a Certifying Authority. User cer tificates are r equired, for example, t o make a digital signature and t hey asso ciate the user with a specific privat e key in a security module. Important: Note, however, that even if the use of certificat es mak es the risks involved in remote conne ctions and softwar e installation considerably smaller, t hey must be us ed correctly in order t o benefit f rom increased s ecurity. The existence of a cert ificate does not offer any p rotection by itself; the c ertificate manager must contain correct, aut hentic, or trusted certificat es for increased security to be available. Important: Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid yet i s shown even if t he cer tificate should be valid, chec k that t he current dat e and time in your phone ar e correct. Important: Befo re changing these s ettings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the cert ificate and that the ce rtificate really belongs to t he listed owner . Digi tal si gnatur e You can make digital s ignatures with your phone if your SIM card has a s ecurity module. Th e signature can be t raced back to y ou via the private key on the security module and t he user c ertificate t hat was used to perform t he signature. Using the digit al signature can be t he same as s igning your name to a paper bill, contract or ot her document. To make a digital signature, select a link on a page, for e xample, the title of the book you want to buy and its price. T he text t o sign (possibly including amount, da te, etc.) will be shown. Check that the he ader text is Re ad and that t he digital signature icon is shown. Note : If the digit al signatur e icon does not appear, ther e is a security breach, a nd you should not enter any personal data such as your signing PIN.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Menu functions 155 Menu functions To sign the t ext, rea d all of the text firs t and then you can select Sign . Note : The t ext may not fit within a single s creen. Theref ore, make sur e to scroll t hrough and read all of the text bef ore signing. Select the user certificat e you wa nt to use. Key in t he signing PIN (see General infor mation on pag e 15) and press OK . The digit al signature icon wi ll disappear , and the service may displa y a confirma tion of your purchase. â SIM se rv ices In addition to th e functions available on the phone, your SIM car d may provide additional services that you c an access in Menu 15. Menu 15 is s hown only if it is supported by your SIM card. The na me and conte nts of the menu de pend entirely on the service av ailable. Note : For availa bility, ra tes and informat ion on using S IM services, contact your SIM card vendor, e. g. netwo rk ope rator, servic e pro vider o r other vend or. You can set the phone to s how you the conf irmation messages sent between y our phone and the network when you are using the SIM s ervices by selecting the option Ye s within the menu Confir m SIM service actions , in Phone s ettings . Note that ac cessing thes e services may involv e sen ding messages or making a phone call for which you may be charged.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. PC C o nnec tivity 156 PC C o nnec tivity 7. PC Co n ne cti vity You can send and receive e- mails, and a ccess the Internet when your phone is connected to a compatible PC via an IR or Bluet ooth wireless conne ction or via a data cable (D KU-2) connection (USB). You can use y our phone with a variety of PC connect ivity and data communicat ions applications. Wi th PC Suite you can, for ex ample, synchronis e contacts, cale ndar and to -do notes and notes between your phone and the c ompatible PC or a remote Inte rnet server (network s ervice). You may fi nd more information and downloadable files , for exampl e PC suite, in t he support area on the Nok iaâÂÂs web s ite, w ww.nokia.com. â PC Su ite The PC Suit e contains the following applications: ⢠Nokia Application Installer to install J2ME Java applica tions from the compatible PC to the phone, for example games and dictionaries . ⢠Nokia Audio Manager to creat e music for your phone. ⢠Nokia Image Converter to mak e images in supported formats us able for multimedia me ssages or wallpaper and t o transfer the m to your phone. ⢠Nokia Sound Converter to optimise polyphonic ringing tones in supported formats t o be compatible with your phone and to transfer them t o your phone. ⢠Nokia Content Copier to back up and restore personal data between your phone and a compa tible PC. Supports also c ontent transfer t o another compa tible Nokia phone. ⢠Nokia Phone Editor to send text messages and edit the cont acts in your phone .
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. PC C o nnec tivity 157 PC C o nnec tivity ⢠Nokia Phone Browser to view t he contents of the Galler y folder of y our phone on a compat ible PC. You can browse picture and audio files and als o modify files in the phoneâÂÂs memory and transfer files between phone and the PC. ⢠Nokia Multimedia Player to f or playi ng sounds, images, videos and multimedia messages on t he PC. Multimedia Player allows you to view multime dia received on your phone or v ia e-mail. ⢠Nokia PC Sync to synchronise contacts, calenda r and to-do not es between your phone and a compatible PC. ⢠Nokia Modem Options contains settings for H SCSD and GPRS connections. ⢠Nokia Connection Manager to select t he connect ion type between t he PC and the phone. ⢠Nokia 6230 data modem dr ivers enable you t o use your phone as a mode m. ⢠Language Selection to select the language used duri ng an installation of PC Suite and the PC Suite application itself. ⢠HTML He l p to support the application usage. Copyright protection ma y prevent s ome images, ri nging tones and ot her content f rom being copied, modified, transfer red or forwarded.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. PC C o nnec tivity 158 PC C o nnec tivity (E)GP RS, HSC SD and CSD With your phone you can use t he (E)GPRS (Enhanced G PRS), GPRS (General Packe t Radio Ser vice), HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data) and CSD (Circuit Switched D ata, GSM data ) data ser vices. For availability and subscription to data s ervices, contact your network operator or service provider. Note that t he use of H SCSD services consumes the phoneâ s battery fas ter than normal voice or data calls. You ma y need to connect the phone to a charger for the duration of dat a transfer. See (E)GPRS modem settings on page 105 . â Us ing data comm un icatio n appl icat ions For information on using a data communication application, refer to the documentation provided wit h it. Note that making or answer ing phone calls during a computer c onnection is not recommended as it might disrupt the oper ation. For better performance during dat a calls, place the phone on a s tationary surfa ce with the keypad facing downward. D o not move the phone by holding it in your hand during a data c all.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. Batter y informat ion 159 Batter y informat ion 8. Bat tery i nform ati on â Cha rging a nd Disch argi ng Your phone is p owered b y a recha rgea ble batter y. Note tha t a new battery's full pe rformance is achieved only after two or three co mplete charge and discharge cycles ! The batt ery can be charged a nd discharged hund reds of times but i t w ill eventu ally wear ou t. When the operati ng time ( talk-time and st andby time) i s noticeably short er than normal, it is time to buy a ne w battery. Use only bat teri es ap pro ved by the pho ne ma nuf actu rer an d rech arge yo ur bat te ry on ly with the c har ge rs a ppr ove d by the m anufac turer. Unplug the c harger whe n not in us e. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger fo r long er than a week, since overc hargin g may short en its lifet ime. If left unuse d a fully charged battery wi ll discharge itse lf over time. Tempera ture ex tremes can affe ct the abili ty of your ba ttery to ch arge. Use the ba ttery only for its inte nded purpose. Never use a ny charger or battery which is dama ged. Do not short-circu it the battery. Acci dental short-ci rcuiting can occur when a metallic o bject (coin , clip or pen) causes di rect connectio n of the and - terminals of th e battery (metal s trips on the b attery) for examp le when you carry a spare ba ttery in your pocket o r purse. Short- circuitin g the terminals may dama ge the battery or th e connectin g objec t. Leaving the battery in h ot or cold pla ces, such as in a cl osed car in summe r or winter cond itions , will reduce the capacity a nd lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 1 5ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A phone with a hot or cold battery ma y temporarily n ot work, even when the batt ery is full y charged. Ba tteries ' perfo rmance is part icularly l imited in temperatu res well be low freez ing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire! Disp ose of batt eries a ccordin g to l ocal regul ations (e.g. r ecycli ng). Do no t dispo se as h ous ehold w aste.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. CARE AND MAIN TENANCE 160 CARE AND MAIN TENANCE CA RE A ND M A INT EN AN CE Yo ur p hon e is a pr odu ct of su perior des ign a nd cr aft smansh ip and s hould be t reat ed wit h car e. The su gge sti on s below will help you to ful fil any warranty obligati o ns and to enjo y this pro duct for many yea rs. ⢠Kee p the p hon e and al l its parts a nd ac ce ssor ie s ou t of th e reac h of s mall chi ldren . ⢠Keep the p hone dry. Pre cipitat ion, humid ity and all type s of liquid s or moisture can co ntain mine rals that w ill corrode e lectronic circ uits. ⢠Do not u se or store the ph one i n d usty, d irty a reas. Its movi ng part s c an be da mag ed. ⢠Do not sto re the ph one in hot area s . Hig h temperatur es can sho rten the li fe o f el ectronic de vices, damag e batter ies, a nd warp or melt certai n pla stics. ⢠Do not sto re the ph one in cold ar eas. When it warms up (to its n ormal temp eratu re), mois ture can fo rm inside, which may d amage electron ic circuit board s. ⢠Do not atte mpt to open the phone. Non- expert handlin g may damage it . ⢠Do not drop, knock o r shake the pho ne. Roug h hand ling can break int ernal circui t bo ards. ⢠Do not u se ha rsh chemica ls, cleani ng solve nts, or stro ng dete rgents to clean the phone. ⢠D o no t pa int th e pho ne. Pa in t can clo g the movi ng par ts and p reven t p rop er o pe rati on. ⢠Use a s oft, clean, d ry cl oth to clean any lenses ( such as cam era, proxi mity se nsor, an d light s ensor). ⢠Us e only the sup pli ed or a n app rove d repl aceme nt a ntenn a. Una uthori sed antenn as , modifi cations or attach ments could da mage the phone and may v iola te regu latio ns gov erning rad io dev ices. All of the above suggestio ns apply equall y to your phone, bat tery, charger or any accessory. If any of th em is not work ing properl y, take it to your neares t qualifie d service facility. Th e personne l there will assist yo u and, if necessary, arrange for service.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION 161 IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION IMPORTANT SA FETY INF ORMATION â Traffic Safety Do not use a h and-h eld tele phone whil e drivin g a vehicle. Al ways secur e the phone in its holder ; do not pla ce the phone on th e pas seng er se at o r where it c an bre ak loose i n a co llisi on or sudde n stop . Remember road safety always comes first! â Operating e nviron ment Rememb er to follow an y special regu lation s in force in any area and always s witch off yo ur phone when ever it is forb idden to use it , or when it ma y cause interf erenc e or danger. Use th e phone only in it s normal o perating position s. Parts of th e pho ne are magne tic. Metallic mat erials may be att racted to t he pho ne, a nd pers ons w ith a he arin g aid should not hold the phone to the ea r with the hear ing aid. Always secure the p hone in it s holder, beca use metall ic materi a ls may be att racted by th e earpie ce. Do not place credit cards o r other mag netic storage media nea r the phone, because in formati o n store d on them may be erased . â Electroni c devi ces Most modern electronic e quipment is shielded from radio freque ncy (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipmen t may not be shiel ded against the RF signals from your wire less phone. Pacemakers Pacemake r manufacturer s recommen d that a minimum s eparatio n of 20 cm (6 inches) be maintaine d between a handhel d wire less pho ne an d a pa cemak er to a void p ote ntial in terfe rence with t he pa cemak er. The se recomme ndations are consisten t with the indep endent res earch by and recommen dations of Wireles s Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers:
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION 162 IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION ⢠Should always kee p the phone mo re than 2 0 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker when the phon e is switched on; ⢠Shoul d not carry t he phone in a b reast p ocket; ⢠Should u se the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the pote n tial for interference. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your phone immediately. Hearing aids Some digit a l wirele ss phones may interf ere with some h earing aids . In the event of such inte rference, yo u may want to consult your serv ice provi der. Other medical devices Opera tion of any ra dio transm itting e quipm ent, in cludin g cel lular ph ones, may int erfere w ith the f unctiona lity of inad equate ly pro tected medi cal d evice s. Con sult a physici an or the manufac ture r of the medi cal d evice t o dete rmine if they a re adeq uately shiel d ed fro m externa l RF energy or i f you have any q uestio ns. Switch o ff your phone in h ealth care fa cilities when any regu lations pos ted in these areas inst ru ct you to do so. Hospit als or health care faci lities may be using equipmen t that could be sensitiv e to externa l RF energy . Vehicles RF sign als may affect imp roperl y installe d or inadequa tely shiel ded electro nic system s in motor ve hicles (e .g. electro nic fuel injection systems, e lectronic anti- skid (a nti-lock) bra king systems, elect ronic speed co ntrol systems , air-bag systems). Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding yo ur vehicle. You should also consult the manu facturer of any eq uipmen t that has been ad ded to your vehicle. Posted facilities Switc h your phone of f in an y faci lity w her e pos ted noti ces s o re quire.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION 163 IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION â Potential ly exp losi ve atmosp heres Swi tch of f yo ur phon e wh en in an y ar ea wit h a po ten tia lly ex pl osiv e atmo sph ere and obey a ll s igns and instru ctions. Spa rks in such ar eas could cause an explos ion or fire res ulting in bodily injury o r even death. User s are advis ed to swit ch off the pho ne when at a refuell ing point (service statio n). Users are re minded of th e need t o obs erve r estr ictio ns on the us e of r adio e qu ipmen t in f uel de pots (fuel sto rage a nd di stri bution area s), chemi cal plan ts or where b lasti ng operatio ns are in progress . Areas with a potenti ally explosi ve atmosphere are often but not always clearly ma rked. They i n clude bel o w deck on boats; chem ical trans fer or s torag e f aciliti es; v ehicle s usi ng liqui fied pe trol eum g as (su ch a s propa ne or buta ne); area s wh ere the air c ont ains ch emi cals or par ticle s, su ch as g rai n, dust or me tal po wd ers; an d any oth er are a whe re you would normally b e advis ed to turn off your v ehicle engi ne. â Vehicles Only qua lified personnel should service th e phone, or install the phone in a veh icle. Faulty in stall ation or servi ce may be dangero us and may invalidate any warranty which may appl y to the unit. Chec k regularly th at all wir eles s phone equ ipment in y our vehicl e is mounted and operati n g pr operly. Do not sto re or carry f lammable l iquids, gases or expl osive materials in the same compa rtment as th e phone, its parts or access ori es. For ve hicles equi pped with a n a ir ba g, reme mbe r that a n a ir ba g infl ates with grea t forc e. Do not place objec ts, includ ing b oth i nstal led or port able w irel ess equipm ent in the area over t he a ir ba g or in the air b ag de ploym ent area. I f in-veh icle wirel ess equip ment is improp erly ins talled and the air bag in flates, s erious inju ry could re s ult. Using your phone whil e in the air is proh ibited. Switch off your p hone before boarding an aircraft. The us e of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dange rous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone networ k and may be illega l. Failure to obs erve t hese inst ructio ns may le ad to suspe nsion o r denial of tele phone s ervices t o the o ffender, or legal acti on or both.
Copyright é 2003 Nokia. All right s reserved. IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION 164 IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION â Emergenc y calls Impor tan t: This p hon e, lik e an y wir eless phone , o perat es u sing radio signa ls, w irel ess and l andl ine netwo rks as we ll as use r-programme d funct ions. Beca use of t his, conne ctions in a ll cond itions can not be guarantee d. Therefo re, you shoul d never rely solely upo n any wireless phone fo r essentia l communicatio ns (e.g. med ical emerg encies). Emerg ency c alls may not be possi ble on al l wir eless phone ne twor ks or wh en cert ain net work service s and/ or phone fe atures are in use . Check wit h local ser vice provi ders. To make an emergency call: 1. If the p hone is not on, s witch it on. Check fo r adequa te signa l strength. Some n etwo rks ma y re quire that a va lid SI M ca rd is properl y ins erte d in the phon e. 2. P ress as many ti mes as needed (e. g. to exit a call, to ex it a menu, etc . ) to clea r the disp lay and rea d y the phone for calls. 3. Key in the emergency numbe r for your p resent lo cation (e.g. 112, 91 1 or ot her offici al emerge ncy numb er). Emer gency nu mbe rs va ry by l oca tion. 4. Pr ess the key. If certain features are in use, you m ay first need to turn those feature s off before you can make an em ergency call. Consult this guid e and your l ocal ce llular serv ice provi der. When mak ing an emergency call, rem ember to give all th e necessary in format ion as accurately a s possibl e. Rememb er that your wire less phone ma y b e the only mea ns of communica tion at the sce ne of an accide nt - do not cut off the call until given perm ission to do so.
Copyright é 2004 Nokia. All right s reserved. IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION 165 IMPOR TANT SAFETY INFORMAT ION â C ert ific ati on i nfo rma tio n (S AR ) THIS MODEL PH ONE ME ETS THE EU R EQUIREMENTS FO R EXPOSUR E TO RADIO W AVES. Your mob ile phone is a radio tra nsmitter and receive r. It is desig ned and ma nufactured not to excee d the limits for expos ure to radi ofrequency ( RF) energy reco mmended by The Counci l of the Europ ean Union. Th ese limi ts are part of compreh ensive g uideline s and est ablish permi tted levels of RF energ y for the gen eral pop ulation. The guidel ines were deve loped b y inde penden t sc ientifi c orga nisat ions throug h peri odic a nd th orou gh eva luati on of sci entifi c studi es. The limi ts include a su bstantial s afety ma rgin desig ned to assure t he safety of a ll persons, reg ardless of age and hea lth. Th e e xpos ure sta nda rd for mobi le ph ones empl oys a un it of mea surem ent kno wn a s t he S pecif i c Ab sor pt io n Ra te, or SAR. Th e SAR limit r ecommended by The Council of the Europe an Union is 2. 0 W/kg.* Tes ts for SA R have been conduc ted usi ng st anda rd ope rati ng posi tions with t he pho ne t ransm itting a t its highes t certi fied p ower l evel i n all tested freq uency band s. Alt hough t he S AR is determ ined a t the highe st cer tified pow er leve l, t he act ual SA R leve l of the pho ne whil e operating can be well below the max imum value. Th is is becaus e the phone is designed to o p e r a t e a t m u l t i p l e p o w e r l e v e l s s o a s t o u s e o n l y t h e p o w e r r e q u i r e d t o r e a c h t h e n e t w o r k . I n g e n e r a l , t h e c l o s e r you are to a b ase station anten na, the low er the power outpu t. Before a phone model i s availab le for sale to the public, co mpliance with th e Europe an R&TTE direct ive must be shown . This dir ective inclu des as one essential r equireme nt the protecti o n of the health a nd the safety fo r the user and any other person. The hi ghest SAR value for thi s model phone w hen tested for us e at the ear is 0.59 W/kg. While there m ay be diffe rence s betw een the SAR leve ls of various phon es and at va rious posi tions, t hey a ll me et th e EU requirements for RF exposure. This product meets RF exposu re gui delines when used eit h er in the normal use positio n again st the ea r or whe n posit ioned at leas t 1.5 cm away fr om the body. When a carry case, belt clip or hol der is used for body-worn opera tion, i t sho uld n ot cont ain metal an d should pos ition the pr oduc t at le ast 1.5 c m aw ay fro m your bod y. * T he SAR limit fo r mob ile phon es use d by th e pub lic is 2.0 w atts/kil o gram (W/kg) av eraged over ten grams of tissue. The li mit incorpora tes a sub stantial marg in of safet y to give additi o nal protect ion for the public and to account for any varia tions in measureme nts. SAR value s may vary depe nding on nation al reportin g requir ements and the network ban d. For SAR inform ation in othe r re gion s plea se look unde r produ ct in form ation a t ww w.nok ia.co m.